Home

Expression 3 - Premier Lighting and Production Company

1. 5West e 39 11 Noe 76 40 W Augusta ME ssss 5 West BAO AQ IN iiie 69 48 W Billi Sy sitters ET WS ABAJO NL ees 108 32 W Bose Dicta a 7WSest e 43 36 Nissan 116 13 W Boston MA 5 West 42 20 Noni 71 O1 W Buffalon Vcc tree eras 5bWest e A Nuus 78 51 W Burlington VT 5 West eec AS NN 73 13 W Charleston SC ss DW OS inicia a 929 VEI NE s sett 79 59 W Cheyenne WY 6 West 41 08 N 104 47 W Chicago IL ei ente 6 West eeesene 49 50 IN sr 87 41 W Columbus OH s 45 MISSE eu ene 40 00 N s 82 53 W Dallas TX ive earns 6 West ee 929 47 NS tese 96 45 W Denver CO wo eee 7 West 39 46 N 104 52 W Des Moines lA 6 West AVE BAP Ne canrsieeenat ct 93 37 W Detroit Ml i iis 3 5 ANGSE S eere 422 22 AAA 83 06 W Fargo ND vir acris mies 6West ere 469 527 A 96 49 W Hartford CT ou eee 5 West ZT9 45 Nass 72 41 W Honolulu Hl 10 West 219 397 NS satt 157 48 W Kansas City MO r6 West 999 07 Nica 94 33 W Las Vegas NV ee 7 West 369127 Netieti tette 115 13 W Lincoln NE 6 West 40 48 N e 96 41 W Little Rock AR 6West
2. 29 Read configuration only 255 Digitizer installation 338 340 Read show only 255 Dimmer Write configuration 253 About Dimmer 51 Write showfile 253 About with ETCLink 52 Display Check ous Se Tere ed 50 Bliss Lia 14 90 plear loads L5 ol ES 275 Channel Attributes 57 Dimmer check 50 Clear Functions 262 Dimmer Status display 271 CUA Er E ri ba 180 DMX512 portstart 333 Dimmer System Status 269 DMX512 speed 334 Diskette Functions 251 Error messages 267 ETCLink Functions 265 Installation o oo o 332 Eader esos n eG Se nee 14 EA ee Ue te iS 44 Fixture patch 2 72 Load check 274 Flexichannel 2205 15 Park dimer onde 198 General features 13 Pate lites societa tr eR tene 39 41 Hp ML 21 PIQUE cia d p LL 332 Mac tu libb Sp SEM eee SS 236 Port setup oo e eA ES eo tas 333 MONTONE o tta ete 11 Rack Statuses o lp Es 270 Output Configuration 333 Record loads 273 RA E A E E EE e 18 SOllSOF ac std ena i eee shoes 265 Patchiz o ure Gee be eh Ps 17 SO um Wah A CECI Pa 276 Playback cado etse ber ous 19 Strand CD80 rack 54 PANEFUNCUON S sneri o 258 Unpate Ma p does e Re 43 Rack status 270
3. 289 A ite ee ate tes 259 Record CUOI conto uoce doge tet tes nah fi 93 Dimmer loads 273 Disable with Lockout 33 Explanation 87 ROMO WE iur S43 a Bes he 95 INK GUeS s acre tiie Dae ad eed 94 Multipart cues 118 121 Record display 21 Record Lockout 33 Recorded channels 56 Recording cue with Solo 98 137 Recording focus point with Solo 149 Sub minus sub 168 Submasters 162 164 Recorded channels defined 56 Region Gleaf s oae oma o vacet ree 319 COPY disks ee id ae to 318 Macro Wait 317 Programming 316 Release captured channels 56 Index Remote dimmer patching 73 Remote Focus Unit RFU ADQUE 0k Lees es bte 314 Installation 341 Remote Interface DIP switches jumpers 351 Installation 350 Software upgrade 346 Remote Macro Installation o 344 Remote Macro connectors 344 Remote Unit Upgrade display 347 Remote Video Interface DIP switch settings 353 354 Software upgrade 346 Reset Categories a oor re Der 76 Dimmer profiles 48 EneoderS e Ss bh eu a a 79 Fixture attributes 76 Profle Soi n n a e 263 Reset system 00 oo 262 S Selected channels defined
4. 329 Events Editi i eR RE S 299 Expand command 11 F Fade MultiBart sese 123 Rater De aote L6 ana pO ede gus 132 Types dba e PORE USES 86 Fade time Changing for submaster 165 EIS C hace oce Led ent c 222 Recording cue 91 92 Set cue default 26 SUBOUTING road 229 Fader Back Key s codes 127 Background s a lade ds 4 AN 127 Default Clear Time 27 Display se sx dar ia 14 DMX IN L3 virer oid sa hex 14 O ee RD IE 127 AAA PTT 127 Manual doc lateral ore S e 131 Specifications 371 O A CREE 126 Fixture Definition 7 Delete caida ras 74 Lau catas 73 Olesa parco dat rl str del 8 Release captured channels 56 Selva Sido a UE 81 Solo Gliee koe ees tees 83 Fixture attribute About Channel 65 Index Cate GOR osos tene eee te 75 DESTINO uer 7 Print Setup ces bep s 259 Reset defaults 76 A par era eh ead be 76 Fixture Dox a tia RR 80 Fixture patch See also Patch DMX512 start ees 73 Fixture DO ie cerea ER dn 80 Elis set RO Med Pun mid DOS 73 Personality 73 Pl bic oie tne bk 259 Remote dimmer 73 Start channel 73 SWeap TODlS a e ae uoc Rn Baca Dd 73 Flash e oid one ee ees 62 Flexichannel Enable Disable 31 P rge 3Elexi a eo o ge te 15 61 Sample macro 243 Selecting channels 61 Update iecore t SEP
5. 236 AAA dad oa en Beak bes e 241 TA ee ae e A AAN 234 LinkcterGues a sea urb a ea 97 Link to macro 005 238 Macro Walt oer od Pees 237 Modify octet a dane Re eee als 241 PAV ch memet ihe es mat Hee 240 PEE ui n AES eo menmt srt er 259 Hemotecz a s Lat o RR Es 345 SatTiples s us esta m teme de es 242 Specifications 374 Sub Bump 0000000 239 Index Macros Designer s Worksheet Clearing regions 319 Macro Walt 317 Manual OvVerride cue d poer veu 131 Override submaster fade 174 Master slider 32 Master type setting 32 METON 2 tt bem 38 Memory utilization 38 Menu Clear Functions 262 Diskette Functions 251 Print Functions 258 MIDI See also Time code program Out Thru jumper 343 MIDI Show Control See also ETC MIDI Commands ja ur ela iin cen 284 Contig riBg iub ERI ex 283 Disable 0005 283 Installation o 342 Interfacing with 342 Message definitions 282 ML Module For Expression 2x 77 Installation 323 SETUP sie dune eke ET LES d 323 Use to set levels 81 Modify Cue attributes 101 Macs od ahi PEERS 241 Multipart fade and wait 123 S brmaster fice wok eek ed 171 Mouse Butt
6. Return gt Setup Dimmer Status 3 Return gt ETC Link Load Management 4 Print Screen System Status Load Check Select Dimmer Record Loads Rack Status Clear Loads Cancel OO NI O O1 A O N Return gt ETC Link Return gt ETC Link Return gt ETC Link Setup Profiles 10 Channel Attributes 11 Profiles Channel Attributes LL Profile Independent Link Percent Flip X Channe Clear All 16 Bit Y Channe Clear to End Previous Page Fill Between Next Page Insert Link Copy to Profile LTP Delete Lin Reset Profile Link List gt LL Move Link e NI O A O N Return gt Setup Return gt Setup Return gt Chan Att Appendix E Softkeys Setup Real Time Programs 12 Real Time Programs RTP2 Select Program Insert Program Time Copy Program Astro Clock Move Program Days Date Previous Page Macro Next Page Label Delete Program More Softkeys gt RTP 2 More Softkeys gt RTP oj NI T A O N Setup Time Code 13 Return gt Setup Time Code TC Sort TC 2 TC 3 Internal Clock Select Event Insert Event Clock Enable Disable Code Time Copy Event Manual Mode Cue Move Event Pause Mode Rate Previous Page Step Bump Next Page
7. 56 Sensor Backup looks 277 Dimmer Doubling 53 Monitoring 265 272 System status o o 269 Serial interface 311 Set Channel levels 55 62 64 Channels to submasters 32 COCK a E td e o e 34 36 Default fade time 26 Default fader clear time 27 Detault 6VeEl es eve ta ales 27 Default sneak time 28 Designer s Worksheet options 29 Bimmer tas ets scm hrs 276 Dimmer levels 50 Grandmaster type 32 latitude ius ee are S 36 Level key 27 Longitude edes v Gee Ss 36 LTP HTP channel 59 Master type 0000 32 Show name s sov were ERE 37 Ure ZOMG ie ve m Stt ens 36 Sheetsliders cho mort keds ee 30 Show Clear cc bet Ree ek La that ca 263 NAME swe eet ete Mie ee e 37 Show dimmer labels 44 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Showfile Configuration contents 359 Explained 205 253 Show contents 359 Slider Masters gt sae 32 Slider Master 0 00 32 SMPTE See Time code program Sneak Set default tiMe 28 Use x se ead dod tut nfi aer cs 63 Softkeys ADOUt reu UA RE 13 Ela ud DAE RE Dp 62 QUICKSEteD x62 arc Loo a 133 Unload sub ues etu 177 Software Upgrading a console 346 Upgrading remote interfaces 346 Solo Fi
8. The first 17 submasters are shown initially in the Submaster List Page through the rest of the submasters using the S5 Next Page and S4 Previous Page keys Unrecorded submasters are shown with a gray number in the Sub first column A recorded pile on submaster has a green Sub number an inhibitive submaster has a red Sub number an effect submaster has a white Sub number The Submaster List on the playback monitor has the same color coding The currently selected submaster page is shown following the words Sub Page at the top left of the display Change submaster pages as explained in Specifying a submaster s page page 168 In general the Page Loaded shown in column two will agree with Sub Page except for those submasters that were on stage when the current Sub Page was selected see Submaster pages page 160 The column marked 96 shows the submaster s current level on stage as determined by its slider Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 181 182 Note the following with regard to defaults in the Command Submaster List display e Pile on is the default type for a newly defined submaster e Bump status does not display unless changed from the default which is enabled e Dwell time defaults to manual e Rate does not display unless changed from the default which is 100 Navigation and Feedback Submaster List I 4 a s Select a submaster X Select a field X X White row selected subma
9. 0 ee 225 Running an effect cue o 225 Usindg ariettect subrmaster axes eben e PA ooh dem 225 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Chapter 17 Subroutines A eee oes ior 227 Stepsssn o os aree eti Ei a erii sr tie E peo a iN ara 228 CUE Steps ov ea cem dedo prt o crt bres 228 SV IO STODS ces rec Acute tee ete en te hoe deae ERR Oa red esa 229 Subroutine attributes liie 229 Creating SUBLOUTINGS 2 2905 OO Ae ed ak CoA n AE 230 Editinga subroutine octo Sete tn eae tto eS M DR ern 232 Deleting a step e 232 Inserting a Step isiin sc ye Met DA Ee en 232 Chapter 18 Macros sss 233 Creating Macros ss esu eoa ed ee A reale ey Dui a 234 Using I ears s sdb Ted C e ene ace td 234 Using Macro Editing x ee Cete ep et 236 Macro Wall iue pal a ese eae dub Dec mp de toa ve 237 LinkIndirmacroS xcu a Su G HM Ee 238 Using submasters in macros 0 0 00 eee 239 Playing Macros eoo te peo a ee SUR ha nee ae Ble 240 Cancellng a Macro aane tede me mite ee ad a i 240 POWEerUp Macro stets OM cade Sees uguale ade ger Sea a 240 Modifying macros sx voL ssim bad c Ae Lace EO ovd 241 Clearing tr ectes 3 tme rie esee wy ER puc EDT te 241 Copying matos ule dns v euet s Poly oe rep des e dius 242 Sample Macros spe in SERI INN PE 242 Chapter 19 A RBS Oto E De e ERR eh 245 Lini EISt OVerVIOW o eoe oh ORO Y RSS Y IP 246 Seting Upa lk su we seo are end CST dS 247 IriSertirig a Ines onam e Sete ee Ree EO E rae OD US 248
10. 4 Press S1 Independent 5 Press 1 Enter Flipped channels Action Selects Setup menu Selects Channel Attributes display Selects channel s Prompt reads Enable disable independent channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Channels in ML fixture patch cannot be edited except label Each selected channel is set as independent Two lights can be made to work in opposite directions if the output of one of them is flipped For example if a flipped conventional light and a normal conventional light both are recorded to a submaster one will brighten and the other darken as the submaster slider is moved Use the procedure below to flip one channel or a range of channels Keystrokes 1 2 3 4 Press Setup Press 1 1 Enter Enter channel number s Press S2 Flip Press 1 Enter 29 30 Action Selects Setup menu Selects Channel Attributes display Selects channel s Prompt reads Enable disable flipped channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Channels in ML fixture patch cannot be edited except label Each selected channel is set as flipped Use the Expression Personality Editor to edit fixture attributes See Captured channels page 56 for information about releasing channels on stage when they re independent Chapter 5 Setting channel levels Channel data type Channels normally contain 8 bit data but may be enabled to contain 16 bit data Enabling for 16 bit data alway
11. 6 Press Enter Records cue 2 with channels 13 and 15 at Full a Note that when using Full you do not have to press At first When you record the cue channel levels set by a fader change from red indicating a channel level set on the keypad to colors based on the channels level movements from cue to cue 12 See Navigation and visual feedback page 3 for more information on what channel level colors mean Chapter 7 Cues Recording a cue with a single fade time Unless you tell it otherwise the console assigns default fade times to any cue you record If you prefer you may record cues with custom fade times instead Fade times can be zero seconds to 99 59 minutes long They may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds in decimal format Acceptable time values include 0 2 2 seconds 00 12 12 seconds 5 5 5 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Follow these steps to record a cue with a custom fade time Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Stagel or Blind Press Cue Press 3 Press Time Press 8 Press Enter Enter Press Record Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 3 Prompt reads Enter upfade time Enters a fade time of 8 seconds Corner reads UpTime 8 Enters matching downfade time Prompt reads To record cue
12. 78 Changing assignments 00 00 d ie eee eee 78 Working with moving lights 2 80 Moving lights displays 000002000 eee eee 80 Go to the Fixture Box window sss 80 Working with fixtures 2 0 0 0 81 Setting levels when you have encoders 81 Setting levels without encoders 00000 82 Fixture focus with Solo 0 0 eee 83 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Chapter 7 E a S 85 CUC TYPES aire AA Coy aak E od A 86 Grosstade ida er tes 86 AMA ree serm Ea aM e R A 86 ETGCE ope rat ed dice a bet bd Pe 86 Blocking ERE as A HELD 86 SUbEOUtIfIe 2 oes oca cs erue eate dO ee C PARURE 86 Recording TURCOS que sss eins des RA eR ERAN Nin 87 MIGWIEIg CUGS iode re ees pd iq iiem 87 TRETOVSFSIZO OSO WA lato tado iiid n Rated da tn oido ieu 88 Creating the oversized show o o o oooooooooooo o 88 Playing back an oversized show ooooooooooooo 88 Working with cues in Stage lsssele eee 89 Recording a cue n Stages s eR ea 89 Working with cues in Blind serrie eye a aE En EE ooo 90 Recording a cue in Blind 0002 eee 90 Recording a cue with a single fade time 91 Recording a cue with split fade times 220 92 Recording a cue with a wait time ess 93 Recording cues with Link and Follow o o 94 E gv L D 94 oll zu endure e pisa uva eo Dit ena Ln Rx Co
13. Cities outside the United States City State Time Zone Standard Latitude Abuja Nigeria ssssse asu 9 12 Algiers Algeria AAA 36 47 Amsterdam Netherlands A e ees 52 17 Ankara Turkey lt 2 BdStins sd 39 56 Athens Greece S2 LaS a 37 58 Bangkok Thailand A ti ete 13 44 Berlin Germany EAS aia de 52 27 Berna Switzerland E EaSt ciunt des 46 57 Bombay India A 18 54 Brussels Belgium SEAS ees 50 50 Buenos Aires Argentina 3 West 34 36 Cairo Egypt ee A uec 30 03 Cape Town South Africa 82 Eastimc ese 33 55 Casablanca Morocco ssss OCA a naa 33 39 Copenhagen Denmark Sl t cee eee 55 40 Dublin Ireland Ol tes ted oe atte 53 20 Edinburgh Scotland O e sale Sia 55 57 Edmonton Alberta Canada 7 West ssssess 53 33 Fukuoka Japan TO EASD oe das 33 35 Helsinki Finland 22 East uu danke 60 10 Hong Kong a i s 22 18 Jakarta Indonesia A i eed 6 10 Lima POT se ttt 5 West 12 03 Lisbon Portugal occcccncncncncccncncncnnnos QE 38 43 London England Onsen haere tera Moe 51 30 Madrid
14. You may set the console to disable the Record function This protects a finished show from inadvertent changes To disable the Record function in your system follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings Enter Menu indicates current status of Record Lockout 3 Press 1 3 Record Prompt reads Lockout Enter Enable Disable record lockout 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 to lock out the Record is locked out If you record function attempt to record anything the prompt reads Record is locked out Press CLEAR to continue Enable disable bump buttons The console s submaster bump buttons also known as bump keys may be enabled or disabled The default condition is enabled Follow these steps to enable or disable all submaster bump buttons Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 1 4 Bump keys Prompt reads and press Enter Enable disable bump keys 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 or 0 Corner reads BpStat 1 Or BpStat 0 5 Press Enter Submaster bump buttons are enabled or disabled As always the best way to safeguard your show is to make backups See Chapter 20 Diskette functions page 251 for instructions on backing up a show to diskette Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1
15. 3 Press Full Modifying a group Action Selects Stage display mode Selects group 2 Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit Follow the procedure below to modify a recorded group in Stage and then record the modifications into the same group or into a different group Keystrokes 1 Display the group on stage as illustrated above 2 Select channels you want to modify and adjust channel levels 3 Press Record Group 4 Press Enter Action Alters look Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records modifications into the group a Record the modifications into a different group by pressing the other group s number before you press Enter in this Step Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 139 140 Updating groups Update allows you to modify previously recorded cues groups submasters or focus points in Stage or Fader Update takes levels from all captured and selected channels and those selected may be restricted with the Only command Updating an active group The following procedure illustrates how to update a group that has been placed on stage Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode Press Group 4 Full Places group 4 on stage at full 3 Modify channel levels a
16. B Use And Thru and Except for multiple selections Press and to select the next or previous cue Press At 5 0 You may also use the fader wheel HI or Full to enter levels Press Track Press Enter to record level settings To track a different channel enter the next channel number you want to display Action Displays Tracksheet Prompt reads Select channel to be tracked Selects channel 5 as the channel number to track Prompt reads Select cues to be modified Selects cues 2 through 5 as the cues that you want to track this channel through Cue numbers are highlighted in yellow Enters 50 percent intensity level Prompt reads Enter intensity Prompt reads To record cue s and tracking press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records tracked channel in selected cues Prompt reads Select channel to be tracked a You can track a channel at zero through all subsequent cues in which it is recorded except effects Press Solo in this step rather than setting a level Then press Record Enter b Using Track in Tracksheet works just like it does in Blind If you press Record here instead of Track you set the level but don t track the channel into subsequent cues Chapter 8 Track Chapter 9 Multipart cues A multipart cue consists of up to eight parts each of which is essentially an independent cue with its own channel levels and timing information
17. Enter Selects focus point 4 Prompt reads Type focus point label F6 clear to end F7 previous focus point level F8 next focus point label 3 Enter your label then Completes labeling of focus point 4 press Enter Deleting a focus point Follow this procedure to delete one or more focus points in the Focus Point List display Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Focus Point Displays Focus Point List Enter S2 Focus List Prompt reads Select focus point number s 2 Press S6 Delete Focus Prompt reads To delete focus point s press number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 4 And 5 Enter Deletes focus points 4 and 5 Enter Prompt reads Select focus point numbers s 186 Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Working in spreadsheets Cues submasters groups and focus points each have their own spreadsheets You can modify or delete in all spreadsheets and create in all but the submaster spreadsheet Channels and groups may be added to all spreadsheets singly or in multiples or ranges Channels may be set at focus points and focus points may be added singly and in multiples or ranges in all but the focus point spreadsheet In spreadsheets it is not necessarily to press Record to record changes These changes are made immediately but they don t update in any cue submaster group or focus point already displayed on stage until these are replaced on stage Cue sp
18. Reset Defaults and press Enter twice to confirm See The Only command page 8 for information Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 79 Working with moving lights Moving lights displays Moving lights and conventional lights use the same Blind Stage and Fader displays Each moving light however is distinguished in these displays by a gray bar surrounding the numbers of all channels in the fixture Also channels that carry the low order bits of 16 bit attributes have dimmed channel numbers Levels are set for the channels of moving light fixtures in a Fixture Box window that pops up in Blind Stage and Fader displays when a fixture is selected The list under the screen shot below identifies the contents of the Fixture Box window Go to the Fixture Box window Press the Stagel Blind or Fader key Press S8 Fixture Enter a fixture number s The fixture box appears 011 3 8 19 20 021 28 29 30 031 33 35 036 37 38 39 u z 45 046 47 55 056 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 8 79 80 081 82 83 84 85 086 87 88 89 30 2 03 04 OS 106 07 08 09 10 Fixture Attrib Value Device Following are features of the Fixture Box The fixture is identified by number label if assigned and personality Page numbers are shown in white if any of the fixture s attributes are on that page The current encoder page is identified in yellow The fixture s attributes on the current page are identified in gold The level assigned to
19. S2 Copy Program Press 1 Thru 5 Enter Press 7 O 0 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to copy then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects programs 1 through 5 to copy Prompt reads To copy selected programs s select time and press ENTER Press to enter AM or PM Copies program 1 to a new program starting at 7 00 AM the rest of the programs maintain their original relationship in time You may move one or more real time programs from one time slot to another To move a single program you may also use the arrow keys to highlight the time for the program you want to move use the keypad to enter the new time then press Enter Keystrokes 1 2 3 Press Setup Press 1 2 Enter Press S7 More Softkeys 53 Move Program Press 1 Thru B Enter Press 5 0 0 Enter Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Real Time Programs display Prompt reads Select program number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects programs 1 through 5 to move Prompt reads To move selected programs s select time and press ENTER Press to enter AM or PM Copies program 1 to a new program starting at 5 00 PM the rest of the programs maintain their original relationship in time Sorting recording real time programs The console simultaneously sorts a
20. kk Control number 70 92 vv Control value 0 7F Program change message format Cn kk C Program patch change status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Program number 0 7F Pitch bend message format En ll mm E Pitch bend status n MIDI channel number 0 F ll Least significant 7 bits of pitch bend value 0 7F mm Most significant 7 bits of pitch bend value 0 7F Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 281 282 MIDI Message definitions Submaster bump switch execution C5 B5 60 71 C6 B6 72 83 Submasters 1 12 Submasters 13 24 Note C5 MIDI note 60 or middle C Cue execution in AB fader pair Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Program change 0 Program change 1 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters O 103 Controller change 70 Controller change 71 Controller change 72 Controller change 73 Controller change 74 Controller change 75 Controller change 76 Cue execution in CD fader pair Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Macro execution Macros 1 127 Macros 128 255 Macros 256 383 Macros 384 511 Macros 512 639 Macros 640 767 Macros 768 895 Macros 896 999 Level c
21. 2 Full no need to press Enter in step 3 Modifying a focus point Follow the procedure below to modify a recorded focus point in Stage Keystrokes Action 1 Display focus point 2 in Stage as illustrated above 2 Press S8 Fixture 3 Sets the intensity of fixtures 3 through Thru 8 Full 8 to full 3 Press Record Prompt reads Focus Point 2 To record focus point select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Records modifications into focus point 2 a You can record to the same or to a different focus point 150 Chapter 12 Focus points Updating focus points Update allows you to modify previously recorded cues groups submasters or focus points in Stage or Fader Update takes levels from all captured and selected channels and those selected may be restricted with the Only command Updating an active focus point The following procedure illustrates how to update a focus point that has been placed on stage Keystrokes 1 Press Stagel Modify channel levels as To restrict channels in the update use Only here a If not restricted with Only are included in the update 2 Press Focus Point 4 Full 3 desired 4 Press S2 Update b 6 Press Focus Point 4 Enter 31 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects Stage display mode Places focus point 4 on stage at full Sets focus point levels or selects additio
22. 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions menu Enter 4 Press 5 Read All from Screen clears and Read All window Disk Enter appears 5 Press Enter or press Message in record window appears Clear to cancel the and remains until read is complete operation From disk in progress EN you are using the Designer s Worksheet option and your setup is different in the new show a message will warn you 254 Chapter 20 Diskette functions Read show components only Frequently you do not need to overwrite system configuration settings but only want a different showfile in console memory For that purpose read show contents only into memory with the following procedure Keystrokes 1 Insert diskette in disk drive Press Setup Press 3 Disk Functions Enter Press 2 Read Show From Disk Enter Press Enter or press Clear to cancel the operation Action Selects Setup display Selects Diskette Functions menu Screen clears and Read Show window appears Message in record window appears and remains until read is complete From disk in progress Read system configuration components only Follow the procedure below if you want to restore your system configuration to one written previously to a diskette 9 Keystrokes 1 Insert diskette in disk drive Press Setup Press 3 Disk Functions Enter Press 3 Read System Configuration From Disk Enter Pr
23. Blind Cue Subr Subr 2 Step Step Cue List gt Cue List Select Cue Spread Sheet gt Cue SS Rate Previous Page Type Level Next Page Insert Step Delete Cue Delete Step More Softkeys gt Subr 2 More Softkeys gt Subr 00 NI o 61 A O N Style Up Down Follow Fader Fader 2 1 Select Fader Enable Disable Quickstep 2 Update 3 Background Overrides Solo 4 Previous Page DMX In 5 Next Page Rate 6 Park Delete 7 More Softkeys gt Fader 2 More Softkeys gt Fader 8 Fixture Step Tracksheet Solo Previous Page Next Page OO NI O T A O N Patch Previous Page Next Page 0 NI O O1 A N Dimmer Double A B Previous Page Next Page Unpatch Profile More Softkeys gt Patch 2 More Softkeys gt Patch 0 NI A N Fixture Patch gt Fixture Patch Show Hide Labels Appendix E Softkeys Setup System Settings 1 Setup System Settings 1 Designer s Worksheet Show Name Purge Flexi Sheet Console Sliders CO NI o OI A O MO Setup Output Config 2 and Clear 4 Output Configuration Return gt Setup Clear Functions DMX512 Port Reset System DMX512 Mode Starting Dimmer DMX512 Speed 00
24. Colors in displays The colors in which channel numbers and output levels are displayed on screen provide information about the channels The following list shows the meaning of colors in Stage Blind Fader and Tracksheet displays Channel numbers Standard patch Gray Unselected channel White Channel not selected by Only function Yellow Selected channel Controlled by the level Y wheel Channel numbers Fixture patch Gray bar Surrounds all channels of one fixture Light gray Low channels for 16 bit data types Gold Channels linked through the link list or fixtures Yellow Selected channels of selected fixtures Channel output levels White on Red Channel level when it is being changed Yellow In Stage a channel in yellow was set by a submaster White In Stage Fader a channel in white was set by an effect In Blind Tracksheet a channel in white was set by a submaster group focus point or an allfade cue Gr y t Channel was recorded into a multipart cue but not in the currently displayed part Blind only Red sre In Stage Fader captured channels are in red In Blind Tracksheet channels not recorded are in red Green oe Channel output level is changed from what it was in the previous cue In Tracksheet and Blind only channel output is lower th
25. Connect them to RIUs or RVIs operating on ETCNet These remote monitors duplicate the console s displays Connect monitors to interface devices by following these steps 1 Insert the female end of the monitor power cord in the monitor connector and the male end of the monitor power cord in the interface device connector labeled Switched outlets 2 Connect the cable to the connector labeled CRT 1 or CRT 2 on the interface device 3 Turn monitor power switch to its On position VGA monitor console connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout 1 Red video Green video 3 Blue video 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Red ground 7 Green ground 8 Blue ground 9 not connected 10 Ground 11 Ground 12 not connected 13 Horizontal H V syne 14 Vertical sync 15 not connected Appendix B References Appendix C Error messages Full Tracking Backup messages System A does not respond System B is now operating as a stand alone system System A has been disconnected from the network To reconnect System A to the network you must reboot both System A and System B Console A has been turned off or disconnected Full Tracking Backup has turned full control of your system over to console B System B does not respond System A is now operating as a stand alone system System B has been disconnected from the network To reconnect System B to the network you must reboot both System A and System B Console B has been turned off o
26. Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue If you have already created a single part cue the console allows you to reconfigure it as a multipart cue You can convert a standard cue to a multipart cue in either Stage or Blind mode but it s easier in Blind because levels are highlighted Once you create the first part all channels not assigned to that part are automatically assigned to part 8 As you create additional parts from channels in part 8 they are deleted from part 8 and added to the selected part Follow these steps to convert cue 1 assumed to be a standard cue to a multipart cue This example is in Blind To perform the equivalent procedure in Stage run the cue in the faders before preceding with step 3 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Cuel 1 Selects cue 1 3 Press Channel and select the channels for a part 4 Press Part followed by Creates the designated part the part s number and then Enter 5 Repeat steps 3 4 to create Creates more parts for this cue the other parts as desired a If in Stage selection defaults to channels so you do not need to press Channel Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 119 120 Wait times in multipart cues You can set individual wait times of up to 99 59 minutes for each part of a multipart cue The wait time is the delay between when you press Go and when the part begins If no wait is recorded all parts run simulta
27. DIMMe r cee rip ie pw 276 Update Channel cece ec iia 8 SUI ODE PME 102 103 ETP OCT s ve es e Ed 215 Flexichannel 15 61 Focus polnti oreet 151 152 A NER EE 140 141 Only Rohe eek be VEE A ee ee Be 8 EA IA 104 Upgrading software 346 Using remote keyboard 320 V Viewing cues 202000 87 WwW Wait time Assign to part 120 Edit TOF Dart sia escent Sov a 123 Record Cue rito os sedes 93 Websit uus uS MEI Vd E uS 10 Wheel E evel a sot e pur USER wok 62 Link channelS 250 Panand tilt o 82 SpecificationS 375 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 393
28. Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 267 268 How to enable disable ETCLink error messages Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 9 ETCLink Functions Enter Press 6 Display Advisories Enter Press 1 Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Prompt reads Enable disable display of ETCLink advisories 1 Enable all 2 Enable fatal error advisories only 0 Disable Enables all ETCLink error advisories Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring ETCLink displays Dimming system status The System Status display provides information about your Sensor dimming system Press Setup 9 Enter 1 Enter to access the System Status display 03 0 PH Double Firing Mode Disobled Backup Looks Inactive ETCL ink H rrors System Wide Panic Error on Rack Racks On Line Racks in Configuration 1 S82 S 3 S4 S5 S6 E T4 Ei Dimmer Play Record Dimmer Rack EE pe Double Backup Backup Status Status Return e Double Firing Mode shows whether that mode is enabled or disabled for your system If Double Firing Mode is disabled doubled dimmers function as normal dimmers e Backup looks indicates whether a backup look is active and if so which one e ETCLink displays any ETCLink errors e System wide panic displays status of system wide panic e Error on rack displays the number of the rack with an ETCLink error If errors exist on multiple racks the first rack with
29. Follow the procedure below to load personality files 1 Insert the 3 5 inch diskette in the console disk drive 2 From the Personality Setup display Press S1 From Disk Enter 3 Remove and store the diskette when the transfer is complete WARNING If possible always load personalities before patching If you try loading a personality with the same name as one you already have in your show you will get the warning shown below If you are replacing a personality with one that assigns more channels the automatic repatching will cause erroneous overlapping Such overlapping can cause unexpected or inconsistent behavior from recorded elements such as groups and cues used in the show You may need to repatch fixtures Personal i tu StudioCo already exists in show A name can be used for only one personality in a show If From Disk is continued the previous personalitu will be overwritten with the one from disk which has the same name Assigned fixtures will be unpatched and repatched To overwrite all duplicates press CEnter To skip all duplicates press Clear To overwrite this duplicate press Plus To skip this duplicate press Minus Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Viewing a personality 1 From the Personality Setup display type the number of the personality you want to view 2 Press S3 View Personality and the view display appears To view another personality scroll with the or keys
30. For example call cue 12 Toad exits 4 Press Enter Action Selects display mode Selects Cue 12 Prompt reads Type cue label F6 clear to end F7 last cue label F8 next cue label Enters cue label Corner reads Label Toad exits Records Cue 12 with label Toad exits a If the cue did not previously exist press Record Enter in step 4 This will create the cue and label all in one step 17 See Installing an alphanumeric keyboard page 336 for information about installing an alohanumeric keyboard Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 99 Modifying a recorded cue live Previous examples in this chapter illustrated how to record new cues If you want to modify channels in a recorded cue you can play back the cue in Stage make the changes and then re record the cue The modifications immediately affect the look on stage You can also record the live look you created to another cue Modifying channels in a cue Add new channels or modify channel levels with the procedure given below You can use all the same techniques for channel or fixture selection or for setting levels that are available to you for initial cue recording Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Cue enter cue Plays back selected cue number and press Go 3 Select channels and set Selects channels which can be the channel levels to make the same as those already in the cue or desi
31. Learn Mode Macro Delete Event More Softkeys gt TC 2 More Softkeys gt TC 3 More Softkeys gt TC 00 J O 0 A O N Setup Moving Light Functions 15 Return Setup Personality Setup Reset Loop Fixture Patch Sort FP 2 From Disk Select Fixture Select Fixture Label Start Channel View Personality Personality DMX512 Port Start Previous Page Remote Dimmer Next Page Swap Focus Delete Personality Delete Fixture Flip Reset Defaults More Softkeys gt FP2 More Softkeys gt FP 0 NI O T A O N Setup Moving Light Functions 15 Return gt Moving Light Ftns Attribute Setup Return gt Moving Light Ftns Encoder Setup Select Attribute Select Encoder Category Page Attribute Previous Page Next Page Autoload Encoders Reset Defaults Reset Defaults oN 0 O N Return gt Moving Light Ftns Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Return gt Moving Light Ftns Autoload Encoders 367 368 Appendix E Softkeys Appendix F Time and location United States cities City State Time Zone Standard Latitude Longitude Albuquerque NM TO WBESU I ee 35 O3 N 106 37 W Anchorage AK 10 West 6110 Nus s 149 11 W Atlanta GA 5West e 33 39 Nace 84 26 W Baltimore MD
32. Please check connections and cabling and make sure that network termination resistors are installed This system is now operating as a stand alone system To re establish tracking turn off both consoles then turn both back on within thirty seconds of each other Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 355 356 Diskette error messages Bad Disk Disk is unformatted or defective Try formatting it If that doesn t work try a different disk Corrupted Disk This disk is defective Try formatting it If that doesn t work try a different disk Data not recorded on disk You cannot read the System Configuration settings from showfiles created with software Version 3 02 or earlier You must save the show with 3 03 or later software to include System Configuration settings Disk access failed because of tracking failure This message appears on the backup console in a Full Tracking Backup system when the network or the master console fails during a diskette operation Disk controller failure Call ETC Technical Service at 800 775 4382 Disk full Disk contains other files Remove enough files to make room for show file File not found This disk does not appear to have a show stored on it Please confirm that you have inserted the correct disk No disk in drive Show diskette must be inserted in the diskette drive before you can save or read a show Unknown disk error try again Try the diskette again If it fails again call ETC Techni
33. Prol nt ER ent Submasters Latest Takes Precedence LTP About Channel Background override Blocking cue Enable 2st REFS Overview o ooo ooo ee Sebue us deus i dd Seed Learn LEDs Console face panel Faders es onset e m pras Full Tracking Backup LED displays 388 SubMaSter cos hc been a 163 Submaster type change 159 Level In subroutines 229 Set by focus point 156 Level key Explained 205 62 Solutia dl ina acci C uas NE 27 Setting unlinked levels 156 Level Y display 20 21 Lighting Playback Controller 330 Link Creating e ox e eR re 247 Cue to CUB 94 Cues in playback 94 Belleten ia orat he tote 250 ASEE tt one t os 248 Macro to cue seen 97 Macro to macro 238 Merge Seat de ttt ted a ook 249 MOVE cic ot one ST wigs whe 249 SING est MEER 250 List Cue Command 180 FOCUS POINT zi odas a 185 GlOUD ss PE 184 Submaster Command 181 Submaster Playback 161 Load Cue or group to sub 176 koad Check LER Rd 274 Personality 70 Lockout Records s oer 33 Loop In subroutines 229 AN ae des Ena 96 M Macro Cancel A 240 EE reote ass ies A 241 263 CODY MEE 242 Greatihngu rese etm nete ens 234 236 Display mode
34. Prompt reads Select submaster numberType submaster label F6 clear to end F7 previous submaster level F8 next submaster label Labels submaster 23 All recorded information can be removed for one or more submasters using the Submaster List Follow the procedure below Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Sub S2 Sub List 2 Press S6 Delete Sub 3 Press 5 Andl 7 Enter 4 Press Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Displays Submaster List Prompt reads Select submaster number s Prompt reads Top delete submaster s select number s and press ENTER to cancel press CLEAR Specifies submasters 5 and 7 to be deleted Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes submasters 5 and 7 183 Group List The Group list shows all the recorded groups in the show by number and label The list can be paged if there are more than 54 groups in the show 18 groups shown per column Groups may be labeled in the Group list or deleted there from the show either individually or in ranges In the Group List display a selected group is identified by a highlighted white row and a selected field is highlighted in yellow Labeling a group Follow this procedure to label a group in the Group List display Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Group Displays Group List Enter S2 Group List Prompt reads Select group number s 2 Press 4 Enter Selects group 4
35. See Naming the show page 37 e Number of channels Shows the value set in the System Settings menu See Setting the number of channels page 25 e Number of dimmers Shows the value set in the System Settings menu See Setting the number of dimmers page 24 e Recorded Shows how many of each item in the first column that have been recorded e 96 Memory Shows what percentage of console memory is consumed for each item in the Recorded column e Remaining Shows how many more of each item in the first column may be recorded before reaching the console maximum e System setup Shows how much console memory is used for your setup and configuration settings e Memory left Shows what percentage of console memory is remaining for your show Chapter 3 System settings Chapter 4 Patching channels Before you begin creating cues for a show you should first create your patch The patch assigns individual dimmers to control channel numbers The console s Patch display allows you to assign any of the dimmers available to any of the control channels your console can address You can use the console s default one to one patch or you may create a custom patch In addition the console s proportional patching capability allows you to set dimmer output levels and assign one of 33 output profiles to dimmers If you are patching dimmers in a Strand CD80 dimmer rack see page 54 for special instructions Before patching make certain that y
36. Spain E E e vem a 40 24 Marseilles France SWI BAST ook coe etes 43 18 Mexico City Mexico O WeSt aun 19 24 Montreal Quebec Canada 5 West 45 30 Moscow Russia O EASE nc ess 55 46 Munich Germany eT BAS tian brc 48 09 Oslo Norway AMES dida 59 56 Panis France iia last 48 49 Prague Czechoslovakia sM A rs 50 05 Reykjavik Iceland ssuusse Deals eel tas 64 08 Riga Latvia ooonococonccccccccccccnnos a is ss 56 40 Rio De Janeiro Brazil I Westin es 22 55 Rome Italy A A a aes 41 48 San Juan Puerto Rico 4 West 18 29 Santiago Chile gw West uuu esee 33 27 Sapporo Japan sea i SO EAS hes 43 04 Seoul Korea eee EAS deters weds ds 37 34 Singapore Malaysia 8 EdStid uid diet ack 1 14 Stockholm Sweden ST EAST uiuere E 59 21 Sydney Australia IN Rcs 33 52 Taipei Taiwan ssss g East cos 25 02 Tokyo Japan sssssss Qu AS baea 35 41 Toronto Ontario Canada 5 West oisinn 43 39 Vancouver B C Canada 8B Westi ii 49 15 Vienna Austria MES ers 48 15 Warsaw Poland eA BAS Tied es tees 52 13 Wellington New Ze
37. Tells the console to treat the next entry as a group Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group 3 Press Cue and enter the Prompt reads number of the cue you Group mode Select cue number to want to bring up use as group 4 Press At and enter the The cue s channels are brought up on level at which you wish to stage at the specified level bring up the cue Or press Prompt reads Full Group mode Enter intensity a To use a submaster as a group follow the same procedure but press Sub instead of Cue in step 3 79 You may not use this procedure to group the channels in a cue part an effect cue or an effect submaster Chapter 11 Groups Modifying cues or submasters You can use groups to modify cues or submasters In the illustration below a submaster is modified by a group If any of this group s channels are already in the submaster the levels of those channels are modified to match the levels in the group If the group has channels not already in the submaster those are added to the submaster Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 2 3 Press Group 3 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press At 5 0 Press Record Press Enter to re record the modified submaster Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects group 3 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a gr
38. Time and press Enter Enter default up fadetime 4 Press 6 to enter a six Corner reads second upfade time UpTime 6 5 Press Enter Prompt reads Enter default down fadetime 6 Press 3 to enter a three Corner reads second downfade time DnTime3 7 Press Enter Fade times are reset a If you want the upfade and downfade times to be the same skip steps 6 and 7 The downfade would take whatever value you assigned to the upfade time in step 4 amp The factory set default fade time is five seconds Chapter 3 System settings Setting default Level key The console allows you to assign a value to the Level key The default value is 100 percent You may assign Level any value between zero and 100 Follow these steps to assign a value to Level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 4 Default Level Prompt reads and press Enter Enter default level Press FULL button for 100 4 Use the keypad to enter New default for Level is set the two digit number 00 99 a To enter a level between one and nine percent you must precede the number with a zero You may also press Level or Full for the assignment Setting default fader clear time The default fader clear time determines the fade time for both Clear keys Pressing the Clear key above one of the fader pairs clears the cue f
39. When the external signal begins the message disappears and the TimeCd value begins to run You can lose events on the first pass through the program if the external signal starts before the program is ready That happens because the event list pointer moves with the external signal and has already passed the code time of one or more events These missed events however will be played in subsequent passes through the program Enable an external clock with the procedure below Note that the procedure also enables the console s internal clock which can then provide backup if the external clock signal fails The order in which these two clocks is enabled is important Also note that it takes at least five seconds for the external and internal clocks to come into synchronization so any events during that initial synchronization period could be missed Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 6 Options Selects Options Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Press b Time Code Prompt reads Input Enter Enable disable external time code input 0 Disable 1 Enable SMPTE 2 Enable MIDI Time Code MTC 4 Press 2 Enter Enables the external MIDI time code clock 5 Press S8 Return Returns to the Setup display 6 Press 1 3 Enter Selects the Time Code Events option 7 Press S2 Enable Clock Enables the internal time code clock You can verify which clock is running the
40. You can get the same results in Blind but with the additional advantage that you can pull channels from the immediately previous cue An illustration of pulling channels when inserting a cue is given after the comparison between Record and Track in Stage Using Record The following keys were pressed to release captured channels and play back cue 1 With cue 1 in a fader channel 4 is added at 50 percent The new look is inserted as cue 1 1 Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Rel Rel Releases captured channels Prompt reads Select channel numbers 2 Press Cuel 1 Go Plays back cue 1 3 Press 4 At 5 01 Modifies channel 4 4 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 111 111 Enter Records cue 1 1 The following diagram illustrates what happens when you insert cue 1 1 using Record Note that the channel in cue 1 1 is not added to the cues that follow it In fact that channel is faded out when cue 2 is played Chan 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chanb5 Cue 1 50 Cue 1 1 50 50 Cue 2 50 FF 00 Cue 3 50 FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 111 Using Track When you insert a cue with Track new channels track through the following cues until the console encounters a cue with a level previously recorded for that channel The following procedure illustrates this use of Track and the following illustration
41. affecting the look on stage It looks exactly like the Stage display pictured above except some of the softkeys are different and it has Blind for the Display Name Fader The Fader display selectively shows on stage the channel levels by one or both fader pairs by background faders or by DMX In It looks exactly like the Stage display pictured above except some of the softkeys are different and it has Fader for the Display Name Fader displays are unaffected by the Grandmaster or by inhibitive submasters The Fader display shows alllevels as they would appear if the Grandmaster and any inhibitive submasters were at Full Upon entering the Fader display you are prompted to select a display from the five options listed below You can re select the display at any time by pressing S1 Select Fader A B Fader C D Fader Both Faders Background Channels DMX In DE REALE ER See Appendix E Softkeys page 361 for a complete tabulation of console softkeys Chapter 2 Monitor displays Flexichannel When you enable Flexichannel only channels used somewhere in the show will appear on the display screens subject to the following rules e Flexichannel displays channels whose levels are set whether recorded somewhere in the show or not e Flexichannel does not display channels whose attributes are changed unless their levels are also set e Flexichannel shows the channels for all fixtures patched in the show e Flexich
42. after sunset B Press 1 Enter Selects before sunrise Prompt reads Enter time offset hours minutes C Press 1 0 Enter Enters time offset before sunrise when the macro runs Prompt reads Enter days of week 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 7 Sun or press Days Date softkey again for date Referencing a date To specify a date rather than days of the week substitute the partial procedure below as explained under Days and absolute times page 290 This example sets the date to 21 March 2000 Keystrokes Action A Press S4 Days Date Switches to date entry procedure Prompt reads Enter date O all days of month or press Days Date softkey again for days of week B Press 2 1 Enter Selects date 21 Prompt reads Enter month 1 12 C Press 3 Enter Selects month 3 Prompt reads Enter last two digits of year or press Thru for all years D Press 0 Enter Selects year 2000 Prompt reads Enter macro number Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 291 Editing real time programs Once you have created a real time program you can easily make changes to it and others in the Real Time Programs display Press T or 1 to move from one program to the next Press e gt to move through program options Deleting real time programs You can delete all real time programs as one of the Clear Functions reached from the Setup menu option 12 Alternatively you can delete one program
43. attributes on stage The use of Only after the Update command is illustrated with the following examples e Press Group 1 Only Channel 5 Thru 1 0 to select channels in group 1 that lie in the range 5 through 10 e Press Group 1 Only Cue 6 to select channels in Group 1 that are also in cue 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Electronic backup maintenance Information in console memory is preserved by an electronic backup system for approximately 28 days Within the limits of this system if power should fail or if you shut down and then re power all programmed elements should be the same as they were For additional security ETC recommends that you routinely save to diskette as you go along and before shutting down CAUTION The electronic backup maintenance system must be recharged periodically to function as intended You must have the processor on for at least seven hours every 28 days to maintain the necessary charge Troubleshooting If you have problems using your console please refer to this manual s index or to the console s Help function for additional information If you do not find the answer in the manual please call your local dealer or ETC Technical Services Have the following information available before you call e Console model and serial number located on back panel e Software version displayed in the lower right corner of the Setup menu e Options installed e Dimmer installation t
44. cita tete 174 Specifications 372 Spreadsheet 190 AI UN A af oe 158 Subroutine AD OU erro T C he en 86 Allfade cue steps 228 Bounce style steps 229 Creating nece bre 230 Crossfade cuesteps 228 GCUG StepS oco bs E Hep 228 Deleting step 232 Edit ice mente e tenons hee a 232 Hold for go style steps 229 Inserting step 232 SVC cet rte Rn cf oat Duns 229 01e o rro im erepta aue d 229 Style steps nonna nananana 229 Times fade and follow 229 Swap command 4 11 Swap focus fixture 0 73 Swap twisted pair 329 347 System settings Default Fade Time 26 Default fade time 26 Default Fader Clear Time 27 Default level 27 Designer s Worksheet options 29 Flexich nnel ls Re 31 Name show 05 37 Number of channels 25 Number of dimmers 24 Record Lockout osos 33 Set Channels Subs 1 to 1 32 Set time and date 35 System software upgrade 346 System Status copie eh 269 T Technical Services 10 Ji Ie Goo e xe Tate o e eoe ra 329 Time Default fade 26 Effect fade tiMe 222 Effect Up Dwell Down 222 223 Follow time 0000 95 Macro Wait 237 Set clock sf terze Eon dus e
45. degrees then press for North or press for South Enters 43 degrees North Prompt reads Enter minutes of latitude Enters 4 minutes Prompt reads Enter longitude in degrees then press for West or press for East Enters 89 degrees West Prompt reads Enter minutes of longitude Enters 23 minutes Prompt reads Enter time offset from Greenwich Mean Time in hours minutes then press for West or press for East Enters 6 hours West a The used in this step and the others in this procedure may be optional Latitude defaults to North longitude defaults to West and time zone defaults to West b Three digits are used for time zones to allow for fractional zones Chapter 3 System settings Naming the show You can use an alphanumeric keyboard to name the show currently loaded in the console The names you give shows can consist of letters numbers or the symbols amp 1 as well as the comma and period Press the Home or End keys to move to the front or the end of a label respectively You may enter the name using overwrite or insert mode Press Insert on the keyboard to switch between insert and overwrite In overwrite you type over any previously entered characters in insert each new character pushes the previously entered characters one space to the right To name the show in your system follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Select
46. easier to create one event and then copy that as the basis for additional events Follow the procedure below to copy a selected event or range of events to different code times Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 until S2 reads Copy Event N Press S2 Copy Event Prompt reads Select event number s to copy then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 1 Thru 5 Enter Selects events 1 through 5 to copy Prompt reads To copy selected event s select time and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Time Time 2 5 Selects 25 seconds for the first event to copy 5 Press Enter Copies event 1 to a new event starting at 25 seconds the rest of the events maintain their original relationship in time Chapter 24 Control interfaces Moving time code events Follow this procedure to move a selected event or range of events from one code time to another The event will move to the new time when you sort the event list or leave the Time Code Events display Keystrokes 1 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press S7 until S3 reads Move Event Press S3 Move Event Press 1 Thru 5 Enter Press Time Time Time 5 Press Enter Actions Prompt reads Select event number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects events 1 through 5 to move Prompt reads To move selected event s select time and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Se
47. select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records cue 3 with fade time of eight seconds a If the cue already exists you may omit steps 7 and 8 91 92 Recording a cue with split fade times The console allows you to record cues with different upfade and downfade times These cues are said to have split fade times On the console s display the time to the left of the refers to the upfade time the number to the right refers to the downfade time Follow these steps to record a cue with split upfade and downfade times Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stagel or Blind Press Cue Press 4 Press Time Press 1 0 Press Enter Press 1 5 Press Record Press Enter Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 4 Corner reads Cue 4 Prompt reads Enter upfade time Enters an upfade time of ten seconds Corner reads UpTime 10 Prompt reads Enter downfade time Enters a downfade time of 15 seconds Corner reads DnTime 15 Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Records cue 4 with upfade time of ten seconds and downfade time of 15 seconds a If the cue already exists you may omit steps 8 and 9 Chapter 7 Cues Recording a cue with a wait time Wait time is the time that elapses between when you press Go and when the actual fade begins You can rec
48. set the port mode with the procedure given under Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling page 334 When a dimmer is doubled it is functionally split into two dimmers that are distinguished by A and B For example dimmer 1 becomes dimmer 1A and dimmer 1B For each doubled port the A components of each dimmer are controlled by DMX512 outputs 1 256 and the B components of each dimmer are controlled by DMX512 outputs 257 512 The console represents doubled dimmers in the Patch display as dimmers in the range 1 256 parts A and B If a channel was patched to the dimmer before it was doubled the channel is assigned to both the A and B parts thus keeping the number of controlled circuits the same rather than doubled To assign the doubled parts of a dimmer independently see Creating a custom patch page 41 Set dimmers to doubled with the procedure below Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 Press Dim 1 8 Thru Selects dimmers 18 through 35 3 15 2 Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a proportion or press PROFILE to assign a profile 3 Press S1 Dimmer Sets selected dimmers to doubled Double mode a Often there is no need to press Dim in this step because the Patch display defaults on entry to dimmer input 6 Dimmer Doubling is available only for ETC dimming systems operating nominally at 115 volts 60 Hz It is not availab
49. 0 NO 0 A O N Fixture Return gt Focus Appendix E Softkeys Blind Submaster Sub List Sub SS Bump Status Select Sub Hold Rate Replace Level Previous Page Previous Page Next Page Next Page Delete Sub Delete Sub 00 NI 61 A O N Return gt Sub Blind Cue Effect Blind Cue Effect CE Return gt Sub CE2 Step Step Cue List gt Cue List Step Time Spread Sheet gt Cue SS In Dwell Out Previous Page Low High Next Page Insert Step Rate Delete Cue Delete Step More Softkeys gt CE 2 More Softkeys gt CE 3 More Softkeys gt CE 00 NI o c A O N Add Channels lind Cue or Sub Effect Attributes Positive Negative Alternate Reverse Bounce Build Random Random Rate Return gt CE 00 NI 61 A O NO Blind Sub Effect SE Attribute gt Attributes Blind Submaster Effect SE 2 SE 3 Step Step Bump Status Sub List gt Sub List Step Time Spread Sheet gt Sub SS In Dwell Out Previous Page Low High Next Page Insert Step Rate Delete Sub Delete Step More Softkeys gt SE 2 More Softkeys gt SE 3 More Softkeys gt SE CO NI O1 A O N Add Channels Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Attribute gt Attributes 363 364 Blind Subroutine
50. 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select channel numbers Press Channel 1 Corner reads Chan 1 Press S7 More Softkeys 4 Pressand hold S8 Flash Sets channel 1 slevel to 100 percent if its current level is at or below 50 percent Or Sets channel 1 s level to zero if its current level is above 50 percent 5 While holding S8 press Flashes each channel in turn or to select the next or previous channel 6 Once you have checked all the channels release S8 Flash 24 If a channel is independent it will not flash in response to a channel check Chapter 5 Setting channel levels About Channel The About Channel display gives you information about the characteristics patch and use of individual channels It can be displayed while in any other display For similar information about dimmers see About Dimmer page 51 Go to the About Channel display as follows Keystrokes 1 Press About Channel 2 Press 6 3 Press Enter Action Prompt reads About Select channel number then press ENTER Keypad corner reads Chan 6 About Channel window is displayed a Press Clear to remove the window Features of the display Following is an About Channel display for a channel patched to a fixture attribute When a channelis either unpatched or patched to a conventional light the Fixture and Type fields shown below are replaced by a Link field
51. 3 Press Only S8 Fixture 6 and 7 Press Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Selects fixtures 1 through 8 and sets their intensities to full Sets the levels of the position attributes for all selected fixtures Selects cue 3 to update Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking To cancel press CLEAR Restricts the update to fixtures 6 and 7 Prompt reads Select fixture number s To cancel press CLEAR Updates cue 3 a Use your mouse or equivalent pointing device if available b Optional step If you don t use Only all non zero channels are included in the update c If you want the update to track into subsequent cues press Track before pressing enter 103 104 Using Update to modify fade rate You may also use the Update function to record manually modified fade rates into cues Follow these steps to update a rate for a cue running in a fader Keystrokes 1 Press Rate key for the fader in which the cue is running 2 Move rate wheel to adjust fade rate 3 Press S2 Update 4 Press Enter Deleting cues Action Activates rate control Fades are placed under control of the rate wheel The Fader Status window shows the current rate Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking Press ONLY ENTER to update only those channels already in cue New rate i
52. 3 Press S8 Return to return to the Personality Setup display Deleting personalities You may delete personalities from the show either one at a time or in groups using the And or Thru keys 1 From the Personality Setup display press S6 Delete Personality 2 Type the number of the personality you want to delete followed by Enter to confirm your choice If you change your mind after selecting a personality press Clear to begin again Resetting defaults You may restore any of the default personalities that were deleted When restoring the default personalities any uploaded personalities are deleted To reset defaults go to the Personality Setup display Press S7 Reset Defaults and complete the action by pressing Enter WARNING Resetting restores default personalities If you loaded a personality with the same name as a default and used it in your show the fixtures patched with that personality will be repatched using the default Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 71 72 Patching moving lights Fixtures are installed in the Fixture Patch display in numerical order either singly or in ranges Go to the Fixture Patch display There are two ways to get to the Fixture Patch display Either select option 2 from the Moving Light Functions menu or press S8 Fixture Patch in the Patch display TEJE Select a fixture Select a feature Make a change X White
53. 3 User Manual v 3 1 Go to the Attribute Setup display The Attribute Setup display lists all attributes and identifies their category assignments You can change the categories to which an attribute is assigned by adding or removing them in this display Every attribute must be assigned to at least one category Multiple category assignments are allowed except when an attribute is assigned to the None category 1 Press Setup 1 5 Enter to display the Moving Light Functions menu 2 Press 3 Enter to go to the Attribute Setup display Navigation and Feedback Attribute Setup display Bi iSi N a X X X X Select an attribute Select a category Make a change X Purple coloration Attributes used in the show Gray coloration Attributes not used in the show Yellow coloration Item selected Changing an attribute s category assignment 1 Enter the number of the attribute Press Enter 2 For each category to be added or removed enter its assignment number O None 1 Position 2 Image 3 Color 4 Beam Entering the number either adds or removes the category depending upon whether the attribute is already assigned to it or not 3 Press Enter after you have made all changes You may start over at any time by pressing Clear or typing 0 to choose None Resetting defaults Each of the 64 attributes has a unique default category assignment To reset all attributes t
54. 6 Prompt reads Select cue number Selects cue 8 for Jump to cue When subroutine reaches step 6 the subroutine ends and runs cue 8 Prompt reads Enter blocking status for jump to cue 1 Blocking 2 No blocking Specifies that the cue will not cause blocking 231 Editing a subroutine To edit a subroutine select the step you wish to change by pressing S1 Step and entering the step number Use And and Thru to select multiple steps You can either use softkeys to find your way around the Step Display or navigate with other console controls as shown in the following table Navigation and Feedback Step Display EAE gt Select a step X X Select a field X X White row selected step Yellow field selected field The softkeys available in the display are as follows S2 Style Allows you to select a style from the style menu S3 Select Cue Allows you to enter a cue number for the selected step S4 Type Level Allows you to select a crossfade or an all fade and to set intensity level S8 Up Down Follow Allows you to set upfade and downfade times and to set follow time Once you finish editing the subroutine press Record Enter to save your changes Deleting a step Press S6 Delete Step and enter the step number Then press Enter The console deletes the selected step and renumbers the remaining steps Inserting a step Press S1 Step and en
55. AT to select sneak level or TIME to select sneak time 3 Select the channel s you Selects channel 5 Sets level at 50 want to sneak and the level percent to which you want it to Prompt reads fade For example press Sneak mode Select level 5 At 5 4 Press Time and enter the Selects Sneak time of ten seconds time for the sneak For Prompt reads example press Time Sneak mode Select time 110 5 Press Enter Fades channel 5 to 50 percent over ten seconds Follow these steps to restore a channel to its last fader or submaster level 93 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sneak and select Selects channel 5 to sneak the channel s you wantto Prompt reads Sneak mode Select restore For example channels then press ENTER to press 5 sneak or AT to select sneak level or TIME to select sneak time 2 Press Enter Fades channel 5 back to its most recent cue or sub level 33 Press Sneak Enter to restore all channels to their current fader or submaster levels Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 63 Channel check Use a Channel Check to check which channel controls which light The console allows you to check channels by selecting a single channel and flashing it to a level 24 Once you have selected a channel you can then advance sequentially through the channels checking one at a time You may start a channel check with any channel Follow these steps to run a channel check Keystrokes Actions
56. Cue 5 00 00 00 00 22 When a channel is not set at any level such as channel 5 above it is considered tracked at clear Chapter 8 Track Recording modified cues The difference between Record and Track is apparent when you modify a cue or insert a new cue between two existing cues Record and Track produce different results Using Record The following keys were pressed to release captured channels and play back cue 1 Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Rel Rel Releases captured channels Prompt reads Select channel numbers 2 Press Cue 1 Go Plays back cue 1 3 Press 1 At 5 0 Modifies channel 1 4 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter Records cue 1 With cue 1 in a fader channel 1 is modified to 50 percent Because cue 1 is re recorded with Record none of the subsequent cues are affected by the procedure Following is an illustration of the use of Record when modifying cue 1 Note that channel 1 is not affected in cues 2 and 3 Also note that when you record a modified cue that is in a playback fader the changes are reflected in the fader That is when you release the channels you have modified they remain on stage Chan 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chanb5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 109 110 Using Track If you have tracked
57. E g Macro 1 11 04 AM Macro Operation s Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter O Enter Enter Setup 1 Enter 7 Enter 1 Enter Enter Bump24 Setup 1 Enter 1 0 Enter H6 Bump1 Mwait 0 Bump2 Mwai A Mwait 0 Bump6 Mwait 0 Bump Mwai mp8 Mwait 0 Bump9 0 Bump10 Mwait 0 Bump11 Mwait 0 Bu it 0 Bump13 Mwait 0 Bu Mwa it 0 Bump15 Mwait 0 Bump16 Mwa xi Bump18 Mwa 2 Bump19 Mwait 0 Bump2 wait O Bump21 Mwait 0 Bump22 Mwait 0 Bump23 M6 Setup 1 Enter PurgeF lexi Stage Macro Rep Ent Macro Softkeys Return 26 if your macro needs to contain softkeys that are unavailable in the Macro Editing display you must use Learn to create it 236 Chapter 18 Macros Follow these steps to create a macro to record a show to diskette Keystrokes 1 Ze 7 Press Setup Select 8 Macro Editing and press Enter Press 8 Enter Press Setup 3 Enter Press 1 Enter Press Enter Press Enter Macro Macro wait To program a pause in the macro press Macro Wait at the point in the macro where you want the pause to occur Enter the time you would like the macro to hold then press Enter Continue to enter remaining macro commands Times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of sec onds in decimal format Times can be programmed from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Acceptable time values include 0 2 2 seconds 00 12 Action Selects Setup display screen Selects Macro display screen Prompt reads Sel
58. Eight softkeys to streamline operations Timed control e Internal or external clock e 12 hour or 24 hour timing e References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock e Up to 500 user created Real Time Programs Display functions e Two VGA video outputs e Extensive online Help displays available for all functions e Stage e Blind e Fader e Effects e Tracksheet e Spreadsheets Cues Submasters Groups and Focus Points e Patch e Park e Setup e Flexichannel displays only recorded channels e Expand e Channel attributes Submaster functions e Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters each e Fully overlapping channel assignments e Proportional channel levels e The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled disabled or placed in solo mode as a group or individually e Integral LEDs on all submasters e Programmable fade and wait times e Live and programmed rate control e 12submasters for either overlapping pile on or inhibitive operation e All submasters programmable with effects e Update function Appendix G Specifications Control keypad features Submaster labels Spreadsheet editing Submaster list Channel functions 8 bit and 16 bit data types Both highest level Highest Takes Precedence and last action Latest Takes Precedence channel types Group function to proportionally manipulate channels Proportional adjustment with level wheel And Except Only and Thru functions for selection of co
59. FO 7F 42 02 01 03 35 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue 50 C D Resume F0 7F 42 02 01 03 35 30 00 32 00 F7 FIRE MACRO Macros are limited to 1 127 Macro 3 FO 7F 4202 01 07 03 F7 Macro124 FO 7F 42 02 01 07 7C F7 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 287 Real time programs The console allows you to create up to 500 real time programs that can run automatically when you re not there For example you may wish to turn on the work lights for a choir rehearsal between 7 PM and 9 PM on Monday and Wednesday Or warm the filaments of your studio instruments 15 minutes prior to your news program These programs run in real time which means that they execute periodically when pre set conditions arrive These conditions include the time of day and either the day of the week or a date The time settings can be absolute such as 7 00 a m or they can be related to your local sunrise or sunset using the console s astronomical clock feature You must do two things before you can properly execute a real time program First you must set the real time clock The procedure for setting the clock is given under Setting the clock page 34 Second you must enable real time programs which is explained in this chapter Go to the Real Time Programs display Press Setup 1 2 Real Time Programs Enter to go to the Real Time Programs display Real Time P ms Progrm 4 3 19 Days Date o Label Mon Nec 1 Startup Mon ec y Mid a 00 PM 3 End 12 00 PM 1 January Birth
60. Lighting command format User can send 7F All Types GO general command Cue number Cues numbered 0 9 are represented in an MSC frame as hexidecimal 30 39 For decimal cues the point character is represented by hexidecimal 2E Delimiter Faders Console faders are toggled by changing the Cue List number with fader A B represented by 31 and fader C D represented by 32 both hexidecimal Delimiter Stop Byte End of System Exclusive Message Chapter 24 Control interfaces Examples In the examples below MSC frame packets are sent using transmit channel 66 42 hexidecimal GO Go A B FO 7F 4202 01 02 30 00 31 00 31 F7 Go C D FO 7F 4202 01 01 30 00 32 00 31 F7 GO CUE Cue1 A B fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 31 00 31 OO F7 Cue 5 6 A B fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 35 2E 36 00 31 00 F7 Cue10 A B fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 31 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue350 A B fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 33 35 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue1 C D fader FO 7F 4202 01 01 31 00 32 00 F7 Cue2 C D fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 32 00 32 00 F7 Cue987 C D fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 39 38 37 00 32 00 F7 STOP Stop A B FO 7F 4202 01 02 30 00 31 00 31 F7 Stop C D FO 7F 4202 01 02 30 00 32 00 31 F7 STOP CUE Cue 50 A B Hold FO 7F 42 02 01 02 35 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue 50 C D Hold FO 7F 42 02 01 02 35 30 00 32 00 F7 RESUME Resume A B FO 7F 4202 01 03 30 00 31 00 31 F7 Resume C D FO 7F 4202 01 03 30 00 32 00 31 F7 RESUME CUE Cue 50 A B Resume
61. Macro editing is described in greater detail in Chapter 15 Working with macros Press or touch Enter Macro to save the macro Each macro has a 50 keystroke limit Enter another macro or edit an existing macro by following steps 4 through 9 Or return to another mode by touching the appropriate key The console displays a highlighted R next to the macro number to indicate that it has been assigned to a region Prompt reads Select operations for this region Touch ENTER MACRO when done As you touch keys on the worksheet or console they are displayed on the editing screen Prompt reads Select region number or touch a previously defined region then touch ENTER Hint If you need to exceed the 50 keystroke limit link another macro to the end by entering its number as the last keystroke then enter the rest of your commands in the linked macro Macro Wait To program a pause in the macro press Macro wait The console displays Mwait 0 Enter the length of the pause in minutes and seconds or as a fraction of a second in decimal form from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 317 318 Copying regions You may want to copy a region or use regions as building blocks for new regions To copy contents of one region to another follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Press Setup Press 7 Designer Worksheet Editing and press Enter Press S7 Copy Region Pre
62. Manual v 3 1 325 Console s back panel DMX In Switched Switched Power SMPTE DMX Out AC Power AC Power Switch Parallel Remote MIDI In Out Printe pai y m ida Macro Wireless Power n Bus Wireless Cord Keyboard Remote Time M m Digitizer DIP wiste Serial Switch Pair T25A In some cases you will find it necessary to open the console by raising the face panel For example if your console is an older model you may need to open the console to gain access to DIP switches located on the main processor board For Expression 3 consoles a Spare Parts kit is stored inside the console box and retrieved by raising the face panel Raising the face panel Follow the procedure below to raise the Expression 3 face panel 1 Loosen the knobs at the front of both ends of the front panel that secure the face panel 2 Raise the face panel and hold or prop it in upright position Replacing fuses Expression 3 consoles have three fuses Two are for AC input power and the third is for the interface used by optional RFU and remote I O devices If the console or remote devices connected to it fail first verify that power is available at the AC service outlet and that all cables are properly connected and undamaged When replacing console fuses make sure you use the same type The AC Input fuses are type T6 3A The fuse protecting the Remote 12VRFU Remote l O circuits is type F1 6AT2 5A Both types are slow action 250V fuses Replacement
63. Optional equipment Alphanumeric keyboard 336 Designer s Worksheet 338 ML Module 323 Remote Focus Unit 341 Output level conventions 4 P Page ChaBriela votan de PRESS 12 Encoder ns Stetson A evade ue 77 Submasters 160 168 Paging through displays 12 Park AtfOCUuS point 31 241 de 200 Channel oe see holo oes dete es 200 CUR Sextet a ae hee tae aeons 202 DIMAME x vk p ida 198 Displays s ertet sedo e Mrs 18 FIXt FGu i ceste dct ptm 203 Group isses 202 Subraster ur PERSE RAS 202 389 390 Unpark channel 201 Unpark dimmer 199 Part Creatina eo Pt Gm ty S ater 118 Delete from multipart cue 121 Modify fade wait 123 Update x eeu ave ELE RS 122 Paris Pauw iiu nad DAS 118 Patch See also Fixture patch A e P EOS 40 Captured channels 49 CUSTOM d emere vec ensi 41 Dime ues aia e 41 Dimmer label 44 Display cod hast En A eerie 17 ECItINGs cirio d tte s 74 Proportional patch 42 Reset 1 t0 1 o oo o o o 263 Pause fade ix so Re 127 Pending CUES derce b pee ee ks 130 Personality About Channel 65 DeTaultS i or een DE Aaa 69 DAA Ree ra 7 Fixture patch 73 l GaG ia DP ERA RE 70 AAA Pe 259 Reset defaults 71 SOLUS eee A E 69 71 VEW naa hee it es d iere dett 70 Pile on submaster
64. Prompt reads Type group label F6 clear to end F7 previous group level F8 next group label 3 Enter your label then Completes labeling of group 4 press Enter 184 Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Deleting a group Follow this procedure to delete one or more groups in the Group List display Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Group Displays Group List Enter S2 Group List Prompt reads Select group number s 2 Press S6 Delete Group Prompt reads To delete group s press number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 4 And 5 Enter Deletes groups 4 and 5 Enter Prompt reads Select group numbers s Focus Point List The Focus Point list shows all the focus points in the show by number and label The list can be paged if there are more than 54 focus points in the show 18 focus points shown per column Focus points may be labeled in the Focus Point List or deleted there from the show either individually or in ranges In the Focus Point List display a selected focus point is identified by a highlighted white row and a selected field is highlighted in yellow Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 185 Labeling a focus point Follow this procedure to label a focus point in the Focus Point List display Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Focus Point Displays Focus Point List Enter S2 Focus List Prompt reads Select focus point number s 2 Press 4
65. RELEASE to unpark 3 Press Chan 1 Thru Prompt reads 1 0 Focus Point 6 Select focus point and press ENTER 4 Press Enter Parks the channel at focus point 6 Alert appears Parked Channels 200 Chapter 15 Park Unparking channels Unparking one channel Unpark one channel at a time as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Select channel number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark 3 Enter the channel number Unparks the channel to unpark and press Rel Unparking all channels Unpark all channels at once as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Select channel number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark 3 Press Rel Prompt reads To release all parked channels press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Unparks all parked channels Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 201 Parking recorded channels Cues submasters groups and focus points may all be parked either at the levels recorded for their channels or at a proportional level For example if all your worklights are recorded in a group you could park that group at once rather than park the worklight channels individually Following is an example of how to park a group s channels Use the same procedu
66. Updates group 3 all captured and selected channels 141 142 Labeling groups The console allows you to label a group with an alphanumeric keyboard Group labels can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long Follow these steps to label a group Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Groupl 1 Press Enter Press Label Use the alphanumeric key board to enter a label Press Enter Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER Prompt reads Select channel numbers Prompt reads Type group label F6 clear to end F7 last group label F8 z next group label Corner displays your label Group 1 is labeled Chapter 11 Groups Deleting groups Delete a group from memory in the Stage Blind or Fader displays 22 Deleting a group has no effect on any cues groups submasters or focus points into which the deleted group was previously recorded Delete a group in Stage as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Prompt reads Softkeys 56 Delete To delete group press ENTER Group To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters group number to delete Corner reads Group 2 4 Press Enter Enter Group 2 is deleted from your show Copying
67. Updates srira Lo rA 140 141 View on stage 2 139 H Help ase tai ered etd neces oid dee d 2 Hide dimmer labels 44 Highest Takes Precedence HTP Explained 2200005 4 Sele dor Lue hans iden oe dor du 59 Hold Fader key 20005 127 Submaster dwell 166 Hold for Go subroutine 229 HOME POSITION Aca ved a en 158 l Independent channel Explained ook RE e 57 Release ees eere eor ER 56 Set os tees cert REP 58 Inhibitive submaster detined io ue on 158 Programming 169 170 Insert Cue using record 106 111 Cue using track 112 Empty channel link 248 Installation Alphanumeric keyboard 336 Designer s Worksheet 338 Digitizer 338 340 DIAS dup esp ee ee 332 ETICGNSE SA o ala 1d sto rere 329 Full Tracking Backup 330 MIDI Show Control 342 ML Module 323 387 Printer s voto erret Remote Interface Remote macro Remote monitors REU greeted bacs eres J Jumpers ADbOUt ss cuim en MIDI Out ThrU Remote Interface Jump to cue ooo K Keys Backs inma aaa T Rates ei sx di art TP 4n S ope A dp eb neta L Label Acceptable characters Channel s rc Dimmer profiles EDSTURS hoe rts e tt EA C SE FOCUS point es rias Group 0 000
68. User Manual v 3 1 209 Adding groups or focus points The procedure for creating steps by adding groups or focus points to them in the Blind Effects display is shown below All channels in a group or focus point are added to the step s together but they may be edited individually later Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S1 Step andenter Specifies next step to be created the step number A new Prompt reads step must always have the Select step number s next highest number To clear step s select step beginning with step 1 number s then press CLEAR 2 Press Group 5 Thrul Selects groups 5 through 10 1110 2 Prompt reads Group mode Select group s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s 3 Press S8 Add Adds groups channels to step Channels Prompt reads Group mode Select group s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s 4 Press Record Enter Records the channels to the effect step Prompt reads Select cue number To write effect press STEP To add focus points rather than groups press Focus Point rather than Group in this step 210 Chapter 16 Effects Adding grouped channels The procedure for creating steps in the Blind Effects display by adding grouped channels from cues or submasters to them is shown below All channels in a group or focus point are added to the step s together but they m
69. You may run a macro automatically each time you turn on your console such as to turn on lights or load a show To enable the powerup macro feature and select the macro follow the procedure below Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects the Setup menu 2 Press 6 Enter Selects the Options Settings menu 3 Press 1 0 Enter Selects the Powerup Macro option Prompt reads Select powerup macro number Enter 0 to disable 4 Press 2 0 Enter Selects macro 20 as your powerup macro Each time you turn on the console macro 20 runs 240 Chapter 18 Macros Modifying macros Editing mode In the Macro mode display you can edit macros in Insert or Replace modes In Insert mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another keystroke the console inserts the new keystroke before the highlighted one In Replace mode if you highlight a keystroke and type another keystroke the console replaces the highlighted keystroke with the new one To switch from Insert mode to Replace mode press S2 Replace To switch from Replace mode to Insert mode press S2 Insert The console indicates the editing mode in the upper left corner of the command display Editing keys and gt move the highlight left or right when you are editing a macro S3 Delete entry deletes highlighted keystroke Clearing macros You must be in Macro display mode to clear individual macros To clear all macros you can use the Clear Macro
70. all 14 options on the Clear Functions menu and an explanation of the function of each 1 OT Pop NS 12 13 15 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Show Erases all information pertaining to the show except patch information and the system configuration Cues Erases all recorded cues from the show Groups Erases all recorded groups from the show Submasters Erases all recorded submasters from the show Show and Patch Frases all information pertaining to the show Unaffected are system settings options settings and the I O configu ration See Reset System next page for clearing everything to defaults Focus Points Erases all recorded focus points from the show Designer s Worksheet Frases all regions from the Designer s Work sheet layout Macros assigned to the regions are not erased Macros Erases all macro information from the show Reset Patch 1 to 1 Resets to a one to one patch Thus channel 1 is patched to dimmer 1 channel 2 is patched to dimmer 2 and so on This function is independent of your show and does not clear label level or profile settings See Chapter 4 Patching channels page 39 for more information about patch Reset Profiles Returns all dimmer profiles to their preset curves Profiles 1 9 return to their preset curves identified under Dimmer pro files page 45 Profiles 10 32 all return to a linear curve Channel Attributes Erases all channel attribute information incl
71. all groups in the show by number and label Also gives the levels of all channels in each group Submasters Lists all 240 submaster memories by submaster num ber upfade dwell and downfade times rates and labels Also gives the levels of all channels included in each submaster Cue List Lists cues in the show by number and attributes Group List Lists all groups in the show by number and label Submaster List Lists all 240 submaster memories by submaster number upfade dwell and downfade times rates and labels Macros Lists macro sequences in the show by macro number Patch Prints the current dimmer to channel patch Profiles Lists all 32 profiles and their fade point intensities in the show Channel Attributes Lists Channel Attributes including link lists recorded in the show Real Time Programs Lists Real Time Programs in the show with complete information Time Code Events Lists all Time Code events in the show with complete information Focus Points Lists all focus points in the show by number and label Also gives the levels of all channels in each focus point Focus Point List Lists all focus points in the show by number and label Moving Lights This selection brings up the Print Moving Lights menu See the explanation below of the four choices on this menu Tracksheet Print Tracksheet lists channel tracking information from your Tracksheet Movin
72. at a time in the Real Time Programs display Delete a real time program with the following procedure Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display mode 2 Press 1 2 Enter Selects Real Time Programs display 3 Press S7 More Prompt reads Softkeys 56 Delete Select program number s to Program delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 5 And 6 Enter Selects programs 5 and 6 to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter Deletes programs 5 and 6 Inserting real time programs Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display mode 2 Press 1 2 Enter Selects Real Time Programs display 3 Press S7 More Specify insertion at program 4 Softkeys 51 Insert Prompt reads Program 4 Enter Select program number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 2 Enter Inserts two new programs starting with number All following programs are renumbered While editing a real time program you can run it simultaneously because the editing procedure is buffered in memory The changes are recorded once you leave the Real Time Programs display and or sort the programs See Sorting recording real time programs page 293 292 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Copying real time programs Keystrokes 1 2 9 Moving real time programs Press Setup Press 1 2 Enter Press S7 More Softkeys
73. at once Set the level using the keyboard or with reference to a preset focus point When channels are parked a yellow alert appears at the lower right side of the Command display that reads Parked Channels Using the keyboard Park one or more channels at levels taken from the keyboard as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Select channel number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark 3 Press 1 Thru 1 O Full Parks the channel at Full Alert appears Parked Channels Parking at a focus point You can park channels at a focus point as well as park focus point channels themselves See Parking recorded channels page 202 for information about parking focus point channels When you park channels at a focus point they are linked to the focus point and take whatever levels are set for the channels in the focus point If those levels in the focus point change the link causes the same change to occur for the parked channels Channels parked at a focus point are shown in the Park display with both the channel s current level in the focus point and the focus point number Park channels at a focus point using the following procedure Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Select channel number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level or press
74. backup for the other This provides you with a working console running your current show even if something happens to your main console Use the keyswitch on the back right corner of the console s face panel to switch from one processor to the other The LEDs labeled A and B indicate which console is which and which is the main console Note Only the main console may be used to control outputs The backup console or LPC remains inert until either the keyswitch transfers control to it or the link between the two consoles is broken The FTB system In an FTB system the main console s processor controls the lighting system If the backup console s processor detects an interruption in operation of the main console s processor the backup takes over This happens with no effect on operation other than a warning message and a momentary pause about five seconds When you turn the system on the A console is the main processor and the B console is the backup Set DIP switches 2 and 3 on each console to determine which is A and which is B Switch control from A to B or back by turning the System keyswitch Note The B console will only be the main console if manually switched or if control switches due to a problem in A See Appendix B for DIP switch information Backing up shows When you turn an FTB system on the show in console A main is loaded automatically into console B backup During operation all keystrokes and slider moves
75. be able to get the personality you need from ETC or create it yourself See Personalities page 7 to learn about these options All personalities can be included in your show or deleted from it to save console memory You may also inspect a personality in your show Go to the Personality Setup display 1 Press Setup 1 5 Enter to display the Moving Lights Functions menu 2 Press 1 Enter to go to the Personality Setup display tu Num Personalitu t 31 2 53 S4 35 S6 57 zi bed d Eg D X X Select a personality Yellow highlighting Personality selected in the display Purple highlighting Personalities in use in the show Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 69 Loading personalities into the console You may load additional personalities to your show if you find that the default personalities are not sufficient for your needs Any personalities loaded to your show are saved with your show Load personalities to your show from a diskette If you obtained the extra personalities from ETC s internet website store them first on your hard drive preferably in the Shows directory set up by Expression Off Line See the Expression Off Line QuickGuide for information about using Off Line to create and edit shows for your console When you are ready to load personalities to your show transfer what you need from your computer to a diskette The console loads all files from the diskette to your show at once
76. change the direction of the fade For example if the upfade is half finished pressing the bump button starts the downfade from 50 percent If a downfade is running pressing the bump button begins an upfade again from the current level Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 165 166 Hold dwell time If you record a submaster with a dwell time of Hold the submaster fades up when you press the bump button then holds until you press it again To add a dwell time of Hold to a submaster follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Sub 2 Press 5 3 Press Time Time 4 Press Clear Press Enter Enter Manual dwell time Action Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 Prompt reads Enter dwell time For hold or manual operation press CLEAR until desired setting appears Corner reads Dwell Hold Dwell time is set to Hold for submaster 5 If you record a submaster with a dwell time of manual and an upfade time other than zero the upfade starts when you press and hold the bump button It runs until channels reach full recorded levels then holds at full as long as you hold the bump button the downfade begins when you release it If you don t hold the bump button for the duration of the upfade time channels do not reach their full recorded levels Follow this procedure in Blind to convert a timed dwell to a manual dwel
77. cue number To select cue type press TYPE 2 Press Track Enter Pulls in previous cue s channels 3 Press Channel 5 At Adds channel 5 at 50 percent 5 0 Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press Track Prompt reads To record cue amp tracking select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5b Press Enter Records cue 2 5 The following illustration shows this insertion and subsequent tracking Chan 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chanb5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 50 FF 00 Cue2 5 50 FF 00 70 Cue 3 50 FF FF 70 Cue 4 25 FF FF FF 70 Cue 5 00 00 00 00 70 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 113 114 Blackout cues and tracking Sometimes you may add a channel to a sequence of cues that have not used that channel yet For example you may want to add a channel to all cues in a scene To do this add the channel to the first cue in the sequence and use Track to track the change through the remaining cues However the last cue in sequence may be a blackout cue When you track the channel the new channel tracks until it runs into a different recorded level To ensure that channels are not tracked through a blackout cue make the blackout cue an allfade cue An allfade cue assigns a level of zero to any unused channels This blocks any potential tracks An allfade cue also clears the opposite fader Figure 6 displays what happens when we track channel 5 through the sequence when cue 5 is a regular crossfade cue C
78. defined 158 Pinout Alphanumeric keyboard 336 DIMME iia epe 332 MIE Wissel sentir A t e Care d tae 343 MONITOR 2 tb EE s 354 EIOS eco E 337 Remote Macro 344 Remote macros 345 PEW ce tu eet s DI ien 341 Playback QUOS c4 ip Bae ese 125 130 DISDlaVis Gus M esa ete erbe Rer 19 LOU Susini tbt 139 150 Mic i cent te a veo 240 Manual override 131 Specifications 372 Playback display CU Leitte cree ee oe 19 Submaster LiSt 19 Time Code list 308 Pointing device 335 Port Set Dimmer Doubling 334 Set DMX512 start 333 Print Optlohns a vete pa bI 258 PRIEST S a MS 6 TUE cH I diat o 337 Profile ASI o XR Muret 46 Create cvv ALI ERI EVI 47 abel 23 Soo tas c ur En c 48 Predefined s oda m ts 45 OSC Uren Edd rs mete coma rare Sens 263 Programming regions 316 Proportional patching 42 P rge Flexia ties 15 61 Q QuiCkKSTS Dices m OP eer ceni auc de 133 R Rack Status corto sss adhe 270 Rate Override x ctu bud 132 Rate X display 21 Submaster 167 174 Update iu ed id m 104 Real Time Clock Seb ok alu pins ctete ake fate 34 36 J SILIO s at rs tob edet s 288 Real time programs ADOUtH taa ELE es 288 Astronomical clock 291 lOs Ah chee ae atk d eia 263 Create 2 2 4 5 eed Balok See oh 290 Enable Disable
79. entered on the main console are mirrored on the other console s displays Changes and updates are recorded on both Warning If you work on console B while console A or FTB is turned off any changes you have made will be erased when you activate FTB The show in console A always replaces the show in console B when an FTB system starts up To avoid this save the show on console B to a diskette before you reactivate FTB Once the system is back on you may load the show from the diskette onto console A LEDs Two LEDs labeled A and B are located in the back right corner of the consoles face panels On console A the A LED is lit On console B the B LED is lit The LED flashes on the backup console and is solid on the main console If neither LED is lit FTB is off or has been interrupted Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 321 Using Full Tracking Backup To use Full Tracking Backup follow these steps 1 Turn system on As part of the startup process the show in console A s memory is copied to console B overwriting the contents of B 2 Ifthe show you want to run is not in A s memory insert the show diskette into the main console s diskette drive after the Stage display appears Only the main console s diskette drive may be used when FTB is activated 3 Readshow into the main console s memory from diskette The show is read simultaneously into the backup console Continue using consoles normally If the main proc
80. eventS 304 Submasters 176 177 Crossfade cue CUG type ire ee 86 Subroutine step 228 GUC Yeni A Ded ee Ede 85 Altadis cett eed A ies cue 86 Back Keys ined s Bee es ds 127 BlaGKOUT ou ht ete tein o ete 114 Blacko ut cue eee af ene oe 114 BIG ede c as A 90 BIOCKING tatami ie heli het 6 Cl aR ca oe d Et redis 263 Command display list 180 Convert to multipart 119 CODY qon ista ei y LEN eret 105 Copy to sub sec roro eee 177 Crossfade oonan anaana 00000 86 Que CHECK pc das 133 Cue Command 180 Default Fade TiMe 26 Deleter A scsi dans copo iom s 104 Fold Wicca id pes 95 A EREE EE LEERE 127 GOSUO ior ete eder ve em uui 130 la METRE 127 SSIs eck eee DI T IR Ds 106 label ans Sedo Rr taz SE 320 IRA S60 PH 94 Link to MAacro oo o oo o 97 Coad tO SUD iii eS 176 Maximum nuMber 85 Modify oer Eea a Rer 109 Modify attributes 101 Multipart defined 117 Parked CUL vez Ae L Aa 202 Play CU Csi dun sepe eR 130 BiG EE ER ERE ERRARE 259 Quickstep s e esee PED en 133 POCORG a uo MR o Ms ei eser aet 93 Record from stage 89 Record in Blind 90 Record with fade time 91 Record with split fades 92 Recording with solo 98 137 Select ci td oe ee 130 Specifications 373 Spreadsheet 187 Stage yni t an
81. factory set default sneak time is five seconds Chapter 3 System settings Setting Designer s Worksheet options The Designer s Worksheet Setup display shown below allows you to specify which of three different ETC templates you will use Two templates are available for the 12x12 inch Kurta digitizer and one template for the 12x17 inch Kurta digitizer r Nor Menu 4 09 41 AM with subn Enabled e without subn Without s Current Sliders Enabled Console 51 S2 3 S4 S5 S6 S 8 Y d Bieter Sliders Return Note in the display that there are two choices for the 12x12 inch digitizer Choice 1 is made when you want the freedom to control faders submasters or the Grandmaster sliders from either the console or from the Designer s Worksheet Choice 2 is made when you are satisfied to have those slider controls always at the console and want more programmable space on the Designer s Worksheet The third option in the display is for the 12x17 inch digitizer This choice does not allow for the reassignment of control of faders submasters or the Grandmaster 11 See Designer s Worksheet page 315 for information about the digitizers and templates available for the Designer s Worksheet Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Enabling the template The procedure to set options for the Designer s Worksheet is similar for all three templates For example to select the template for the 12x12 inch digitizer that allows control of th
82. fuses of both types are provided in the console s Spare Parts Kit which is located beneath the face panel 326 Appendix A Installation AC Input fuses These fuses are contained in a swiveling tray located between the power switch and the power cord connector 1 2 3 Turn off the console Remove the power cord Pull the fuse tray out of its holder by placing something sharp behind the tab on the bottom of the cover The tray remains connected to the tray holder but rotates downward for convenience CAUTION Operate the tray carefully to avoid damage Examine both fuses Telltale signs of a blown fuse include discoloration or deposits on the glass envelope and or a visibly broken fuse strip If you find a blown fuse replace it with the fuse of the same type and size from the console s Spare Parts Kit To retrieve the Spare Parts Kit raise the console s face panel as explained under Opening the console page 326 With good fuses installed rotate the tray up and inward until it is again flush with the panel Replace the power cord and check the console for proper operation If still having problems see Help from ETC Technical Services page 10 to get help from ETC RFU Remote I 0 fuse If you have an external device such as an RFU or a remote macro controller connected to the console and it doesn t operate check the RFU Remote l O fuse This fuse is located in a pop out receptacle located along the lower margin of
83. hereafter owed by the customer to ETC At ETC s request customer will execute a financing statement or statements evidencing such security interest and will take any other action necessary to perfect the same Payment terms are net 30 days after date of invoice If ETC in good faith doubts customers ability or willingness to pay ETC may in its discretion complete its performance of this contract upon a cash in advance basis or make deliveries only upon a C O D basis or file a UCC filing or suspend all or part of its performance here under All payments are applied to the oldest outstanding invoice Accounts over thirty 30 days are subject to a 1 1 296 one Appendix Limited Warranty and one half percent per month late payment penalty ETC will have the option of withholding performance under any and all orders from the Customer if an invoice remains unpaid after 30 days All disputes otherwise unresolved between ETC and Customer shall be resolved in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location of ETC s offices Dane County Wisconsin If suit or action is instituted by ETC to enforce payment or performance by the Customer the Customer agrees to pay all costs and attorney s fees incurred Claims for shortage or damaged goods must be made within ten 10 days Equipment is carefully packed and delivered in good condition to the carrier All claims for loss or damage in transit must be made by the consignee directly to th
84. illustrated below rint Functions Menu 04 16 PM Print e Display Print Print wint int int int int int int int int int int int int int 1 YA 3 S4 ss S6 57 58 mg You may pause the current printing job or cancel it at any time while printing To stop the printer temporarily while it is printing press S2 Pause Printer The printer prints a few more lines then stops and waits Press S2 again to resume printing To cancel a print job press S1 Stop Printer The printer prints a few more lines then stops Printing procedure Follow the procedure below for all printouts This example shows the prompts for the Print Stage Display option on the Print Functions menu Use this procedure for all printout options varying as directed by the onscreen prompts Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 5 Print Functions Displays Print Functions menu Enter 3 Press 1 Print Stage Prompt reads Display Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter File sent to the printer Chapter 21 Printing Printouts available Following is a list of all 17 options on the Print Functions menu and an explanation of the printout each will produce 1 2 9 Stage Display Reports the settings of all channels on stage Cues Lists cues in the show by number and attributes Also gives the levels of all channels in each cue Groups Lists
85. is displayed provides information about the cue s current status Gray Cue is not selected and is not in a fader White Pending cue will play back next time either Go key is pressed Yellow Cue is in a fader and is selected in Stage Gold Cue is in a fader but is not selected in Stage Light red Cue is currently running and is selected in Stage Dark red Cue is currently running but is not selected in Stage ria Cue is selected in Stage or Blind 128 Chapter 10 Playing back cues Fader Status display The fader status display consists of two windows located near the bottom of the playback monitor These are illustrated below Fader Cue in fader Fader CL Clear Downfade information or effect step Upfade information or effect fade times The fader status display provides information about the cues loaded to the console s faders including fade times and rates The left window monitors the A B fader the right window monitors the C D fader The display counts down wait times for cues and indicates which step is running when an effect is active Selecting cues There are many ways that you can determine which cue will play next on stage including the following You can select a cue from the keypad and press Gol Press Go without selecting a cue The console will play either the next cue in the Cue List or the cue linked to th
86. line Indicates fixture selected Yellow coloration Indicates feature selected 2 Pressing S8 Return in Fixture Patch returns you either to the Moving Lights Functions menu or to the Patch display depending upon which of the two you were in just prior Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Patching one fixture or a fixture range The following procedure makes use of the automatic cursor movement from field to field for efficient data entry When patching a range all range members receive the same assignments except as noted below Alternatively you can use softkeys at any time to make entries in specific fields such as to individualize labels when fixtures are patched as a range 1 Fixture Number Enter the fixture number or range Fixtures are entered in order starting with 1 Press Enter Label Enter a descriptive label using an alphanumeric keyboard Press Enter Personality Enter the number of the personality from the list of personalities you have available Alternatively scroll through the personality choices with the or keys Press Enter to select Start Channel Enter a number for the first channel to be assigned to the fixture s If entering a range picking the Start Channel assigns a sequential start channel to every fixture in the range Press Enter DMX512 Start Enter the number of the desired DMX port Press Enter The cursor remains in the DMX512 start field but m
87. mode Selects cue 1 Prompt reads To link to cue select cue number To link to macro press ENTER MACRO Prompt reads To link to macro select macro number To link to cue press CUE Records macro 7 linked to cue 1 When you press Gol to play cue 1 macro 7 will run at the same time 15 See Chapter 18 Macros for information about creating macros 16 See Recording cues with Link and Follow page 94 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 97 Recording a cue using Solo Solo is useful for setting existing channels to zero temporarily while you view or record selected channels You can use Solo in Blind or Stage When used in Stage you can use solo to cut all lights except those selected thus using it to identify specific lights Or you can use Solo a different way to cut all channels except those selected which is a way of filtering channels for recording Both procedures are given below Using Solo to record selected lights In the Stage procedure below all but selected lights are cleared the first time you press Solo They are restored as before when you press Solo a second time Stage only This use of Solo will not NOT clear independent channels such as those controlling most moving light attributes It will however clear the intensity channel of a moving light fixture Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects the Stage display mode 2 Press Cue 1 0 Go Plays cue 10 in a fader pair to set a look on stag
88. reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 2 Cue copy is complete Channel levels have been copied from cue 1 to cue 2 You can now modify the new cue a Press Sub or Group before the number in step 5 if you want to copy a look from a cue to a submaster or a group 20 You cannot copy an effect cue to a group Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 105 106 Inserting cues You may want to insert a cue between recorded cues For example you may want to modify cue 1 slightly and insert it between cues 1 and 2 You can number cues with a one digit decimal Therefore you can insert up to nine cues between 1 and 2 1 1 1 2 etc Follow these steps to insert a cue between existing cues Keystrokes 1 2 Press Blind or Stagel Press Cue and enter the number of the cue to modify then press Enter If you are working in Stage mode press Go Add or modify channels and cue attributes Press Record Enter cue number with a decimal to insert it between cues e g 1 5 If you do not enter a new cue number you will overwrite the existing cue Press Enter Action Selects display mode Selects the desired cue Brings up cue on stage and on the display Cue is modified Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Cue 1 5 New cue 1 5 is recorded between cues 1
89. set their channels to their Low Level and set the channels of the previous step to their High Level e Alternate Sets the effect to alternate between positive and negative chases through its steps The first pass is positive if the effect is positive negative if the effect is negative e Reverse Effect steps run in reverse numerical order e Bounce Steps run first in forward then in reverse order Subsequent passes alternate between forward and reverse e Build All channels are set to their Low Level at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its channels to their High Level and leaves the previous step at the High Level At the end of the chase all channels are at the High Level They are all set at their Low Levels to start the next pass In a negative effect all steps are at their High Levels at the beginning of the chase Each step turns its channels to the Low Level and leaves previous channels at the Low Level At the end of the chase all channels are at the Low Level They are all set at their High Levels to start the next pass e Random A Random effect plays steps back in random order An effect with a random rate runs at varying speeds changing at random within a range that you select The console applies a random rate to the assigned step time and to the step fade times Random is ideal for creating lightning and fire effects The rules for assigning effect attributes are as follows e All effects are either Po
90. the console s rear panel adjacent to the AC Input cord 1 Turn off the console 2 Remove the power cord 3 Remove the cover of the fuse receptacle with a flat blade screwdriver 4 Remove and examine the fuse Telltale signs of a blown fuse include Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 discoloration or deposits on the glass envelope and or a visibly broken fuse strip If you find a blown fuse replace it with the fuse of the same size and type from the console s Spare Parts Kit To retrieve the Spare Parts Kit raise the console s face panel as explained under Opening the console page 326 With a good fuse installed reinsert the fuse into the rear panel holder and secure with the screwdriver Verify that the external device works properly If still having problems see Help from ETC Technical Services page 10 to get help from ETC 327 Installing the console and monitors Follow these steps to install the Expression 3 console and its monitors 1 Place console on a hard stable flat surface Leave at least six inches of space behind console for ventilation and cable clearance Console should be at least six feet from dimmers and high current AC lines CAUTION Do not leave the console in a road case tray or on a soft surface This will inhibit proper ventilation 2 Move console power switch by fan on back panel to the Off position 3 Connect the video cable from the monitor to the console connector labeled CRT 1 on t
91. the desired dimmers to a level in step 1 you may enter a list of dimmers to record in step 5 On single phase racks the system checks 16 dimmers per rack at a time Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 273 274 Load Check procedure Load Check compares the current load on selected dimmers with their recorded loads The system checks load information only for selected dimmers To identify the dimmer s you wish to check use either the console or the CEM to set the desired dimmers at a level above zero The system checks 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all dimmers at levels above zero have been checked If you have multiple racks 24 dimmers in each rack are checked simultaneously 9 Caution Load Check changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a check load operation in progress press S7 Cancel Enter Follow these steps to check loads for your system Keystrokes 1 Set dimmers to be checked to a level above zero Only dimmers above zero are checked Management and press Press S4 Load Check Press 0 Enter Enter Press Enter to proceed press Clear to cancel the Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Selects Load Management display Prompt reads To check loads select dimmer s and press ENTER Enter 0 to check loads for all dimmers Advisory reads All dimmers with levels above zero wil
92. the submaster Prompt reads 13 to 24 you wish to be Select submaster number inhibitive To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Press Typel 2 Specifies sub is inhibitive Prompt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect 4 Press 1 0 Thru 2110 Adds channels 10 through 20 to the sub Press Record Sub Records new inhibitive sub Enter Follow the same procedure to convert back to pile on e You may include the same channel in more than one inhibitive sub master e f you press an inhibitive submaster s bump button the submaster fades from its current slider location to zero and back using its record ed fade times Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 169 170 Adding channels Once you have an inhibitive submaster use the following procedure in Blind to add channels to it Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Sub 1 5 Enter Selects sub 15 All channels in sub 15 if an inhibitive submaster are displayed with IN in their level fields Prompt reads Select channel numbers 3 Press 5 2 Enter Adds channel 52 The channel is shown with IN inits level field Specifies sub is inhibitive 4 Press Record Sub Records sub 15 with the added channel Enter Deleting channels Channels may be deleted from an inhibitive submaster either in Stage or Blind Follow the procedure below to delete in Blind Keystrokes Actions 1 P
93. then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Select dimmer level Press FULL button for 100 Advisory reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Dimmers are set to desired level To unset a dimmer or group of dimmers and return it to normal operation follow the procedure below NOTE Setting a dimmer to level 00 is not the same as unsetting it and returning it to normal operation Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 ETCLink Functions Enter 3 Press S6 Unset Dimmer 4 Enter the dimmers you wish to unset and press Enter Press 0 Enter to unset all set dimmers 5 Press Enter Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Prompt reads Select dimmer number s to unset then press ENTER Enter 0 to unset all dimmers Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Dimmers are unset Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring Working with Sensor backup looks A backup look is a recording of a selected look on stage stored in the Sensor CEM The Sensor system allows you to use either your console or any CEM to bring that look up on stage You may save and use up to 32 backup looks Recording a backup look To record a backup look follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Use your console to create the desired look on stage Press Setup Select 9 ETCLink Functions and press Enter P
94. to select level or press RELEASE to unpark channel s 5 Press Enter Parks the fixture 12 See The Only command page 8 to select fixture attributes Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 203 204 Unparking fixtures Unpark fixtures in the Stage display When you unpark a fixture all channels patched to that fixture are unparked After unparking a fixture its attribute levels revert to the levels the console assigns to them Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display 2 S8 Fixture 1 The fixture box appears and is set to fixture 1 3 Press Park Prompt reads Press ENTER to park channel s press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark channel s 4 Press Rell The fixture is unparked Prompt reads Select channel numbers Chapter 15 Park Chapter 16 Effects An effect is a cue or a submaster that can run in a variety of patterns called chases Each effect step contains channels When the step runs channel level is controlled when the channel is specifically addressed An effect can be positive with lights starting off and being turned on in patterns or negative with lights starting on and being turned off in patterns It can have up to 100 steps each of which can last up to 99 59 minutes The effect may be created in Blind or while viewing the steps in Stage Steps in the effect are individually controlled for level and timing and the effect is subject to a separate overall timing pa
95. to set levels o oooooooooooo o 296 Viewing DMX IN utes RYDER MY Re ee 296 Me Oden iss acne Pete math eS rial bode Des bb ads 297 Setting time code frame rate 200 0000 02 wee 297 Creating a time code program 000 ills 298 Sorting recording events 0 0 0 eee 301 Editing time code programs 0000020005 301 Re setting the event list pointer 22 301 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Xi Resetting loop time 000 cee eee 302 Deleting time code events 0200 02 eee 303 Inserting time code events 000220 eee eee 303 Copying time code events 0 0 0 eee 304 Moving time code events 000 lesen 305 EditiNG EVENtS otto seh DIR Aot eode doo d 306 Running a time code program ooooccoccocococ ellen 308 Remote Macros so c mti vate bL SE IDEA RAO nds 311 Seralinterface soa e e me Se RARO EEA 311 Chapter 25 CERES IE NN EE A 313 Remote Focus Unit RFU semere tenana r 02020000 314 Designer s Worksheet naana nanan 315 Using the Designer s Worksheet 0 00000 315 Programming regions 2020 eee eee 316 Macro Wit sc ete t OP EO UE URP WOES 317 Copying regions ee ris deaten ie porde e 318 Glearing regions 20d aa a Bos ot 0E By 319 Alphanumeric keyboard nananana aaa 320 Fall Tracking BaCkup xx ane Stt go em t SM ret ae rea 321 The3ETBSySteET ssh reb e IA Ars tes b eed 321 Using Full Tracking Backu
96. trackball or trackpad can be connected The device must be Microsoft compatible Installation Switch off the power to the console Connect the pointing device to the RS 232 Mouse connector at the left side of the console rear panel see Console s back panel page 326 Device check The pointing device should be ready for use when the console and module are switched on Verify normal operation by patching fixtures as explained under Patching moving lights page 72 Movement of the pointing device should control pan and tilt levels its buttons should reselect fixtures in the Fixture Box window If the device doesn t function normally proceed as follows 1 Verify that the pointing device is Microsoft compatible 2 Verify that the pointing device works normally in another system such as in a computer 3 If you still have a problem after making the verifications see Help from ETC Technical Services page 10 to get help from ETC Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 335 Installing an alphanumeric keyboard Use the optional keyboard to assign labels to many features of your shows such as to name the show and the cues submasters groups timed events and programs within it You can supply your own keyboard or order one from ETC If you supply your own it must be an AT compatible type or switchable to an AT compatible mode ETC recommends the Cherry G80 1800 and Keytronic 101 keyboards Although you may use keyboards from other m
97. 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 50 50 50 SO FL FL FL 80 80 80 80 80 80 30 90 90 50 50 50 50 FL FL FL 80 80 80 80 80 80 30 90 90 15 62 05 78 FL 05 66 07 75 Creating focus points After entering the focus point spreadsheet as explained above create a focus point as follows Keystrokes 1 Press S2 Create Focus 2 Press 5 Enter 3 Press 5 Thru 1110 4 Press Full Repeat steps 3 4 194 Actions Prompt reads To create a new focus point select focus point number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects focus point 5 Prompt reads Select channel s Selects channels to include Prompt reads Enter intensity Sets channels 5 through 10 to full Continue selecting channels and setting levels until done Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Editing focus points You may edit a focus point in the focus point spreadsheet Follow all steps in the procedure under Creating a focus point on the previous page except Press S1 Select Focus in step 1 Deleting in spreadsheet After entering the focus point spreadsheet as explained on the previous page delete a focus point as follows Keystrokes 1 Press S6 Delete Focus 2 Press 5 And 6 Enter 3 Press Enter Enter Replacing channel level Actions Prompt reads To delete focus point s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects focus points 5 and 6 Promp
98. 0 Mwait 10 5 Press At 0 Enter Fades all active channels out Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 Mwait 10 ENTER AT 0 ENTER 6 Press M3 Stores macro Links macro to macro 3 Macro line reads ENTER AT 5 0 Mwait 10 ENTER AT 0 ENTER M3 Note You may also link a macro to a cue so the macro will run at the same time the cue does See Linking a macro to a cue page 97 for more details 238 Chapter 18 Macros Using submasters in macros Submaster bump buttons can function in macros in three different ways 1 asa normal bump button 2 toalways fade a submaster to full regardless of its current condition 3 toalways fade a submaster out regardless of its current condition To include a bump button that starts a timed submaster or changes the direction of a running fade press the submaster bump button while programming the macro Use 1 On Sub Bump to fade the submaster up regardless of its current setting Use S2 Off Sub Bump to fade a submaster out regardless of its current setting To create a macro that turns a submaster on for five seconds then turns it off follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 8 Enter Selects Macro editing mode 2 Press 4 Enter Selects macro 4 to create Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros 3 Press S7 More Macro line reads OnBump Softkeys 51
99. 00 338 Installing the Kurta XGT 2 0 0 0 eee eee 338 OTUs oda Mone e adu DA te Aah ed ax dss fA 339 Xii Contents Installing the Kurta IS ONE 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 340 Installing Remote Focus Unit 0 0 0 0 aaan aa 341 Installing MIDI hu ties ais nt eta RU Melange A aaa 342 Installing remote macros 20000 eee 344 Wiring remote macros 00 000 E eee eee 345 Upgrading software a ree ue yakola ae poA es 346 Upgrading a console os remire tossini teka eee 346 Upgrading remote interface devices 346 Appendix B REIETENCES 22 as sten arca ied oars maa a aAA 349 DIP switches in earlier consoles 2 2025 349 Remote Interface devices llis ee es 350 Installing JUMPSTSE cus uoces Soh oie meet rb en 350 Remote Interface Unit RIU 2 2 2 eese 350 Remote Video Interface RVI ooo 352 Installing remote video monitors 004 354 Appendix C Error messagps ci ore d Ie ears 355 Full Tracking Backup messages 00 0c cee eee eee 355 Diskette error messages 1 esses 356 Other error messages 0 00 ee eee 356 BTGE inetrOES e ahah epe ubi M DE 357 Fatal Messages dese m LR eU VER ER 357 Secondary Messages i e 358 Appendix D Showfile sse 359 Show conteBts s seek he tenes Ek ose PE ES quU 359 Configuration settings isses 360 Read show results o en euan ar ANA EEE ses 360 Read system configuration res
100. 2 Submaster LEDs riore eae r oi e E E AERE E 163 Recording submasters spi inoren dear hee eee 164 Fade and dwell times for submasters 164 Adding a rate toa submaster 000000 167 Specifying a submaster s page 0 00 000008 168 Using Except to record a submaster 168 Inhibitive submasters sl bue redes 169 Creating Suec ae Or e Pa EE e PEOR RES e 169 Adding channels 0 0 0c eee ee eee 170 Deleting channels 170 Modifying submasters in Blind 000000 171 Modifying submasters in Stage 0 ee 171 Re recording submasters 00000 cece eee 171 Updating submasters 0 0 00 cc cee eee 172 Live control of a submaster s rate eee 174 Controlling submaster fades manually 174 Labeling submasters 0 eee 175 Copying submasters oo 176 Loading cues or groups to submasters 20040 176 Copying cues or groups to submasters 00 177 Clearing submasters o 177 Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets 179 Cue LIST ea sonia aln a pat aa ate anser ode fos rate 154 de 180 EdItING CUSS ecu ve eder ord esce E epa le Rc PUER S 180 Submaster List 1x ze ab ede d CS ehe 181 EGItING SUBIMASTOIS sese yo e c P a de 182 Deleting submasters ll ee 183 Grou PIS Eia reote DEI Outer dS Deu On E 184 Labeling agropa ose weiche ue oe eee re Qe S 184 Deleting
101. 2 x 17 layout provides control of fader keys and all console functions other than submasters fader sliders and the Grandmaster slider Note You may control submaster sliders from either the console or the digitizer but not both Use the Designer s Worksheet Setup display to select this option Using the Designer s Worksheet To use the Designer s Worksheet to control console keys touch the corresponding area on the worksheet with the stylus To use submaster sliders or the wheels drag the stylus along the corresponding control strip The remaining area of the tablet is available for user definable regions To each of these regions you may assign a macro containing a sequence of up to 50 console keystrokes Each region s macro can execute cues manipulate channel levels or execute any series of keystrokes Once you assign a macro to a region start the macro by touching the region on the tablet For example you might draw a picture of the stage and outline regions corresponding to various instruments or fixtures on stage or in a studio You might program each region to select the channels for that area of the stage You can then touch that region to select channels and then enter desired level Or you might program more abstract regions on the worksheet For example you might program several areas on the worksheet each representing a song in a band s play list 72 If you have not yet installed your digitizer tablet see Ins
102. 3 Using cues and submasters as groups 144 Modifying cues or submasters l les 145 Chapter 12 Focus points o caro ta errar 147 Recording a focus point ede e aa n a sss 148 Recording a focus point in Stage o o oo oo oo 148 Creating a focus point from a look on stage 148 Recording a focus point using Solo o o ooooooo 149 Working with focus points in Stage 0 2 0 eee 150 Placing a focus point on stage eee 150 Modifying a focus point n aaan aaa aaaea 150 Updating focus points 0 0 ee 151 Editing a focus point in Blind 0000022005 153 Labeling focus PONES Piet m rod deb pedes 154 Deleting focus points 0 002 ee 155 Copying focus points 0 00 00 eee 155 Setting levels with focus points 00 00 eee eee 156 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Vii viii Chapter 13 Submasters sss 157 SubmastertyDes sag ete sd tue uh sts tA c dee 158 Pile n submaster ns ek lese eee e RUDI le WO us 158 Inhibitive submaster 0 000020020 00 eee 158 Effect submaster manri ures ie ote nd Oe we ed 158 CHANGING aypa avra nh na ee CE tar o EAE 159 SUbMaster Pages curs ee Se de tek ones cee se een ais 160 Playback Submaster List 00 llle 161 Submaster cOlors caida he hae Ee ee es 161 Submaster bump buttons 0 00002 eee 162 Bump button status vss coc pex tau Rad oe Few a 16
103. 33 34 Setting the clock The console clock is called a real time clock because it is set with respect to the true time for your location not a relative time such as would exist for a time code signal The console s real time clock also functions as an astronomical clock which means that you can set it for the latitude longitude and time zone at your location and thereby control real time programs with respect to sunrise or sunset Astronomical data for many cities in the world is given in Appendix F Time and location page 369 1 Clock functions display Before running real time programs you must set the clock The six options available to set the clock are shown in the Clock Functions display Go to the Clock Functions display as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 1 4 Enter Selects Clock Functions menu Menu titude Longi tude Time Zone Sunrise 06 00 AM Sunset 06 00 PM Set the clock functions using one or more of the procedures below 13 See Setting the clock page 34 to set the Real Time Clock Chapter 3 System settings Daylight Savings Time Keystrokes 1 Press 1 Enter 2 Press 1 Enter Action Prompt reads Select Daylight Savings Time 1 daylight time 0 standard time Enables Daylight Savings Time a The clock does not automatically adjust for changes between daylight and standard times These must be re set manually Set ti
104. 7 Press Enter Leaves fade rate at normal and moves the highlight to the Macro field Prompt reads Select Macro 8 Press 5 Enter Selects macro 5 to run when event plays Prompt reads Enter Label 9 Press Enter Skips the label Prompt reads Select event number 10 Press 2 Enter Enterthe Selects event 2 Repeat steps above number of an event for this and subsequent events followed by Enter a Zero stops the fade 50 runs the fade at half its recorded rate If no rate is entered the cue runs at its recorded rate b Entering 4 sets the submaster ON entering sets the submaster OFF c You can select this field and press Label on the keyboard to add a label later if you wish Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 299 300 Creating a program using Learn Mode Learn Mode allows you to record macro keys submaster bump buttons and fader Go keys into time code events as you go along Because you are making real time decisions about the timing of events you can record a program live in Learn mode without specifying code times When you leave Learn Mode press the Learn Mode softkey a second time the program is recorded with sorted event times Follow these steps to record a time code program in Learn mode Keystrokes 1 Press S7 until S6 reads Learn Mode Press S6 Learn Mode If using the internal clock to time the show press S2 Clock Enable to start the clock Go to the
105. 8 60 61 63 65 67 69 71 62 64 66 68 70 72 73 75 77 79 81 83 74 76 78 80 82 84 85 87 89 91 93 95 86 88 90 92 94 96 aa oo y aa oo oo N oo ERO oo On oo oS JO ou _ om SIN N x oM Bo IT yN On NN on on Ooo m el 00 CO n m cci 00 00 Su X 00 oo Em 00 co 00 N A i co oo oo O O oo N Chapter 4 Patching channels Chapter 5 Setting channel levels Setting channel levels is the first step in recording cues submasters and groups Setting channel levels in Stage mode brings light levels up on stage Setting channel levels in Blind mode does not affect stage lights This chapter includes the following sections e Channel modes e Channel attributes e Selecting channels e Setting channel levels e Channel check e About Channel Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 55 Channel modes The color and behavior of channels depends upon their modes Selected channels Selected channels are channels over which you have immediate control with the keypad or level wheel Their channel numbers are displayed in yellow and their levels displayed in red You can select channels in all display modes Press Rel once to release selected channels Captured channels Captured channels have levels set in the Stage or Fader displays by any Source except faded cues or submasters an
106. 8 in Step 4 instead of Enter The console records the current dimmer s label and brings up the previous or next dimmer to be labeled Chapter 4 Patching channels Dimmer profiles A dimmer profile is a variable level sent to a dimmer during a fade that is related in some way to the percentage of fade completion By varying the dimmer profile you can compensate for nonlinear characteristics or other time dependent variations in lighting instruments as well as warm filaments more slowly to increase lamp life Dimmer profiles are not available for 16 bit channels only for 8 bit channels A dimmer may have both a proportional level assigned to it as well as a dimmer profile In the control sequence for a particular channel the channel s level is first modified by the dimmer scaling if different from 10096 Then the resulting dimmer level is modified during the channel s fade by the dimmer profile if different from a linear profile to yield the dimmer s final output The console has 33 dimmer profiles of which 32 are editable Profile O the default profile is a linear profile and is not editable Profiles 1 through 9 have preset nonlinear profiles and are all editable Profiles 10 through 32 default to linear profiles and are all editable Pre defined profiles 0 Linear not editable 1 IES square 2 Slow bottom 3 Fast bottom 4 Slow top 5 Fast top 6 Full at 196 7 Preheat at 596 8 Preheat at 1096 9 Hot p
107. AO rsen RR DECR RN ERR xd 185 FOCUS PONELIS za ark abated ie a eet tere tol aoe a 185 Labeling a focus point 02020000 eee eee 186 Deleting a focus point 020200 e eee eee 186 Working in spreadsheets 0 0 eee 187 Cue spreadsheet lille ee 187 Submaster spreadsheet 00 0000 0c eee eee 190 Group spreddsheet 2 22 ses eels Seed eee ee S 192 FOCUS POInt spreadsheet sce a m va qn y ole ee 194 Contents Chapter 15 A O RD DRAN 197 Using the Park display liliis 198 Parking Cinimers iuc ise ta iorum DEG E hie ee 198 Unparking dimmers llle 199 Unparking one dimmer llli sen 199 Unparking all dimmers eee 199 Parking channels suite ete meds obe t p e ess 200 Using the keyboard sse ai ERRORES x 200 Parking at a focus point liliis 200 Unparking channels o 201 Unparking one channel 00000200 0 eee 201 Unparking all channels 0 0 0 0 0 000 eee 201 Parking recorded channels 0 0 202 Unparking recorded channels 0 00000 uee 202 Parking fixtures d wee M LX eR tiene CSS atin OD E 203 After setting attribute levels from the keypad 203 After setting attribute levels at a focus point 203 WIA PARFKIMG Fixtures a rt oss sut estie fees rm da do a dies ie e 204 Chapter 16 ENGIN cafes e fee a sete wave nus Ld oM Urat DP 205 Blirid Effects display ey mulie ER Re ER n 206
108. Blind display 2 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number 3 Press Typel Prompt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect 4 Press 1 2 or S to select New type is entered in submaster type status bar Type changes do not take effect while the submaster is active An active submaster s bump button LED blinks after you change its type To deactivate it move its slider to zero if the green LED blinks or to 10 if the red LED blinks See Submaster LEDs page 163 for more information about the LED Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 159 Submaster pages Expression 3 has ten pages of submasters A page is a block of console memory that contains one set of 24 recorded submasters corresponding to the 24 submaster sliders The ten pages of memory increases the number of possible submasters to 240 The console displays the message Sub page 1 2 3 in the upper right corner of the Playback display to indicate the current submaster page To switch from one page to the other press Pagel enter the desired page number and press Enter When you switch submaster pages any submasters on stage remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Until the new submaster loads submaster LEDs flash slowly indicating that the submaster on stage is from the previously loaded page If flashing red the new submaster is inhibitive if green the new submaster is pile on or
109. Diskette Functions menu Enter 3 Press 4 Format Disk Enter 4 Press Enter Formats the diskette Prompt appears Formatting disk Do not remove from drive 7 See The oversized show page 88 28 See Naming the show page 37 for information about naming a show 252 Chapter 20 Diskette functions Contents of the showfile When you write to diskette everything that you programmed into your show and everything that you set in the console to make that show happen are stored in a single showfile Show and configuration information however may be read separately from the showfile The System Configuration contents of the showfile are defined as all those things you set in the console that commonly remain the same for all shows Show contents of the showfile contain certain other settings such as changes in defaults that are likely to be set for a specific show and all those programmed elements of the show that directly control the lights including the patching cues and dimmer settings A complete accounting of showfile contents broken down into Show and System Configuration components is given in Appendix D Showfile page 359 Writing to diskette Write a showfile to diskette with the following procedure 2 Keystrokes Action 1 Inserta formatted diskette in disk drive 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects Diskette Functions menu Enter 4 Press 1 Write All to
110. Enter Enter Before you do that however consider saving the contents of memory as a show using the procedures given in Chapter 20 Diskette functions page 257 Chapter seven contains the following sections e Cue types e Record functions e Creating cues e Viewing cues e Working with cues in Stage mode e Recording a cue in Stage e Working with cues in Blind mode e Recording a cue in Blind e Recording a cue with a single fade time e Recording a cue with split fade times e Recording a cue with a wait time e Recording cues with Link and Follow e Recording a cue using Solo e Labeling cues e Modifying a recorded cue live e Modifying cue attributes e Using Update to modify a cue e Deleting cues e Copying cues e Inserting cues 10 f you need more than 600 cues in your show see The oversized show page 88 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 85 Cue types Type displays all but one of the fade type options described below The subroutine option is discussed under Chapter 17 Subroutines page 227 To select a cue fade type in Stage Blind or Fader modes press Type and enter the type number given in the prompt If you change a cue s fade type you must re record the cue For example Cue 2 Typel 2 Record Enter records cue 2 with an allfade Cues default to crossfade when you do not enter a fade type Crossfade In a crossfade cue channel levels that increase fade to their new level in the assign
111. Enter Selects Real Time Programs display 3 Press S1 Select Prompt reads Program 1 Enter Enter time 12 hour clock Press to enter AM or PM 4 Press 8I OIIO Enter Enters time to run macro Prompt reads Enter days of week 1 Mon 2 Tue 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 7 Sun or press Days Date softkey again for date 5 Press 1 And 3 Thru 5 Enters days to run macro Enter P Prompt reads Enter macro number 6 Press 5 Enter Creates real time program 1 Prompt reads Type program label F6 clear to end F7 z previous program label F8 next program label 7 Entera label then press Labels the real time program Enter a To reference sunrise or sunset rather than absolute time substitute steps A C given under Referencing sunrise or sunset page 291 for step 4 here Then continue in this procedure b To reference a date rather than days substitute steps A D given under Referencing a date page 291 for step 5 here Then continue in this procedure 290 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Referencing sunrise or sunset To reference sunrise or sunset rather than absolute time substitute the partial procedure below as explained under Days and absolute times page 290 This example sets the time to 10 seconds before sunrise Keystrokes Action A Press S3 Astro Clock Prompt reads Select astronomical time of day 0 none 1 before sunrise 2 after sunrise 3 before sunset 4
112. Enter to confirm Sets patch to default one to your selection of one to one patch one default patch or press Clear to cancel the operation Chapter 4 Patching channels Creating a custom patch The console s custom patching capability allows you to create virtually any dimmer to channel configuration you like Groups of dimmers may be assigned to single channels but only one channel may be patched to a dimmer Hint If you use the same patch for several shows create the patch and record it on a disk before you record any cues Label the disk Standard patch When you start your next show read the Standard patch show into the console then begin writing cues to avoid reentering the patch Follow these steps to patch dimmers to control channels Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Patch Press Dim If the LED in the Dim key is lit you may omit this step Use the keypad to enter the numbers of the dimmers you want to patch Use And Thru or Except for multiple selections Press Enter or Channel Enter the channel number to which you want to patch the selected dimmers and press Enter Repeat steps 2 through 4 to patch additional dimmers Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press ENTER to assign to a channel or press AT to assign a proportion or press PROFILE to assign a profile Prompt reads To assign dimmers
113. Enters a wait time of six seconds Corner reads UpWait 6 Or DnWait 6 Records cue 5 with wait time of six seconds 93 94 Recording cues with Link and Follow Link When you record a cue it automatically becomes part of the Cue List The Cue List is a list of all cues organized in numeric sequence Normally when you press Go to execute cues the console plays them back in the sequence in which they appear in the Cue List Link allows you to modify the sequence in which cues play back Follow allows you to play back multiple cues automatically Link allows you to play back cues out of sequence by linking them together If you link cue 10 to cue 1 then cue 10 follows cue 1 Follow these steps to record a linked cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel or Bling Selects display mode Cue 1 Selects cue 1 3 Press Link Prompt reads To link to cue select cue number To link to macro press ENTER MACRO 4 Press 1 0 Enter Links cue 10 to cue 1 After you play cue 1 press Go to playback cue 10 a Press Clear in this step to remove an existing link 13 You can also link macros to cues For more information see Linking a macro to a cue page 97 Chapter 7 Cues Follow Follow allows you to play a series of cues automatically The Follow time indicates how long the console waits after the cue starts before the next cue runs Follow plays back the next cue on the Cue List u
114. Expression 3 Lighting control system Version 3 1 Copyright Electronic Theatre Controls Inc All Rights reserved Product information and specifications subject to change Part Number 4131M1007 Rev A Released December 2000 Contents Chapter 1 Introduction sse 1 USING this MAN UAl ei remate epe tt e RR e es 2 Setting up the console ll eee 2 New US IS Lib nnd he Be eie Oe ee VES Hep da 2 Keyboard Tel pic tat oerte baa vent od ico o rite M os 2 EXE CONVENTIONS ois erus ups uut bed Due e oe ee CA I ES 2 Navigation and visual feedback 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee 3 Output level conventions 0 0 0 ee eee 4 HTP Channels 22255915 ee hie Pee o o 4 ETP Channels anA heii A cas tes as adel e ee nr 4 Enabling ISP oui Eom aa ro Ceo nb ad 5 Working with LTP channels 00 00000 ee auee 5 Moving light concepts and terms anaua anaana 7 EDU Sa peo ate bal a aA aue ped ede ee 7 Fixture attriDUtes sss e dele cts Sonia RR 7 Categollescs des ton bk et wee sb e d ete x eia 7 Personal Saa eine doth OE e dC M eO NE SOR S eg 7 The Only command o 8 When working with fixtures 0 000002 eser 8 Mihiendpadatiii 15215555 Do th eek Corea oe al cun A ao 8 When recalling channels sanremo iroa nine e eee ee eee 8 Electronic backup maintenance 0 2 0 0 cc eee 9 Troubleshooting aen eee metr Rae a ok ees a ew he 9 Help from ETC Technical Services 00 00002 eee 10 Chapter 2 Monitor d
115. Features x sedans IO RIDE XII ROC STRIP V a aged 206 Effects IN Sage 6 0 scc seas do d cele uie dc d be d 207 Creating an effect in Blind llle 208 Notes on working with steps in Blind 209 Adding channels directly 000002000005 209 Adding groups or focus points 000 210 Adding grouped channels 000000 211 Creating an effect in Stage nsaan ees 212 Notes on working with steps in Stage 212 Adding channels directly o o o o oooocoooooooo 212 Adding groups or focus points 0 0 00 c eae 213 Adding grouped channels ess assert nostris nirs urgani 214 Modifying the effect eA E E EE rA ERE 215 Using Update yie io anta klaci ho maah eoe a db erede s 215 Editing channel levels o ooooooo o ooooooooo o 216 Adding channels y tirada e a ae A 216 Deleting channels o 217 Inserting steps 0 2 0 2 ee 218 Deleting steps 0 2 02 0c ee 219 Modifying effect attributes o oooooooooocooooooo 220 Modifying step timing and levelS o o o o o o o ooo 221 Etf ctTade times eu dte outset ope Rete ie ne ao AOR s 222 Changing upfade dwell and downfade 223 Changing uptade oniy od ips n dex Bens E s 223 Changing downfade only liliis 223 Changing dwell only 0 0 0 0 0 cee eee 224 Resetting hold dwell time 0 0 0 0 eee 224 Setting a random effect rate
116. IP 3 Console mode on start up OPEN OPEN Network off CLOSED CLOSED Network on Single console CLOSED OPEN Network on FTB Console A OPEN CLOSED Network on FTB Console B 3 Set DIP switch 4 for SMPTE DIP 4 SMPTE status OPEN Disabled CLOSED Enabled 4 Set DIP switches 5 through 8 to OPEN Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 349 Remote Interface devices Until the appearance of ETC s ETCNet2 devices the only way you could perform remote network operations was with ETC s Remote Interface Unit RIU and the Remote Video Interface RVI ETC continues to support the RIU and RVI devices but no longer sells them This section covers the installation of the RIU and RVI devices with your system For information about installing ETCNet2 devices including the ETCNet2 DMX Node and ETCNet2 Video Node consult the separate Installation Guides for those products Install a Remote Interface Unit or Remote Video Interface as follows 1 Plug the network connector into the appropriate back panel connector Connections are available for ThinNet or Twisted Pair operation 2 Plug the power cable into a grounded power outlet Set DIP switches and or installing jumpers as appropriate 4 Install Remote Unit software see Upgrading remote interface devices page 346 for a discussion and procedure w Installing jumpers A jumper is a small plastic connector used to join a pair of pins sticking out of a printed circuit board The jumper is insta
117. IVIOVIETG a link Sic e de ded nta aote montrer Neto Des od toch edes 249 Merging two linkS sss aem ye Bee 249 Deletingva ls idas Loe sed DS hae es 250 USD a NKE nece t mt e dne e de S m oe t aed idu es 250 Chapter 20 Diskette functions cc 251 Diskette Management 252 Formatting diskettes reite dsan tenani raya eee 252 Contents of the showfile llle 253 Writing to diskette eo bEELEADCRRARSEIDUEBPS MESE 253 Reading from diskette 0 0 eee 254 Read show and configuration 0020005 254 Read show components only o 255 Read system configuration components only 255 Chapter 21 PANON ERR ace Bea TA 257 Printer OPTIONS meere e ua ioc etur bere om p agus 258 Printing procedure ooo 258 Printouts available n p a a 259 MOVING lights Jas a O uer T e soo iran 259 Contents Chapter 22 Clear functions sss 261 Clear TURCUOAS t4 oce oL ad at ds dd aero da LM Aera 262 Clear and reset procedure y reseni serere u TIDE a leen 262 Clear and reset options l l 263 Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring 265 ETGLIBKTUFRCEIOPS st m pehes pai dedu aos 266 Enabling ETCH kes s uro a eins deed See Se 266 Error messages 3 we diem eae wee Rode a EE 267 How to enable disable ETCLink error messages 268 E RCIA displays scu dA htc nd he elt tae dera os toten eo Ma 269 Dimming system status sai sirr ordni tissai e eee 269 Dimmer rack status ac tt one beo a boe md 270 DIMMER status ou
118. Interface provides ports for remote accessories It supports two monitors an alphanumeric keyboard and an RFU and provides a serial port for a digitizer The illustrations below show the RVI s front and back panels and indicate the connector used by each accessory ETCNet Remote Video Interface back panel Switched Outlets AC Input 120 VAC 50 60 Hz 120 VAC 50 60 Hz B 25A SB CRT Displays CRT Ey ETCNet E Em NU m LLL Fm Cigitizer Serial c 53 Keyboard ETCNet remote video interface ie 0000000 Fuses The RVI contains a 6 25 Amp power fuse in a recessed tray at the right side of the rear panel Inspect and replace this fuse as explained under AC Input fuses page 327 The RVI unit also contains a 1 5 Amp fuse to protect the RFU circuit This fuse is contained in a pop out receptacle located near the middle of the rear panel Inspect and replace this fuse as explained under RFU Remote I O fuse page 327 352 Appendix B References Remote Video Interface settings The RVI Processor Board is the lower circuit board in the Remote Video Interface RVI It contains one 8 switch DIP Under normal conditions these switches will never need to be changed RVI video board 12345678 00000000 OPEN Main DIP switches 096 je1ui RVI processor board If the settings get changed and you need to restore them find the switches at location S4 and adjust the settings as
119. Label xture Tup I Beom 16 Device Fan First use Humber Hone Dimmers 4 e Label e Fixture Type e Link e Device Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Channel 4 Lost used Humber of mox Forked n Inhibited n Name if any assigned to the channel in the Channel Attributes display Only for channels patched to a fixture Number and name if any assigned to the channel in Fixture Patch Only for channels patched to a fixture Name of the personality used for this fixture Link number if any If channel is patched to a fixture Device shows the assigned fixture attribute If channel is on a Link List Device shows which wheel is assigned 65 e Attributes Channel characteristics such as Ind The channel is independent 16b Hi The channel controls the high bits portion of 16 bit data 16b Lo The channel controls the low bits portion of 16 bit data Flip The channel s output has been reversed 6 P 35 4 4 4 4 LTP The channel s convention is LT e Source Identifies how the channel is being controlled e g cue number background cue number captured fader pair submaster number e First used The first cue in which this channel appears e Last used The highest numbered cue in which this channel appears e Number of cues The total number of cues in which this channel appears e Number of moves The total number of cues in which this channel moves
120. MP To cancel press CLEAR Selects channels to update Prompt reads Select channel number s To cancel press CLEAR Press 0 to reselect all non zero channels Updates submaster 6 on submaster page 3 Use your mouse or equivalent pointing device if available 173 Live control of a submaster s rate In Stage mode selecting a submaster and pressing S5 Rate allows the timing of the submaster to be controlled by the rate wheel or by keyboard entry Follow these steps to change the rate of an active submaster in Stage This procedure also works if the submaster is not active In either case the new rate is automatically recorded in the submaster Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Live display 2 Press Sub 5 Selects submaster 5 3 Press S7 More Softkeys until Rate appears at S5 4 Press S5 Rate Activates rate control Prompt reads Select submaster rate and press ENTER or use wheel or trackpad to alter rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 5 Move the rate wheel Sets and records fade rate for submaster 5 If submaster is running fade proceeds at new rate 6 Press Enter Accepts the new rate 4 When the submaster rate is controlled dynamically by the rate wheel rate feedback is generated in the Playback display where the rate is displayed and the submaster number turns blue in the Submaster List See Playback Submaster List page 161 for more information Controlling subm
121. NI o c A O DO Setup Print 5 and Options 6 Return gt Setup Print Functions Return gt Setup Options Return gt System Settings ESP Stop Printer Disable MIDI 9 600 Baud Pause Printer ESP Baud Rate gt ESP 14 400 Baud 19 200 Baud 28 800 Baud 38 400 Baud 57 600 Baud 115 200 Baud 00 NI O c A O NO Return gt Setup Return gt Setup Setup Designer s Editing 7 Designer s Editing DE2 Select Region On Sub Bump Insert Replace Off Sub Bump Delete Entry Copy Region Clear Region More Softkeys gt DE 2 More Softkeys DE 0 NI o A A O N Return gt Setup Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Return gt Options 365 366 Setup Macro Editing 8 Macro Editing Macro 2 Select Macro On Sub Bump Insert Replace Off Sub Bump Delete Entry Copy Macro Delete Macro Macro Enter More Softkeys Macro 2 More Softkeys Macro oj NI T A O N Return gt Setup Setup ETC Link Functions 9 ETC Link Functions System Status 1 Rack Status 2 Enable Disable ETCLink Dimmer Double Normal Fire Mode A Play Backup B Record Backup System Status Dimmer Status Dimmer Status Unset Dimmer Rack Status Select Rack Set Dimmer Setup ETC Link Functions 9
122. On Sub Prompt reads Bump Enter submaster number 4 Press 3 Enter Macro line reads OnBump3 Press Macro Wait Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 0 6 Enter 5 and press Enter Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 7 Press S2 Off Sub Bump Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 OffBump Prompt reads Enter submaster number 8 Press 3 Enter Macro line reads OnBump3 Mwait 5 OffBump3 9 Press Enter Macro Records macro 4 leaves editing mode 10 Press Stage M4 Macro runs Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 239 Playing macros As a macro runs the LED in the macro s key flashes Only one macro may run at a time To run macros 1 through 5 press the appropriate macro key For example to run macro 1 press M1 To play a macro recorded in M1 M5 follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Press M Macro runs prompt shows sequence of activity as if you were entering the keystrokes To run any other macro press M the number of the macro and Enter For example to run macro 10 press M 1 0 Enter To play a macro without its own key follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press M and enter the Prompt reads Select macro number macro number then press ENTER 2 Press Enter Macro runs prompt shows sequence of activity as if you were entering the keystrokes Canceling a macro To cancel a running macro press M Powerup macro
123. Personality Setup The console comes with default personalities already included in its system software code These may not be sufficient for your purposes however and you may need to add additional ones Work directly with personalities here 2 Fixture Patch Once you have the personalities in the console that you need begin the task of patching fixtures with those personalities In addition to patching you can customize here by labeling and modifying the standard patching 3 Attribute Setup Go to this display to customize the assignment of fixture attributes to categories Later during the creation of your show this categorization will help you grab the moving light attributes you want by color position or other traits to set levels create cues etc The attributes used in your show are highlighted in the Attribute Setup display 4 Encoder Setup This display allows you to customize the assignment of encoders wheels and an optional mouse to fixture attributes for greater level setting convenience The console helps you here too by highlighting those fixture attributes you are using so you can easily put them where you want them Encoders are available only on Expression 3 consoles or earlier model consoles equipped with the ML Module Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Personality Setup You may find that the default personalities embedded in console software are sufficient for your needs If not you may
124. Records group 2 Chapter 11 Groups Recording a group using Solo You can use Solo to selectively record into a group in the same manner as using Solo to selectively record into a cue There are two ways to select channels with Solo while clearing other independent channels such as other lights and while clearing ALL other channels including non independent ones See Recording a cue using Solo page 98 for the procedures to use substituting the Group key where those procedures specify the Cue key Working with groups in Blind There are two modes of operation in Blind for changing groups Group mode and Group Editing mode In Group mode the console brings up the channels from a group of your choice and allows you to use them to modify cues submasters and other groups In Group Editing mode the console allows you to create or edit the group itself Group mode You enter Group mode in Blind by specifying a level after identifying the group The level is applied proportionally to all channels in the group Follow the procedure below to work in Group mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group 1 Selects group 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER 3 Press At 7 5 Sets the channels to 75 percent of their recorded levels Prompt reads Group mode P
125. SE 15 Flip About Chamnel 65 Explained 200 57 Fixture patch iiis peus 73 S MENU TD Oe US 58 Focus point AE A aE TIA 263 DTM iris dr a S 147 Delete A ere de a ed 155 DIMDPXCIEL itte eee 294 Maximum number 147 PRINTS ea Barkha bet petes 259 Recording with solo 149 Setting linked levels 156 Show hide link 150 Spreadsheet 194 Update kJ xao se ap a 151 152 Use to park sese 200 203 Use to set levels 156 View on stage 150 Follow time subroutine 229 Follow cue playback 95 Format diskette 252 Frame TAO a 297 ELIT A 62 Full Tracking Backup FTB Dual console system 321 Error messages 355 ETENE cc as ndo te das 330 Explained ca asii 321 Installation 330 LEDS ns ee s 321 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 With an ER Ge cr es 330 G Grandmaster ss Usd ke estne 32 Group BIR Pm 137 CIEAI ts Fallo hayra Lee Aces d Ase 263 COPpyrto SUD ito 177 Delete iaa rd ad aes 143 Displaying 139 150 Group Editing mode 137 138 Group mode 137 e A 142 320 PA ete Soa POR me 184 Load to Subi s s sou rAd hs Rd 176 Modify cue orsub 145 Park soto acto od dg Soe 202 PEID 26 sis o tetti ee t OR UR 259 Specifications 374 Spreadsheet 192
126. Screen clears and Record window Disk Enter appears 5 Press Enter or press Message in record window appears Clear to cancel the and remains until show is recorded operation To disk in progress a System configuration information was not saved on diskette for shows recorded prior to version 3 03 software 30 When writing any fades executing at that time are interrupted These fades resume when writing to diskette is complete Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 253 Reading from diskette You can read either the show or the system configuration contents of a showfile or you can read both together See Appendix D Showfile page 359 for a breakdown of what components are stored in each CAUTION The information you read from diskette takes the place of whatever you had before the read in your console s memory If you want to keep the show and configuration settings currently in memory write them to diskette before the read You may read from diskette in the middle of a performance but you should wait until no fades are taking place Any fades in progress are stopped during the read and resume when the read is complete Fader and submaster outputs are maintained as the new show loads Read show and configuration Follow the procedure below to read both the show and the system configuration components at once Keystrokes Action 1 Insert diskette in disk drive 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Press
127. Stage display If using an external clock start it now You must have time code input enabled as explained under External time code clock page 309 Select the cues submasters and macros you want to record as time code events At the exact moment in the program that you want an event to begin press Go for the fader in which you want the time code event to run the cue press the submaster s bump button or start the macro Press Setup 1 3 Enter S6 Learn Mode Actions TimeCd Learn flashes in red in the upper left corner of the screen The internal clock in the upper right corner of the display starts to run Each button press is recorded as an event in your time code program Returns to Time Code Events display and deactivates Learn mode edit the events as necessary a After starting the clock you may press Record to enter a blank event You can force an immediate sorting the events in the Time Code Events Display Press S8 Sort to sort the events The sort key is in the third tier of softkeys in this display so if you don t see it press S7 More Softkeys until it appears at S8 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Sorting recording events Events are recorded when sorting is done Sorting is done when you leave the Time Code Events display or you end the time code Learn Mode You can also force sorting without leaving the Time Code Events display A reason for sorting before leavi
128. Unsetz s cote ti 276 SMPTE Edit 22 e ositos 299 Dimmer Double Specifications 372 Setdimmers omiso exa iu 53 Stage us oae e RUN eda s 14 Set DMX512 port 333 Time Code Events 298 System Status display 269 Tracksheet 0000 16 Dimmer profiles DMX In Assign to dimmer 46 Enable disable 294 Programming 47 48 Fader display 14 Reset defaults 48 Focus pointO 295 296 DIP switch DMX512 ADO Sat Ds 331 About Dimmer 51 52 Designer s Worksheet 340 Connecting o ooo o o ooo o o 332 Earlier consoles 349 Set portstalt o o o 333 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 385 386 Set signal speed 334 Dwell time Changing for submaster 165 AA 224 Submaster Hold Manual 166 E Edit Clear submasterS 177 CODY CUCS tar 105 Copy submaster 176 177 Cu IS ons se a EA 180 Delete 6ue uuo REL 104 Delete part from multipart 121 EVEATS s car om Ae ts one 299 Load submaster 176 Macia o ra 241 Range of submasters 182 Effect Create in Blind 208 Create in Stage 212 Cue DO v vado er vp een s 86 Fade timeS 00 00 222 Insert StepS 0 000005 218 LTP channels IN 6 Specifications 374 Subrmmaster
129. You may set the upfade downfade and wait times for each part of a multipart cue Create a cue as a multipart cue or record it first as a standard one part cue and then split it later into parts Each part of a multipart cue may consist of any number of channels but a channel may only be included in one part of a multipart cue If you record a channel in a part and that channel is already included in another part the channel will be placed in the new part and be removed from the older part automatically Wait times in multipart cues allow you to program fades that do not start immediately when you play the multipart cue When you press Go to start a multipart cue some parts may start immediately and others may start up to 99 59 minutes later depending on the assigned wait time The total duration of a multipart cue is equal to the combined wait and fade times of the longest part When you display a multipart cue channel levels that are higher than they were in the previous cue are displayed in blue channel levels that are lower than they were in the previous cue are displayed in green and channel levels that are unchanged from the levels in the previous cue are displayed in purple When a part is selected channel colors remain the same in that part but channels in other parts are grayed Multipart cues can be recorded in either Stage or Blind mode They are stored like normal cues in the console s memory and on disk This chapter inc
130. ads ress Enter To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter Deletes part 1 from cue 4 a If the part to be deleted has tracking channels and you want those tracking channels removed from subsequent cues press Track before Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Adding deleting and modifying channels Follow these steps to edit channels in a multipart cue Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Enter the cue number 3 Press Part then press or until the desired part is displayed 4 Press Channel and select the desired channels 5 Setchannel levels Press At Clear to delete the selected channels 6 Press Record Part 2 Enter Using Update Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads Select part number Prompt reads Select channel numbers If the channels are new this adds them to the part at the level indicated If already in the part this modifies their level Records the changes into part 2 of the cue With Update you can do live editing of cue parts in Stage and Fader and see the results immediately on stage Use the procedure below to add channels and set levels assuming you previously created multipart cue 1 Keystrokes 1 Press Stage Press S8 Fixture 4 3 Setintensity pan and tilt levels 4 Press S2 Update 5 Press Cue 1 6 Press Part 2 E
131. age 339 10 Set DIP switches as explained below Designer s Worksheet DIP switch settings The Kurta IS ONE Designer s Worksheet checks DIP switch settings when the unit is turned on Three sets of DIP switches are located on the back panel of the digitizer These DIP switches need to be set as shown below for the digitizer to function properly Switches are either Up On or Down Off You must restart the unit for new DIP switch settings to take effect 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set Down Down Down Down Ue Up Up UP seca Down Up Down Up Down Dewn Up Ub Additional pads of Designer s Worksheet templates are available from your dealer or ETC These settings are different from those used with older Expression consoles Appendix A Installation Installing Remote Focus Unit The Remote Focus Unit RFU allows you to set channel levels check dimmers or run cues from remote locations To install the RFU follow these steps 1 2 3 Verify that RFU power switch is turned Off Unit is off when switch is in the position toward the bottom edge of the RFU Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the console or Remote Interface labeled RFU Turn RFU power switch to On RFU console connector XLR 6 pin female RFU pinout 1 oar WN Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Data to RFU Data Data from RFU Data Common AC ground 12 Vdc fused 2 amp 341 Ins
132. aland QB AST is Deeds 41 71 a Appendix F Time and location Appendix G Specifications Electrical Voltage input 90 250 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 6 3 amps Maximum monitor load two at 2 0 amps each Built in interfaces 1 536 DMX512 outputs Parallel printer RS 232C serial port Remote Focus Unit Supports CE dimming systems Remote Macro control Alphanumeric keyboard Time code control either MIDI or SMPTE DMX512 Input ETCLink System capacity 600 cues per show 400 800 or 1200 control channels Proportional patching of up to 1 536 DMX512 dimmers Eight part multipart cues Thirty three dimmer profiles all but one of which are editable 500 groups 100 focus points including focus point O 2 000 macros regions 3 000 SMPTE events 24 overlapping submasters Ten pages of submaster memory Two timed manual fader pairs Fader functions Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Fade times programmable from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Manual override of upfade and or downfade Rate override Split time fades Manual fades Background fades with LTP channels User selectable default fade times Hold Back functions 371 Playback controls e Two timed manual fader pairs e Two Go buttons e Two Hold buttons e Two Back buttons e Two Rate buttons e Two Clear buttons e 24 submasters e Programmable Master on 100mm potentiometer e Blackout function e Level wheel e Rate wheel e
133. also allows you to transfer your shows to other consoles work on more than one show at a time and use more than 600 cues in a show by loading a second show into memory Label each diskette carefully and clearly to help you keep track of what show is on the diskette You can also use any of the Read options to find out the name of the show and when it was transferred to diskette 8 Before you can use a diskette in the console you must format it on the console or on an IBM PC compatible with a high density drive Formatting instructions using the console are given in this chapter Storing diskettes e Store diskettes at a temperature between 50 and 140 degrees Fahrenheit e Keep diskettes away from magnets magnetized objects or heavy electrical equipment including large lighting equipment e Do not touch the magnetic disk inside the plastic diskette case Formatting diskettes WARNINGS Formatting a diskette erases all information recorded on the diskette Formatting stops any fade in progress When formatting is complete the fade jumps to the point it would have reached if it hadn t been interrupted Before you can use a diskette in the console you must format it on either the console or an IBM compatible personal computer To format a diskette with the console insert a diskette into the console s disk drive and follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 3 Disk Functions Selects
134. an effect When you move the slider to its home position the new submaster is loaded and the LED stops flashing This prevents the stage from going black or changing levels when you switch pages Fast flashes designate a submaster with a dwell time of Hold See Submaster LEDs page 163 for more information about LEDs Note When you read a new show into the console from a disk the console loads the same page number that was loaded from the previous show Any submasters on stage when you read a new show into the console remain on stage until you move their sliders to the home position Until the new submaster loads submaster LEDs flash indicating that the submaster on stage is from the previously loaded show If flashing red the new submaster is inhibitive if green the new submaster is pile on or an effect When you move the slider to its home position the new submaster is loaded and the LED stops flashing 160 Chapter 13 Submasters Playback Submaster List The Playback Submaster List display is part of the normal playback monitor display shown below The Submaster List lies at the right in this display Listed for each submaster are its label if assigned whether the submaster is active or running its type its rate and its percentage of completion Time Wait Link Fo Submaster colors The colors used in the Submaster List provide information about the submasters Gray issues A gray submaster number identifies an unreco
135. an error is displayed e Racks on line displays the number of racks presently on line throughout the ETCLink network e Racks in configuration displays the total number of racks in the System Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 269 Dimmer rack status The Rack Status display provides information about specified dimmer racks including rack type starting address port information voltage frequency and ambient temperature Press Setup 9 Enter 2 Enter to access the Rack Status display Press S6 Select Rack Enter to select a specific rack to select the next rack or to view the previous rack Rock 1 Rack Tupe Sensor SR6 with feedback Start Address 1 Port A Type Status M Port B Type Status Ok Rack Voltage Line A 122 VAC Line B 123 VAC Line C 121 VAC Rack Frequency 60 Hz Ambient Temperature 72 F 4 22 C e Rack type displays the type of Sensor rack this rack is Possible rack types include SR6 SR12 SR24 SR36 SR48 SP6 SP12 SP24 SP48 and may be followed by AF if the rack is equipped with Sensor s Advanced Features option e Start address displays the lowest dimmer number in the rack e Port A B type indicates whether the port is normal or Dimmer Doubled indicates a normal port e Status indicates the present status of the port e Rack voltage displays the input voltage for each of the three phases A B and C Single phase racks only display values for A and C e Rack freq
136. an it was in the previous cue Purple Channel output level is the same as it was in the previous cue tracking Blue In Tracksheet and Blind only channel output level is higher than it was in the previous cue Changing pages Channels are displayed on several pages in the Stage Blind Fader and Tracksheet displays Use S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to switch from page to page Also pressing e takes you to the first page pressing T takes you to the previous page last page if currently on the first page pressing J takes you to the next page and pressing gt takes you to the final page Only High channels for 16 bit data types 12 Chapter 2 Monitor displays Display features Five of the console displays Stage Blind Tracksheet Park and Patch share many features such as a channel display area command line and softkeys This chapter s illustrations of these displays are all labeled with these common features and the explanations are given directly below If some common features differ slightly for a particular illustration such as the profile assignment in Patch that information and other unique information for the display is given with the illustration Display name Identities the display shown and the current time Keypad corner Indicates how the console will interpret the next number entered from the keypad For example when the Keypad corn
137. and 2 Chapter 7 Cues Chapter 8 Track Track record function Track record is a way of recording new cues or modifying existing ones when you want certain channels or channel levels to continue unchanged in playback from cue to cue Levels recorded into a tracked cue continue unchanged in subsequent cues until a new level is encountered Track record gives you the power to modify a range of cues automatically by changing just the first in the sequence You can also use track record for new cue recording to pull levels from the previous cue into the new cue Tracksheet mode Tracksheet displays one channel s level settings for all cues in which it appears From it you can follow the track of that channel quickly You can then select a cue or a group of cues from the Tracksheet and modify that channel s level throughout Tracksheet provides one means for tracking channels through allfade cues 21 WARNING This procedure although automatic can be time consuming Attempting it while running a show could have serious consequences Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 107 108 Track record When you record a series of cues you typically record the first cue then build the second cue from the first Some of the channels change but many remain the same The third cue is built from the second and so on This procedure results in many channels being set to a level in one cue and staying at that level for several cues A channel who
138. and ETC s acceptance of any order is expressly made conditional on Customer s assent to such terms and conditions Such terms and conditions will constitute the entire agreement between the parties as to any order and will supersede any prior understandings agreements representations or warranties Such terms and conditions will not be modified added to superseded or otherwise altered except by written document signed by an authorized representative of ETC notwithstanding any terms and conditions contained in the purchase order or other document of Customer ETC s 379 380 commencement of performance and or delivery shall not constitute a waiver of these terms and conditions or any acceptance of any terms and conditions contained in the Customer s order or other documents Acceptance of any product or service by the Customer will be construed as acceptance of ETC s terms and conditions Any dispute or questions of construction with respect to any order placed with ETC shall be governed by the laws of the State of Wisconsin All prices are in US Dollars FOB ETC s factory or warehouse Prices models and specifications are subject to change without notice Orders must be in writing Phone orders will be accepted from established accounts when followed by written confirmation The acceptance of any order does not imply conformance with plans and specifications unless the plans and specifications accompany the order and are ac
139. and follow settings rate and cue label This list also allows you to delete cues from your show Up to 18 cues are displayed on this Cue List at one time Screens can be paged if there are more than 18 cues in the show Press Blind S2 Cue List to display the Cue List Editing cues Edit one cue or multiple cues at a time in the Cue List with the following procedure Changes made are recorded immediately Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press S2 Cue List 3 Press 1 Thru 3 4 Press gt until the cursor reaches the attribute you wish to edit 5 Enter the new setting for 180 the attribute and press Enter a Action Selects Blind display Displays Cue List Selects cues 1 2 and 3 Prompt reads Select cue number s The prompt indicates your options or prompts you to enter a new setting Changes the cue Alternatively you may press Type Time Link Follow Wait or Label keys to enter the field you want Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Submaster List The Submaster List on the command monitor allows editing of bump button status upfade downfade and dwell times type rate and label This list also allows you to delete submasters from your show Enter the command monitor s Submaster List from softkeys in either Blind or Stage In Blind press Sub S2 Sub List In Stage press Sub S7 More Softkeys 52 Sub List Pile on 200 Double time
140. and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 2 Press 5 And 6 Enter Selects cues 5 and 6 Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press Enter Enter Deletes cues 5 and 6 188 Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Replacing channel level As a convenient editing technique you may specify a particular level to change for a channel or number of channels After entering the cue spreadsheet as explained earlier in this section replace channel level as follows Keystrokes 1 N Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press S1 Select Cue Press 5 Enter Press 5 Thru 1 0 S3 Replace Level 5 0 Press Enter Press Full Enter Actions Prompt reads Select cue s Selects cue 5 Prompt reads Select channel s Selects channels 5 through 10 at level 50 to change Prompt reads Select level to replace and press ENTER Prompt reads Select new level and press ENTER Changes all channels in the range 5 though 10 with level 50 to level full 189 Submaster spreadsheet Press Blind Sub S3 Spreadsheet to go to the submaster spreadsheet 01 02 03 04 OS FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL AAPP FL FL FL FL FL o 2 ao 50 50 50 50 Editing submasters After entering the submaster spreadsheet as explained above edit a submaster with the following procedure Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S1 Select Sub Prompt reads Select submaster
141. annel shows all channels on link lists e Flexichannel shows focus point links if applicable see focus point links to the right of the levels in the illustration below By only displaying channels used in the show you can reduce the amount of time you spend moving from page to page to find channels All other Screen elements are unchanged Cue 103 Cue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label SF MB 51 S2 S3 S4 S5 SE S S8 C d lf Previ Delet Kcd Page softkeys Fixture Working with Flexichannel active differs from working without Flexichannel in only one respect selecting channels See Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode page 61 for more information Note In Tracksheet and Patch modes channels are highlighted if they appear in the Flexichannel list they are grayed out if they do not Updating Flexichannel When channels that were used in a show are removed from the show they remain in channel displays until Flexichannel is updated Press Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel This update follows the same rules for Flexichannel that are given above You also update Flexichannel displays when you load another show from diskette or when you cycle the console s power off and on See Enable disable Flexichannel page 31 for information about enabling Flexichannel Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 15 16 Tracksheet The Tracksheet display shows you how channel levels
142. anufacturers ETC does not guarantee compatibility CAUTION Do not connect or disconnect an alphanumeric keyboard while your system is turned on Doing so may cause the keyboard to initialize improperly Follow these steps to install an alohanumeric keyboard 1 Besure the selector switch is set to the AT position if applicable 2 Insertthe keyboard cable into the connector labeled Keyboard on the console or remote interface unit Console connector DIN 5 pin female Keyboard pinout 1 Clock 2 Data 3 Reset 4 Ground 5 5 Vdc 336 Appendix A Installation Installing a printer The console supports parallel printers including most laser printers Printer functions are described in Chapter 21 Printing page 257 Follow these steps to install the printer 1 Insert the parallel printer cable into the connector labeled Parallel Printer on the back panel of the console 2 Insert the opposite end of printer cable into printer 3 Turn printer power switch on and verify that printer is on line Console connector Printer connector DB25F Centronics D36 Pinout Signal Pinout 1 STRB 1 2 DO 2 3 D1 3 4 D2 4 5 D3 5 6 D4 6 7 D5 7 8 D6 8 9 D7 9 10 ACK 10 11 Busy 11 12 13 Not used 12 18 14 to 17 not connected 13 to 15 17 19 to 36 18 to 25 Ground 16 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 337 338 Installing Designer s Worksheet Designer s Worksheet is a remote digitizer tablet available for use with ETC consoles Two diff
143. are tracking through your cues Tracked channels are channels whose levels do not change from one cue to the next Tracksheet allows you to display one channel s settings for all recorded cues At a glance you can see which cues have tracking levels for that particular channel You can also use Tracksheet to add or modify a tracked channel through recorded cues Display name Keypad corner heet Chan 4 Channel es display line Channel 4 Cues 4 103 Cue 1 100 104 display zs Prompt area Softkeys Channel display line This line displays the current channel number being tracked In Flexichannel mode used channels are highlighted Cue display The cue display lists the cues the channel tracks through and the level recorded in each Paging If more cues are recorded than fit on one screen press S5 Next Page to display the next screen of cues Chapter 2 Monitor displays Patch The Patch display allows you to create and modify your patch Patch moving lights in Fixture Patch covered under Patching one fixture or a fixture range page 73 Keypad corner Display name Patch area Prompt area Softkeys Patch area Lists channels in the first column dimmers patched to channels in the second and subsequent columns and the levels and or profiles assigned to those dimmers In Flexichannel mode channels that are used are highlighted Profile assigned Displays the profiles assigned to dimmers Level
144. arked level takes priority over the channel s parked level If the dimmer is then unparked the channel will revert to the channel s parked level When a dimmer channel or fixture is unparked the levels revert to the level the console is currently assigning to it The following options are described in this chapter e Parking and unparking dimmers e Parking and unparking channels e Parking and unparking fixtures e Parking channels and fixtures at a focus point e Parking and unparking cues submasters groups and focus points Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 197 Using the Park display Most examples in this chapter illustrate the use of the Park command in the Stage display You can also perform all the same operations in the Park display but without the need to use the Park command The parked channels and dimmers are displayed in the Park display with their levels and focus point links if any Parked Channels 2 3 00 DO DO 51 52 sE 54 S5 SE 57 58 gt Hale lee YM dg d Pag ge Parking dimmers Park a dimmer by specifying the dimmer number and level You may park multiple dimmers at once When dimmers are parked the message Parked Dimmers appears in the lower right corner of the Stage display Park one or more dimmers as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Dim Prompt reads Select dimmer number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level o
145. as follows Keystrokes 1 Press S6 Delete Group 2 Press 5 And 6 Enter 3 Press Enter Enter Replacing channel level Actions Prompt reads To delete group s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects groups 5 and 6 Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes groups 5 and 6 As aconvenient editing technique you may specify a particular level to change for a channel or number of channels After entering the group spreadsheet as explained on the previous page replace channel level as follows Keystrokes 1 Press S1 Select Group M Press 5 Enter 3 Press 5 Thru 1 0 S3 Replace Level 5 0 4 Press Enter 5 Press Full Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Actions Prompt reads Select group s Selects group 5 Prompt reads Select channel s Selects channels 5 through 10 at level 50 to change Prompt reads Select level to replace and press ENTER Prompt reads Select new level and press ENTER Changes all channels in the range 5 though 10 with level 50 to level full 193 Focus point spreadsheet Go to the focus point spreadsheet as follows Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Focus Point Enter 2 Press S3 Spreadsheet 01 O2 O3 O4 OS 06 07 Actions Selects the focus point mode of the blind display Shows the focus point spreadsheet Chan PM Channels 08 09 1
146. assigned Shows the levels assigned to dimmers Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 17 Park Press Park to bring up the Park display The Park display lists parked dimmers on the top half of the screen and parked channels on the lower half along with their parked levels Display name Keypad corner Parked Dimmers 2 Parked 1 a Dimmer E area Channels Parked 00 a 2 A Channel area Prompt area P to le pr Ha ar ae Softkeys f a MY e Pra ft Y The Park display is actually two separate displays The top section shows up to 36 dimmers and the level at which each is parked the bottom section shows up to 36 channels and the level at which each is parked If a channel is parked at a focus point as shown above the level is shown below the channel number as well as the focus point number in that order You can move through either the dimmer or the channel sections of the Park display separately Use the Previous Page and Next Page softkeys to jump one whole display back or jump one whole display forward For example if you have 50 channels parked and the first 36 are displayed press S5 Next Page to display channels 37 through 50 You can also jump through either section of the display as if you were assigning a level The display automatically scrolls to show the selection For example if you have 50 dimmers parked and want to show dimmer 48 press Dim 48 At to bring up a display that sho
147. aster fades manually When you press the bump button on a timed submaster recorded fade times play back as you recorded them The console allows you to use the slider to take manual control of submasters recorded with fade times The Submaster List shows the progress of the submaster s fade To override the fade push the submaster s slider to a higher level than the fade lower if inhibitive Once the slider passes the fade or meets it at Full on pile on submasters or zero on inhibitive submasters control of the fade transfers to the slider and you have full manual control of the submaster Move the slider to set the fade level Chapter 13 Submasters Labeling submasters The console allows you to use an alphanumeric keyboard to label submasters Submaster names can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long Follow these steps to add the name Bedroom wash to submaster 4 Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Sub 4 3 Press Label 4 Use the alphanumeric key board to enter the label Type Bedroom wash 5 Onthe console keypad press Enter 7 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Prompt reads Type submaster name Corner reads Label Bedroom wash Submaster 4 is labeled Bedroom wash See page 336 for information ab
148. atch See Proportional patching page 42 for information about how to make the dimmer output proportional to a scaling factor A linear profile is one that has an intensity level directly proportional to the fade time at all points in the fade time Thus when the fade is 5096 complete the intensity level is 5096 of the full value Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Assigning a profile to a dimmer You may assign one of the 32 alternative profiles to a dimmer If you assign none the console sets the dimmer to default profile 0 the uneditable linear profile Following is the procedure for assigning a profile to a dimmer Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Prompt reads Select dimmer numbers then press Enter to assign to a channel or press At to assign a proportion or press Profile to assign a profile 2 Enter the number of the dimmer to assign on the keypad 3 Press S7 More Prompt reads Softkeys S6 Profile Select dimmer profile number 4 Enter the number of the desired profile 5 Press Enter a Press Dim if the dimmer LED is not lit Profiles display Press Setup 1 0 Profiles Enter to go to the Profiles display Percnt O 1 30 40 SO 60 70 80 40 20 90 100 Fade Completion 4 52 E EL S5 SE S 8 io tn Return The Profiles display contains a bar chart with the total time for completion of the fade broken down into 40 equally spaced bars The height of eac
149. ated as seconds if less than 60 and as a calculated value of minutes and seconds if between 60 and 99 For example if you enter 70 the time will display as 1 10 If you enter either a 3 digit or a 4 digit number the last two digits up to 59 are interpreted as seconds For example if you enter 9930 the time will display as 99 30 3 Defaults for upfade dwell downfade dwell times are 0 Manual O These default times are true for pile on or inhibitive submasters but not for effect submasters See Effect fade times page 222 164 Chapter 13 Submasters Adding fade and dwell times You can add fade and dwell times to a submaster from Stage or Blind mode To add fade times to a submaster follow these steps in either mode Keystrokes 1 Press Sub 2 Press 5 3 Press Time 4 Use keypad to enter upfade time and press Time Use keypad to enter dwell time and press Time See next page for information about using a Hold dwell Use keypad to enter downfade time and press Enter Action Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 Prompt reads Enter upfade time Prompt reads Enter dwell time For hold or manual operation press CLEAR until desired setting appears Prompt reads Enter downfade time New fade times are recorded into submaster 5 Note Once a timed submaster is running press the bump button to
150. ay be edited individually later Keystrokes 1 Press S1 Step and enter the step number A new step must always have the next highest number beginning with step 1 2 Press Group Cue 5 Thru 11 0 3 Press S8 Add Channels At 5 0 4 Press Record Enter a Actions Specifies next step to be created Prompt reads Select step number s To clear step s select step number s then press CLEAR Selects the channels of cues 5 through 10 Prompt reads Group mode Select focus point s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s Adds channels to step at level 50 Prompt reads Group mode Select focus point s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s Records the channels to the effect step Prompt reads Select cue number To write effect press STEP To add grouped submasters rather than grouped cues press Submaster rather than Cue in this step Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 211 212 Creating an effect in Stage Build an effect in Stage while viewing the results with captured channels You can work with individual channels or with channels in cues groups or focus points Channels may be added to steps in any of the following ways directly either individually or in a range in groups or focus points linked to a focus point in grouped cues or submasters Notes
151. bute levels without the use of encoders such as when you are using a console without an attached ML module Navigation and Feedhack Fixture Box display without encoders noo Select fixture Select page Select attribute X Page highlighted white Fixture attributes exist on page Page highlighted yellow Selected page Attribute gold Attribute of selected fixture Attribute highlighted yellow Selected attribute 1 With a fixture in the Fixture Box press the up down arrows to select a page Select an attribute with the left right arrows Adjust the level of the selected attribute with the Y wheel 4 fthere are other fixture attributes on the same page that you wish to set repeat steps 2 and 3 above Continue until finished with all attributes on that page 5 If attributes of this fixture are on a different page repeat steps 1 through 4 above Continue for all pages on which the fixture s attributes are located 6 Toset the channel levels of another fixture select the fixture with the or keys 7 Repeatsteps 1 through 6 until finished with all fixtures 9 Pan and tilt are always selected together when either is selected Whichever of these two attributes is selected is placed on the Y wheel The other is placed on the X wheel Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Fixture focus with Solo Solo provides a convenient way to point or otherwise a
152. cal Service at 800 775 4382 Write protected disk The write protect tab on this diskette is open Close the tab to unprotect the diskette Other error messages Out of memory You have used up all system memory allotted to the function with which you are working Delete unnecessary parts of the show to free up memory If this doesn t work you may want to break the show into two shows one for each act This message may also appear if you attempt to run too many effects The Designer s Worksheet setup and regions stored in show memory DO NOT match what is being loaded from disk To preserve current Worksheet setup press ENTER To load new Worksheet setup and regions from disk press CLEAR Press Enter to retain the layout option you previously selected on the Designer s Worksheet setup screen Existing regions have already been erased Press Clear to replace the current Designer s Worksheet layout option with the new show s layout New regions will be loaded with the new show Appendix C Error messages ETCLink errors ETCLink is the communications software that serves the Dimmer Monitoring System explained in Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring page 265 ETCLink provides advisory messages for a wide variety of conditions including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These messages fall into two categories fatal messages and secondary messages Fatal messages deal with anything that could potent
153. cepted as binding by ETC Equipment ordered which differs in any way from our standard catalog items will require drawings approved in writing by the Customer When drawings are approved they shall take precedence over all other written or verbal instructions Orders are effective only when accepted and acknowledged by the factory Minimum order is 25 00 net exclusive of freight Price protection will be given on orders entered for immediate shipment and for project orders entered before the effective date of a price increase All other orders will be billed at the current price at time of shipment Quotations for custom products are valid for thirty 30 days ETC will attempt to ship goods for delivery on or about the times stated on the reverse side hereof although time shall not be the essence in this contract ETC will attempt to follow customer s written instructions as to mode and routing of shipments In absence of such instructions ETC shall have absolute discretion as to mode and routing of shipments including express or parcel post for small shipments Where the customer has requested expedited freight the customer will be responsible for the incurred additional charges ETC shall not be liable for late delivery and or inability to perform due to unforeseen circumstances or conditions including our ability to obtain supplies and raw materials government regulations labor stoppages casualties fire and other ca
154. channels all with the same level you can make them track at a different level Also you can track channels at a focus point but you cannot track through a channel set at a focus point To illustrate suppose you have tracked channels as shown in the example under Using record to create tracks page 108 In that example channel 1 is tracked at full through cues 1 3 Change the tracked level of channel 1 in those cues with the following procedure Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Rel Rel Releases captured channels Prompt reads Select channel numbers 2 Press Cuel 1 Go Plays back cue 1 3 Press 1 At 5 01 Modifies channel 1 4 Press Track Prompt reads To record cue amp tracking select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR b Press Enter Re records cue 1 and tracks channel 1 into subsequent cues The results of using Track rather than Record are illustrated below The modified level is recorded in the current cue and carries through cues 2 and 3 until stopped at cue 4 where the level is different Chan 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chanb5 Cue 1 50 Cue 2 50 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Chapter 8 Track Inserting cues If you insert a cue in this sequence Record and Track produce different results Record saves changes only in the cue you insert while Track saves the changes you make and tracks them through the following cues The example given below is in Stage
155. channels rise on stage to recorded levels New levels are set on stage Submaster 2 is recorded with the new levels Submaster LED blinks indicating that submaster 2 has been changed and the changes have not been loaded Releases newly set levels Loads submaster 2 s new levels and brings them up on stage 171 Updating submasters Update allows you to modify previously recorded cues groups submasters or focus points in Stage or Fader Update takes levels from all captured and selected channels and those selected may be restricted with the Only command Updating an active submaster The following procedure illustrates how to update a submaster that has been brought up on Stage Note that you can update all submasters at once by entering O instead of a submaster number in step 4 below No new channels are added when updating all submasters at once Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Setsubmaster 6 ssliderto Puts submaster 6 s full look on stage 10 2 3 Modify channel levels as Sets submaster levels or selects desired additional channels and sets their levels 4 Press S2 Update Sub Prompt reads To update submaster press bump or select number and press ENTER Press 0 ENTER to select all submasters only those channels already in sub 5 To restrict channels in the Selects channels to update update use Only here P Prompt reads Select channel numbers To cancel press CLEAR 6 P
156. clock backup make sure the internal clock has the same frame rate as the external clock The default frame rate is 30 frames per second but you can reset it to 24 or 25 frames per second Reset it as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 6 Options Selects Options Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Press 6 Time Code Prompt reads Select Time Code Frames Per Second frames per second then press Enter ENTER 1 30 fps 2 25 fps 3 24 fps 4 Press 2 Enter Time code frame rate is set to 25 fps 10 If more than 32 events are assigned to the same frame only the first 32 are executed in that frame with the rest executing in the following frame or frames until all those assigned are used up In manual mode however only one event is executed when step is pressed regardless of how many are assigned Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 297 Creating a time code program You can create a time code program in either of two ways by definition in the Time Code Events display or live after activating Learn Mode in the Time Code Events display The cues submasters or macros that you include in time code programs must be pre recorded Bump 46 On 150 16 Off 150 Erg ER EU pe For all procedures in this chapter involving programming in the Time Code Events display press Setup 1 3 Time Code Events Enter Enter to go to that display In the display e Pr
157. control pan and tilt levels its buttons should reselect fixtures in the Fixture Box window If the device doesn t function normally proceed as follows 1 Verify that the pointing device is Microsoft compatible 2 Verify that the pointing device works normally in another system such as in a computer 3 If steps 1 and 2 don t correct the problem call ETC Technical Service at 800 775 4382 f you have a Remote Interface unit or a Remote Video Interface unit in your system you may connect the Designer s Worksheet to that unit and use it independently of whatever is connected to the con sole s Digitizer Serial port 23 NOTE Do not enable the ML Module for an Expression 3 console If you do the console s built in encoders will not work Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 323 Expression Off Line When you want to create or modify a program but are not near your console consider working off line with Expression Off Line This handy program runs on a pc computer and emulates the function of Expression Concept and Impression consoles running version 3 03 system software With Expression Off Line you can do everything in the computer you could do at your console keyboard except run a show When the show you produce in Expression Off Line is ready merely store it on a diskette transfer the diskette to your console read it and run it Or if you want to modify a show stored in the console you can do it in Expression Off l
158. d channels may be either moving or tracked in Blind mode see below Channel levels controlled by effects are in white in Stage or Fader displays Channel levels controlled by submasters other than effect submasters are in yellow in Stage displays Moving channels Moving channels are channel levels that change from one cue to the next In Stage mode all moving channels are displayed in green In Blind and Tracksheet moving channels are displayed in green if they are moving down or blue if they are moving up Tracked channels A tracked channel is a channel whose level is unchanged from the preceding cue Tracked channels are displayed in purple 28 See Channel Attributes display page 57 for a discussion of independent and dependent channels Chapter 5 Setting channel levels Channel Attributes display The Channel Attribute display shows the following settings for every console channel Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Independent Designates whether a channel is dependent upon or independent of Grandmaster Flash Release Solo and Blackout control Indepen dent channels have a y in the Ind field while all others have no en try in the Ind field You must press Rel twice or in some cases three times to release independent channels Flip Means that the channel s output is reversed A flipped channel s DMX output is at full when the channel is set to zero and at zero when the channel is set to full In this displa
159. d take precedence over levels set by faded cues or submasters For example if you capture a channel at 50 that was faded to 100 percent you set it to 50 percent When one or more channels are captured the message Captured Channels appears in red near the top right corner of the display Captured channels may be released in a particular order If no channels are selected and you press Rell all dependent channels are released If you press Rel a second time all independent channels are released If you had selected one or more channels before pressing Rell the first time only those selected channels would have been released and further presses of Rel would be in the same order as explained above 8 Captured channels in fixtures are released essentially the same way If no fixtures are selected and you press Rell all dependent channels are released including the dependent channels in all fixtures If you press Rel again all independent channels are released including the independent channels in all fixtures If you select a fixture first before you press Rell only the dependent channels of that selected fixture are released Pressing Rel a second time releases all independent channels of that selected fixture Pressing Rel on or two times again releases remaining dependent and independent channels as explained above Recorded channels Recorded channels have been recorded in a cue group focus point or submaster Recorde
160. day 51 zy 53 1 55 S6 Y 38 Cio M Pate H maoro NM Lobes Return 288 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Navigation and Feedhack Real Time Programs display Select a program ty X Select a field to edit Select new field data X White row Indicates program selected Yellow coloration Indicates field selected Enabling disabling real time programs Real time programs are enabled by default Follow the procedure below to enable or disable real time programs Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 6 Enter 3 Press 1 1 Enter 4 Press 1 Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects Setup display mode Selects Options Settings menu Prompt reads Enable Disable real time programs 1 enable 0 disable Enables Real Time Programs 289 Creating real time programs You can create a real time program that references either the absolute local time or the astronomical times of sunrise or sunset Also you can specify either the days the program will run or a particular date Days and absolute times Use this procedure when you want to specify days of the week and absolute times Note in the footnotes to this procedure the substitutions that allow you to specify a date rather then days of the week and sunrise or sunset rather than the absolute time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display mode 2 Press 1 2
161. de cue 95 Create playback loops with Link and Follow 96 Linking a macro to aC Ue ooo 97 Recording a cue using Solo ooo ooooooooooo 98 Using Solo to record selected lights 98 Using Solo as a pre recording filter 98 Labeling cues 99 Modifying a recorded cue live o ooooooooooo oo 100 Modifying channels ina cue llis 100 Modifying cue attributes o o o oooooooooooo o 101 Updating CUES 3 uoces sore C a seit PARRA RACER 102 Using Update to modify fade rate 1 eee eee 104 Deleting CUES na epo M ec OE ari eee eo lalo a A LOL eg 104 COPYING CUES ost as bor ee EEG RN WT RET eT S 105 Inserting cues ses 106 Chapter 8 Dr TR 107 MACK TOCOL mass Vasa ti had HEP w Ae oid oh Led baat Acne 108 Using record to create tracks o ooooooooooooo 108 Recording modified cues lees 109 Inserting CUS Sn ori AA Re TE Re 111 Blackout cues and tracking 0000020005 114 Usirig Iracksheet sou Re cese pa Deis 116 Chapter 9 Multipartcues oo 117 Recording a multipart cue n aoaaa aaaeeeaa 118 Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue 119 Wait times in multipart cues 2 202000 oo 120 Editing a multipart cue 22 ee 121 Deleting a part from a multipart cue o o o o o 121 Contents Adding deleting and modifying channels 122 Using Update iat asserta Ake t
162. decimal point the number must be less than one minute 0 1 to 59 9 seconds to be accepted When entered without a decimal point a 2 digit number will be treated as seconds if less than 60 and as a calculated value of minutes and seconds if between 60 and 99 For example if you enter 70 the time will display as 1 10 If you enter either a 3 digit or a 4 digit number the last two digits up to 59 are interpreted as seconds For example if you enter 9930 the time will display as 99 30 20 Dwell time is the length of time the effect runs between the upfade of the first step and the downfade of the last step Hold assigns an infinite dwell time meaning the effect runs until an associated Clear Go or bump button is pressed to start the downfade 21 See Setting default fade times page 26 Chapter 16 Effects Changing upfade dwell and downfade Follow these steps to change the effect s fade times Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Cue 2 2 Press Time and enter the upfade time 3 Press Time and enter the dwell time 4 Press Time and enter the downfade time Press Clear for hold dwell 5 Press Enter Changing upfade only Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Enter effect upfade time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time Fade time entry is complete Prompt reads Select step numbers Follow these steps to change only th
163. der control assignment Chapter 3 System settings Enable disable Blackout key The console s Blackout key may be enabled or disabled The default condition is enabled Follow these steps to enable or disable Blackout Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 8 Blackout Key Prompt reads and press Enter Enable disable blackout key 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 or 0 Corner reads Black 1 Or Black 0 5 Press Enter Blackout is enabled or disabled Enable disable Flexichannel The console s Command display can be set to operate in full display mode or in Flexichannel mode In full display mode channel displays show all channels and their current status In Flexichannel mode only channels with a recorded level or that are on the Link List appear The console defaults to full channel display Follow these steps to enable or disable Flexichannel Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 9 Flexichannel Prompt reads and press Enter Enable disable flexichannel 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 or 0 Corner reads Flexi 1 Or Flexi 0 5 Press Enter Flexichannel mode is enabled or disabled Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 31 Set grandmaster type You may set
164. dimmer or dimmers to clear Press 0 Enter Press Enter to proceed with the load clear or press Clear to cancel the operation Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Selects Load Management display Prompt reads To clear loads select dimmer s and press ENTER Enter 0 to clear non zero loads for all dimmers Advisory reads Recorded loads will be erased for all dimmers with levels above zero disabling load error messages for those dimmers Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel Loads are cleared for all dimmers with levels above zero 275 276 Setting and unsetting dimmers If your console is connected to an ETC Sensor dimming system by an ETCLink network you may use your console to set and unset dimmers at the dimmer rack Note For more information on setting dimmers see the Sensor CEM User Manual Setting a dimmer To set a dimmer or group of dimmers to a level at the dimmer rack ignoring any DMX512 outputs follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 9 ETCLink Functions Enter 3 Press S7 Set Dimmer 4 Enter the dimmers you wish to set and press Enter 5 Enter the level at which to set the dimmers Enter in two digit form e g one percent 01 6 Press Enter Unsetting a dimmer Action Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Prompt reads Select dimmer number s to set
165. display mode 2 Press Focus Point 1 Prompt reads Group mode To recall a focus point select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a focus point select the number and press ENTER 3 Press Enter Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press Label Prompt reads Type focus point label F6 clear to end F7 previous focus point label F8 z next focus point label 5 Use the alphanumeric Corner displays your label keyboard to enter a label 6 Press Enter Focus point 1 is labeled 154 Chapter 12 Focus points Deleting focus points Delete a focus point from memory in the Stage Blind or Fader displays If any cues groups or submasters are linked to the deleted focus point the links are retained but the levels of the linked channels are set to zero Delete a focus point in Stage as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Prompt reads Softkeys 56 Delete To delete focus point press ENTER Focus Point To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters focus point number to delete Corner reads Focus 2 4 Press Enter Enter Focus point 2 is deleted from your show Copying focus points You may copy a focus point in Stage or Blind with small differences in the procedure and prompts Proceed as follows in Stage Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press Focus Point Prompt reads Group mode Select focus
166. djust a selected moving light without the interference of others Even better you can increment through fixtures one at a time adjusting as you go with a single execution of the solo function There is no reason to use solo in Blind because the Fixture Box has a similar incrementing feature If you do use it in Blind however be aware that solo leaves the levels for the selected fixture set and all the rest at zero Example 1 2 3 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Patch fixtures 1 10 Press Stagel Select fixtures 1 10 and set levels Press S8 Fixture 1 S7 More Softkeys S5 Solo Adjust the fixture Press the or keys to solo the next fixture Repeat steps 4 and 5 until finished Press S5 Solo Brightens fixture 1 and darkens all other lights Solo the next fixture Increment through all fixtures Return to the complete look on stage 83 84 Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Chapter 7 Cues The console allows you to save up to 600 cues per show Cues consist of channel levels and cue attributes Multiple attributes can be applied to one cue This chapter shows you how to create and modify cues as well as copy and delete them Play back a recorded cue using the procedures given in Chapter 10 Playing back cues page 125 The examples in this chapter assume there are no cues stored in the console To clear all cues in memory press Setup 4 Enter 2
167. ds Select link number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 6 Enter Prompt reads To move selected link s select target link and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 7 Enter Prompt reads Link already exists To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter The channels in link 6 are added to the channels in link 7 Note To split a link apart create a new link with the channels you want to move Since a channel can only be in one link at a time it will be deleted from the original link and recorded in the new link Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 249 Deleting a link Use S6 Delete Link to remove a link from the Link List All subsequent links will be renumbered To delete a link follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1111 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 3 Press S6 Delete Link Prompt reads Select link number s to delete then press ENTER Enter 0 to delete all links 4 Press 5 Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press Enter The link is deleted from the Link List All links with higher numbers are renumbered one lower Using a link Once you have linked the color control channels for the two color scrollers the console allows you to control them simultaneously on the X and Y wheel
168. ds in recorded order Only one event is executed each time you press Step 310 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Remote macros The remote macro feature provides the ability to control up to 8 console macros from locations up to 1 000 feet away Typically the Remote Macro control device is an eight button control station The remote macro terminals on the console rear panel control macros 1 901 through 1 908 18 To operate one of these console macros from a remote location press the appropriate control ETC does not provide remote macro control units However the console does provide a 25 pin connector labeled Remote Macro to which you may attach a user supplied remote macro control device See Installing remote macros page 344 for more information about connecting a remote macro controller to your console Serial interface The rear panel connector labeled Digitizer Serial is intended for the attachment either of a digital tablet or to make a serial connection to another device For information about using a digital tablet with your console or Lighting Playback Controller See Designer s Worksheet page 315 Please note that the serial interface feature has been reserved for future implementation Disregard the Expression Serial Protocol ESP choice in option 12 on the Options Settings menu Also disregard softkey S2 ESP Baud Rate in that menu 18 The Expression Lighting Playback Controller has 32 remote macros that are w
169. e 7 Remove the diskette from the disk drive and store Upgrading remote interface devices If your console is connected through ETCNet to one or more remote units you need to upgrade the system software in those units whenever you upgrade the console software The reason is that every device operating on an ETC network must be using the same version of software If your network contains any of ETCNet2 nodes you might need to set the network status before downloading the code The reason is that these nodes can operate using either of two ETC local area protocols ETCNet or ETCNet2 but Expression family systems must use ETCNet Setting the network configuration is covered in one of the following sections Remote Unit Upgrade Program display Verify and upgrade the software operating in remote interface devices in the Remote Unit Upgrade Program display Enter that display as follows 1 Save your current show Installing a new version of software will not clear system memory but it is always best to be cautious 2 Turn off the console Turn on all remote interface devices 4 nsert the Remote Unit Upgrade diskette into your console s diskette drive 5 Turn the console back on The console will display a boot screen with a loading counter When the count reaches 10096 the Remote Unit Update Program display appears w Appendix A Installation Characteristics of the display The display contains the following three eleme
170. e Level The channel s current level and focus point reference if any e inhibited The inhibitive submaster if any which is controlling the level of the channel e Dimmers The dimmers assigned to the channel as space permits 35 Editable in the Channel Attributes display except for channels patched to ML fixtures This feature is editable for ML fixtures in the Expression Personality Editor 3 Editable in the Channel Attributes display except for channels patched to ML fixtures Editable in Fixture Patch for channels patched to ML fixtures 66 Chapter 5 Setting channel levels Chapter B Adding moving lights to the show The first step in working with moving lights is to add them to your show Then when your console has information about what types of fixtures personalities and fixture attributes you are using you are ready to customize your console to work most efficiently with them Both steps are initiated from the Moving Light Functions menu This chapter contains the following sections Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 The Moving Lights Function menu Personality setup and editing Patching moving light fixtures and fixture editing Attribute setup and category editing Encoder setup Using the moving lights Fixture Box Fixture focus with Solo 67 Moving Light Functions menu Go to the Moving Lights Functions menu by pressing Setup 1 5 Enter ght Fur Menu F ure Attribute Encod 1
171. e Press 2 0 Thru 31 0 Selects channels 20 through 30 Press S7 More Softkeys until S3 reads Solo 5 Press S3 Solo Sets all channels other than 20 through 30 to zero Prompt reads To clear all channel levels press SOLO 6 Press 2 0 Thru 3 0 Full Selects channels 20 through 30 and sets them to full 7 Press Record Cuel 7 Records channels 20 through 30 into Enter cue 7 8 Press S3 Solo Restores the channels that were cleared by Solo Using Solo as a pre recording filter The following procedure which has an equivalent in Blind uses Solo to restrict the recording to selected channels clearing all others whether independent or not Stage levels are unaffected by this procedure Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects the Stage display mode 2 Press Cue 1 0 Go Plays cue 10 in a fader pair to set a look on stage 3 Press Chan 2 0 Thru Selects channels 20 through 30 and 3110 Full sets them to full 4 Press Record Cue 7 Records selected channels into cue Solo 7 Chapter 7 Cues Labeling cues The console allows you to use an alphanumeric keyboard to assign labels to cues Labels can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long Follow these steps to label a cue Keystrokes 1 Press Stage or Blind 2 Press Cue 1 2 Label 3 Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type the desired label
172. e carrier ETC will render every aid and assistance in the presentation and enforcement of such claims without waiver of our rights to have compliance with the terms of payment of our invoices Equipment returned without ETC s written permission will not be accepted Equipment returned for credit must be in accordance with established RMA procedures Equipment must be unused in original cartons and in saleable condition subject to ETC s quality control and test inspection Restocking charges of 25 00 or 2596 of invoice whichever is greater plus any repacking or reconditioning costs will be deducted from the credit Returns for warranty work will be via warranty procedures In no case will permission be granted to return specially modified or custom equipment or merchandise invoiced more than six 6 months prior to date of Customer s return request Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 No failure of ETC to insist upon or compel compliance by the customer with any of these terms and conditions shall be constructed as a waiver by ETC of its right to insist upon compliance No waiver by ETC of any breach by customer shall be effective unless in writing signed by ETC and no waiver by ETC of any breach by customer shall be deemed a waiver of any other breach If ETC shall fail to repair or replace defective goods within a reasonable time after they are returned to ETC or if ETC shall wrongfully fail to make delivery or shall wrongfu
173. e first time or after the last time are ignored The resettable loop time can run from five seconds to 24 hours 1 If you are running a time code program from an external clock the external clock will control the loop time with its own first event time and last event time settings To provide synchronized internal clock backup you must set the first event time and last event time in the Time Code Events display to correspond exactly with those times set for the external clock Otherwise events might be missed until the two clocks synchronize It takes at least 5 seconds for external and internal clocks to synchronize Use this procedure to set loop times either when running on the internal clock alone or when running from an external clock with internal clock backup Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 until S8 reads Reset Loop 2 Press S8 Reset Loop Prompt reads Enter first valid frame of internal time then press ENTER Press TIME to edit specific fields 3 Press 1 O O O Sets ten seconds as the starting time for the time code program 4 Press Enter Prompt reads Enter last valid frame of internal time then press ENTER Press TIME to edit specific fields 5 Press BI OI O IO O then Sets the time code program to reset at press Enter the five minute mark 2 If the loop is set to less than five seconds the internal clock resets it to five seconds from the loop s starting time 302 Chapter 24 C
174. e number of the first channel then press Thru and enter the last num ber For example Channel 1 Thru 9 selects channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 and 9 e To exclude consecutive channels from a selected group of channels press Except before entering the channels to exclude For example Channel 1 Thru 1115 Except 5 Thru 1 3 selects channels 1 2 3 4 14 and 15 e Use And to select each non consecutive channel to include in a selection For example Channel 1 Thru 5 And 8 And 1 1 selects channels 1 2 3 4 5 8and 11 e Use Except to exclude each non consecutive channel from a selec tion For example Channel 1 Thru 5 Except 1 Except 5 selects channels 2 3 and 4 e f no channels are selected press Enter to select all channels cur rently at a level above zero Once you have entered your channel selections you are ready to set channel levels Selecting channels in Flexichannel mode In Flexichannel mode only channels that are used in the show appear on the Stage Blind and Fader displays See Flexichannel page 15 for information on enabling and updating Flexichannel When Flexichannel mode is enabled the Thru key functions slightly differently For example in normal mode pressing 1 Thru 5 selects all channels from 1 to 5 In Flexichannel mode pressing 1 Thru 5 selects all visible channels from 1 to 5 To select all channels from 1 to 5 i
175. e 34 Set syste ces os a aurum 36 Submaster 164 168 Subroutine fade and follow 229 MVE Mt eas SM PME tae ee Sah 93 Wait time in multipart cue 120 Time code event Gle r alk nacos bere 263 Deletes m ot a oam oz 303 bearn Mode cio pa 300 PA o ear ce 259 Time Code listi cin Ete 308 Time code program Copy event zc cori Ea 304 Edit event 0 306 External clock 309 Insert an event 303 Internal clock 308 Manual Mode 310 Manual playback 310 Move event 0005 305 Pause Mode cigarra 310 Playback 00 308 Range edit 306 Reset loop 2 302 Setting frame rate 297 Step softkey o o o o 310 Timed fader o o o ooooo ooo 126 Track ADOUL pura is 107 Allrade 114 Channel color o o ooo 56 Explanation e123 9255 oth baa os 87 Trackball Trackpad 335 Tracksheet ADOUL S252 isi bei ROSES PRA 107 A etes ete 16 PIA tix doce cere erum ett eee ui 259 Troubleshooting 0 9 Twisted pair wiring 329 Type QUO ox ait ee ein scl cinta etd 86 SUDITidSter seus rite emm 158 U Unload submaster 177 Unpark Channel cai eus tes tbe 201 DIMMER sina duc Sete Seu e 199 Index FINITO ee ee Eee 204 Unpatch dimmer 43 Unset
176. e 342 for installation information Configuring ETC MIDI The console operates at all times in MIDI Mode 3 or Omni off Poly This means it only receives or transmits MIDI commands on the user selected channel Configure the console for ETC MIDI by specifying the MIDI channel number Be sure your MIDI gear is set to the same channel The console remembers the selected MIDI channel the next time it is turned on The procedure for selecting the MIDI channel is given below 1 Press Setup Go to the setup display 2 Press 6 Enter Selects the Options Settings menu 3 Press 1 Enter Prompt reads Select MIDI channel 1 through 16 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI 4 Enteranumber between 1 Specifies MIDI channel and 16 2 5 Press Enter Completes the ETC MIDI setup a Press S1 Disable MIDI here to disable ETC MIDI 280 Chapter 24 Control interfaces ETC MIDI message formats The following table lists MIDI message formats used to control the console All numbers are in hexadecimal format Note off message format 8n kk vv 8 Note off status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Key number 0 7F Ww Note off velocity 0 7F Note on message format 9n kk vv 9 Note on status n MIDI channel number 0 F kk Key number 0 7F vv Note on velocity 0 7F 00 Note off Control change message format lt Bn gt lt kk gt lt vv gt B Control change status n MIDI channel number 0 F
177. e 4 for a comparative discussion of HTP and LTP channels Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 59 Labeling channels You can assign a label to any channel even channels in Fixture Patch in the Channel Attributes display Use the procedure below to label one channel or a range of channels Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 3 Enter channel number s Selects channel s to label then press Label Use Prompt reads Thru And and Except Type channel label to select multiple F6 clear to end channels F7 last channel label F8 z next channel label 4 Use an alphanumeric Channel s labeled keyboard to enter the channel s label then press Enter Chapter 5 Setting channel levels Selecting channels Using the keypad to set channel levels involves two steps selecting the channels whose levels you want to modify then entering output levels e To select a single channel enter the channel number preceded by Channel if the Channel LED is not lit For example Channel 1 selects channel 1 or just entering 1 will do it if the Channel LED is lit e To select two channels that are not consecutively numbered enter the number of the first channel then press And and enter the number of the second channel For example Channel 1 And 7 selects channels 1 and 7 e To select a group of consecutively numbered channels enter th
178. e code protocol The console responds to both the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE time code and to the Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI time code The console generates an internal time code in both MIDI and SMPTE protocols The console also can run under external MIDI and SMPTE control but an option must be installed for external SMPTE external MIDI capability is standard for the console You can have both clocks simultaneously enabled so that if ever the external time code signal stopped during a show the internal clock would immediately take over preserving the continuity of your show Shows designed for time code control consist of a series of events that play back at specified times A time code program also has a modifiable loop time that ranges from 5 seconds to 24 hours There can be as many as 3 000 time code events with each event having any combination of cues loaded in faders one cue for each of two faders a submaster bump button or a macro Up to 32 events may be executed in a single frame Event times are expressed in hours minutes and seconds with each second broken down into frames For example 01 25 30 17 is one hour twenty five minutes thirty seconds and seventeen frames Two frame rates are available in addition to the default rate which is thirty frames per second Setting time code frame rate If you are running the time code program from an external clock with internal
179. e console select the item to label For example if you want to label cue 5 press Cue 5 Enter to make the selection 3 Press Label on the console or F5 on the keyboard to enter label mode When in label mode a blue band appears at the upper right corner of the monitor containing a prefix such as Label and a blinking cursor 4 Type the desired label on the alphanumeric keyboard You may use the Home End and Insert keys on the keyboard when entering a label Home and End allow you to move directly to the beginning or end of the name respectively Insert is a toggle that allows you to choose between overwriting or inserting text You may also use F6 to clear the label from the point of the cursor to the end of the line 5 Press Enter on the alohanumeric keyboard to record the label or press Esc to quit and return to the original console display screen 6 Press F8 on the alphanumeric keyboard to advance to the next selection such as the next cue submaster or group Press F7 to go to the previous selection Shows To name a show press Setup S1 Show Name and use steps 3 5 of the Labeling Procedure above to enter the show s name 21 See Installing an alohanumeric keyboard page 336 for installation information Chapter 25 Accessories Full Tracking Backup Full Tracking Backup FTB allows you to connect two consoles or one console and a Lighting Playback Controller LPC using one as a
180. e cue that played last See Link page 94 Run a macro that contains a command to play a particular cue Run a subroutine that contains a list of cues to be played automatically Program a cue with Follow see Follow page 95 After you run the cue that has been set with a Follow command the next cue in sequence or a linked cue runs automatically Press Go while a loop constructed with Link and Follow commands is running A non loop cue will be played in accordance with rules explained in Create playback loops with Link and Follow page 96 You must be in either the Stage or the Fader displays to select cues to play back but you can run a selected cue from Blind as well as Stage or Fader You see the cue running on the command monitor in the Stage and Fader displays Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 129 Playing a cue Selecting a cue moves it to the top of the Cue List It will not run until you press Go Follow these steps to select a cue and play it on the fader of your choice Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Cue Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 3 Press 1 5 Selects cue 1 5 to play Cue List moves cue 1 5 to the top of the list 4 Press Go on fader A B Cue 1 5 runs on fader A B Cue 2 moves to the top of the Cue List 5 Press Go on fader C D Cue 2 starts to run on fader C D Go to a different cue To play back a cue other tha
181. e d 46 Creating or editing a profile 2 20 0 eee 47 Copying to another profile 0 0 0000 00 cues 47 clear A ces Be ote soe ed cag ah ths ng Se a ee 48 Cleat ENA ss fa fates alo FEED WE 48 Fill Between daia ean SER RR Benes bean TI os 48 Resetting Profle dns sue oh ee ee a HA e 48 Labeling a prolil cionado 48 Captured channels in Patha nss temine niedi nite miah nitik g 49 Dirhimer cheek c ua uua to eder me ed bean a Aes sa 50 About Dimmer cete stc ER ROV eh Cd obe Y ame Ls 51 About Dimmer with ETCLink 0 20 00 000 0000000 cee 52 Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling o 53 Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack o o o ooo o 54 Contents Chapter 5 Setting channel levels 0000000 55 Charnmeliodes c vs tas dado laa a ts oe e M Ud 56 Selected channels 000 020 iliis 56 Captured channels llle 56 Recorded channels 20 00000 cece eee eee 56 MovingichannelS ava oer aa ke das Cu i ote 56 Tracked channels utes eter eem tei ee RI OE 56 Channel Attributes display 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee 57 Editing in the Channel Attributes display 58 Independent channels 0000 022 eee eee 58 Flipped Channels 4 ud eae ee ot a tole eee eg ott eh a 58 Channel data type eser pie eee 59 Channel c nvention i2 eet RET ER ia 59 Labeling channels sz nth RT ELE 60 Selecting Channels id bL eX eu ex eee needs 61 Selecting channels
182. e effect s upfade time Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Cue 2 2 Press Time 3 Enter the upfade time 4 Press Enter Enter Enter Changing downfade only Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Enter effect upfade time Prompt reads Enter effect upfade time Prompt reads Select step numbers Follow these steps to change only the effect s downfade time Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Cue 2 2 Press Time Time Time 3 Enter the downfade time 4 Press Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects cue 2 in the Blind display Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time Prompt reads Enter effect downfade time Prompt reads Select step numbers 223 224 Changing dwell only Follow these steps to change only the effect s dwell time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cuel 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time 3 Enter the dwell time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time 4 Press Enter Enter Prompt reads Select step numbers Resetting hold dwell time If the dwell time is set to Hold an effect submaster will continue to run until you press the bump button An effect cue will continue to run until you press either Go or Hold Hold To reset the dwell time to Hold follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cuel 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind d
183. e effects in the normal Stage display where you can see effect steps as you create them The only difference between effects and other types of cues in this display lies in the information provided in the Attribute Bar Below is an illustration of the Stage display for an effect cue The illustration shows the softkeys presented and information contained in the Attribute Bar when step 7 of this cue is identified OS 006 OF 09 10 011 3 15 016 17 18 19 20 021 22 29 30 031 32 33 34 35 036 3 39 40 041 42 43 44 45 046 55 056 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 066 67 68 69 70 071 72 9 80 081 8 34 85 086 3 90 091 92 93 34 35 096 3 98 33 00 2 08 04 05 106 09 10 111 12 13 14 15 b 1 18 19 20 121 22 z Dwel Out Lo Hi Mv 0 0 FL Cues left 598 5141 52 3 S4 35 S6 S 58 SS Fy YF JF step 14 For the default condition of 0 0 0 for In Dwell Out however the step has an instantaneous In fade remains there for the entire Step Time and then has an instantaneous Out fade Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 207 208 Creating an effect in Blind The first step in creating an effect is the same for Stage or Blind Following is the procedure for creating the effect in Blind Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Bling 1 Typel The blind display defaults to cue selection and you specify cue 1 Prompt reads Select fade type 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Effect 4 Subroutine 5 Blocking 2 Press 3 Specifies an effect type You a
184. e faders submasters or Grandmaster either from the console or from the Designer s Worksheet follow the setup procedure below Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 7 Designer s Prompt reads Worksheet Setup and Select Designer s Worksheet setup press Enter then press ENTER 4 Press 1 Enables for the 12 x 12 digitizer template that can control fader submaster and Grandmaster sliders Corner reads Menu 1 5 Press Enter Designer s Worksheet option is set Reassigning slider controls If option 1 is selected in the Designer s Worksheet Setup display you can choose whether you will be able to operate the fader submaster and Grandmaster slider controls at the console or at the Designer s Worksheet You cannot operate them at both Assuming that you are making this choice independently of the template selection above reassign the slider controls with the procedure below Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 7 Designer s Prompt reads Worksheet Setup and Select Designer s Worksheet setup press Enter then press ENTER 4 Press S1 Sheet Sliders Toggles the slider control Specification reads Current Sliders Enabled Worksheet a Pressing the same S1 softkey reverses the sli
185. e is compatible with all the others But different versions of software can exist in different devices because of software upgrades that occurred while the device was being manufactured You should make sure To verify the software running on your interface devices and upgrade it if necessary go to the Remote Unit Upgrade Program display You reach this display using the Remote Interface diskette supplied with your system or in a system software upgrade kit Follow the procedure given under Upgrading remote interface devices page 346 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 329 Installing Full Tracking Backup Full Tracking Backup FTB is a system where two consoles or one console and a Lighting Playback Controller are interconnected using ETCNet One functions as the main controller always the console when using an LPC and the other functions as a tracking slave unit If the main unit fails the backup slave takes over immediately Use the keyswitch at the right end of the console LED display panel to switch from one controller to the other Follow these steps to install a Full Tracking Backup system 1 Interconnect the consoles or the console and LPC by cabling to the network connectors Terminate properly 2 Connect monitors to the slave unit 3 Set console DIP switches as explained under Setting Expression 3 DIP switches page 331 Installing SMPTE In order to use SMPTE equipment with Expression 3 consoles the SMPTE o
186. e rate wheel Fades are placed under control of the rate wheel Fader Status window shows the current rate 9 When finished with the manual rate override you can record the modified fade rate into the cue if you wish See Using Update to modify fade rate page 104 132 Chapter 10 Playing back cues Quickstep Quickstep allows you to run through a show checking all cues without having to wait for fades When Quickstep is active the faders ignore all upfade downfade follow and wait times Cues snap immediately to their completed levels when you press Go or Back To enable Quickstep and run a cue check follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press S7 More Turns on Quickstep Softkeys 51 Enable Quickstep Press Cue 1 Selects cue 1 4 Press Go Cue 1 comes up on stage instantly Continue to press Go Each cue comes up on stage instantly until you have checked all cues 6 Once you are finished Turns off Quickstep fades will operate press S1 Disable normally Quickstep Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 133 134 Chapter 10 Playing back cues Chapter 11 Groups The console allows you to record frequently used combinations of channels into units called groups You may record up to 500 groups Once you record a group it can be combined with other channels and groups to create cues submasters effects focus points or other groups The principal differ
187. e to send the following commands to MIDI devices If MSC output is enabled on the console the console automatically sends the MSC commands The console s transmitter Device ID must match the device ID for the MIDI device receiving the signals If a cue is pending the console transmits A B Go with cue number and a list entry of 1 A B Go e fa cue is holding the console transmits A B Resume with cue number and a list entry of 1 e lfacueis pending the console transmits C D Gol C D Go with cue number and a list entry of 2 e lf a cue is holding the console transmits C D Resume with cue number and a list entry of 2 A B Hold lfacueisrunning the console transmits A B Stop with cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Hold lfacueisrunning the console transmits C D Stop with cue number and a list entry of 2 Macros e For macros 1 127 the console transmits Fire with the macro number Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 285 286 MSC frame packet to run a cue An MSC frame packet consists of several bytes Byte types their hexidecimal values and explanations are given in the table below Byte type Start Byte Explanation Start of System Exclusive Message Start of message Send Channel Send transmit channel number or 7F All Call for system wide broadcasts System Exclusive Message Indicates System Exclusive Message is MIDI Show Control
188. each identified attribute is identified in the Value line For 8 bit data types the level is given as a percentage For 16 bit data types the level is given as a value in the range 0 65535 The level setting device assigned to each identified attribute is identified where E1 E5 are the five encoders X and Y are the two wheels and TX and TY are the axes of the pointing device if attached 80 When a range of fixtures is selected the Fixture Box contains information pertaining only to the last fixture in the range Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Working with fixtures Following are some principles to keep in mind when setting fixture attribute levels e fafixture has a strobe attribute that attribute must be set above zero so that the light can be seen e The intensity attribute is selected by default unless you select an attribute Use this as a shortcut method to set fixture intensities For example set the intensity of three moving lights on stage by pressing Stagel S8 Fixture 1 thru 3 Full e f you wish you can assign attribute levels without using the Fixture Box For instance if a fixture is patched to channels 1 through 20 you can set the levels of channels 7 and 8 as follows press Stagel Channel 7 And 8 At 5 Enter e fyouare working with fixtures directly but don t want the Fixture Box on the screen press Clear to remove it The encoders remain active when the F
189. ect macro number then press ENTER Blank macro created Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros Enters setup display Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER Selects Write Show To Disk Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER 1 ENTER Confirms selection Macro contents line reads SETUP 3 ENTER 1 ENTER ENTER Stores macro 8 12 seconds 5 5 b 5 seconds or 5 30 five minutes 30 seconds Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 237 Linking macros Any macro may end with a link to another macro When macros are linked the first macro runs then the second macro follows automatically Press the appropriate macro key at the end of your sequence to create the link Pressing the macro key automatically ends and stores the macro For example to create a macro that sets all active channels to 50 percent fades them out then runs another macro follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 8 Enter Selects Macro editing mode 2 Press 1 Enter Selects macro 1 to create Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press MACRO ENTER when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros 3 Press Enter At 5 O Sets all active channels to 50 percent Macro line reads ENTER AT 50 4 Press Macro Wait 11 0 Macro pauses for ten seconds Enter Macro line reads ENTER AT 5
190. ector ThinNet install jumpers 1 through 6 Be certain jumpers 7 through 12 are not installed If your network cable is plugged into the RJ45 connector Twisted Pair install only jumpers 7 through 12 Be certain jumpers 1 through 6 are not installed Jumper 13 must always be off Jumper 14 should always be installed Locate the DIP switches at location S1 on the corner of the circuit board nearest the power switch Switches are either On Closed or Off Open DIP switch 1 must be Off and 2 must be On or the Remote Interface will not start Adjust the settings as necessary to match the following table DIP Switch Position Function Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only Normal operation Factory Use Only Normal operation Factory Use Only Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only Normal operation Factory Use Only Normal operation Factory Use Only ONODOABRWN O a Close the face panel and replace the screws The Remote Interface checks DIP switch settings when it is turned on Restart the unit for new DIP switch settings to take effect 351 Fuses The Remote Interface Unit contains two pop out 6 25 Amp fuses at the left side of the rear panel Inspect and replace as explained under Replacing fuses page 326 Remote Video Interface RVI The Remote Video
191. ed upfade time Channel levels that decrease fade to their new level in the assigned downfade time The cue starts when you press Go You may use a wait time to delay the start of the upfade or downfade Allfade An allfade cue forces all unused channels to zero intensity when you press Go and clears the other fader Allfade is useful for forcing an end cue when tracking channels For more information on using allfade cues for tracking see Chapter 8 Track Effect An effect cue contains an effect Effects allow you to assign channels to a series of steps When you play back the effect the steps run in assigned chase patterns or in random order For more information on using effects see Chapter 16 Effects Blocking A blocking cue forces all LTP channels to fade to completion in background cue timing and then runs in a physical fader like any other cue One use for a blocking cue is to end background effect cues under program control For more information on blocking cues in relation to LTP channels see Working with LTP channels page 5 Subroutine A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that you have more playback options For more information on using subroutines see Chapter 17 Subroutines Chapter 7 Cues Recording functions The console has two record functions Record and Track Record saves all channels as they appear on the screen
192. edure to run a time code program using the console s time code clock Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S1 Internal Clock Prompt reads Set internal clock then press ENTER Press TIME to edit specific fields 2 Use the keypad or the and keys to enter the code time of the first event you want to view or enter zero to start at the beginning of the time code program Press Enter 4 Press S2 Clock Enable Each time code event will run at its to start the internal clock recorded time running at the desired code time a This softkey toggles between Clock Enable and Clock Disable A disabled clock is indicated by the message Clock Disabled in the upper left corner of the display and an unchanging TimeCd value When the clock is enabled and runs the TimeCd value runs up 15 As you play a time code program you may find it useful to include the Time Code List on the playback monitor Display the Time Code List by pressing Setup 6 Enter 7 Enter 1 Enter 308 Chapter 24 Control interfaces External time code clock When running a real time program with an external clock the event list pointer jumps to agree with the frame of the external clock Sometimes the timing signal is not yet present even though the external clock is enabled causing a delay in the execution of the program When that happens you will see a Waiting for input message at the upper left corner of the Time Code Events display
193. eene 949 43 Ns 92 21 W Los Angeles CA ES WeSt oes 24 05 IN ines 118 24 W Indianapolis IN 5 West 399 AA ANS icut 86 17 W Madison Wl usse 6 WeSt oo 43 OA Non 89 23 W Nashville TN 6 West 967 07 Nuevitas 86 41 W Miamit Eben EDO Ei andea 25 49 IN stets 80 13 W Minneapolis MN 6 West 44 b7 Nant 93 16 W Montgomery AL 4 0 WVOSt is sedet 922 2 A 86 17 W New Orleans LA 6West e 3022035 Nosti 89 55 W New York NY iconos 5 West eene 209465 Nu sees 73 58 W Oklahoma City OK 6 West 35 28 Noice 97 30 W Philadelphia PA 5West eeem 40 00 N eeee 75 08 W Phoenix AZ NNeSt edet unt wt Q9 az Nds 112 04 W Portland OR sss 8 WSS bo aee 459 32 y ree 122 39 W Raleigh NE caca 5 West 3595249 IN astantes coo 78 47 W Salt Lake City UT 7 WOeSE s i etes 40 46 N eee 111 55 W San Francisco CA i QMesta cients 37 A7 Noi 122 33 W Seattle WA esses 8West ese 479 94 IN ssec 122 21 W Sioux Falls SD 6 West esu ABP 325 Ned assiettes 96 43 W Washington D C 5 West 38 54 No ee 77 00 W Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 369 370
194. elect percentage then press At to select level Or use right left arrows for percentage up down arrows for level 2 Press S2 Percent and Selects a fade point enter a fade point number 3 Enter a new intensity on Selects an intensity for the face point the keypad 4 Press Enter if finished or go back to step 2 Copying to another profile One convenient way to create a new profile is to copy one of the existing ones to a new profile number and edit the new one Use softkey S6 Copy to Profile in the Profile display to copy a profile Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 47 Clear All For a selected profile Clear All changes the intensity of all fade points to undefined Clear to End For a selected profile the Clear to End command sets as undefined the intensity of all those fade points above the selected one Fill Between When intensities in a profile are undefined such as when you use Clear All or Clear To End you can use Fill Between to have them automatically filled in with a linear profile For Fill Between to work you must have defined intensities on both sides of an undefined range zero intensity is a defined value Here is how Fill Between can be used to fill in undefined intensities throughout a particular range Keystrokes 1 Press S1 Profile 1 5 Press S2 Percent 5 0 3 Press S4 Clear to End Enter 4 Press S2 Percent 7 5 Press At 1 0 6 Press S5 Fil
195. elete Cue Delete Cue Enable Disable Tracking Return gt Cue Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Return gt Cue 361 362 Blind Multipart Blind Part Select Cue Cue List Cue List Spread Sheet Cue SS Solo Previous Page Next Page Rate Delete Part More Softkeys gt MP2 More Softkeys Multipart Fixture Blind Group Blind Group Group List Group SS Select Group Select Group Group List Group List Create Group Spreadsheet Group SS Replace Level Previous Page Previous Page Previous Page Next Page Next Page Next Page Delete Group Delete Group Delete Group 00 NI o 61 A O NO Fixture Return gt Group Return gt Group Blind Focus Blind Focus Point Focus List Focus SS Select Focus Select Focus Focus List gt Focus List Create Focus Spreadsheet gt Focus SS Replace Level Previous Page Previous Page Previous Page Next Page Next Page Next Page Delete Focus Delete Focus Delete Focus o NI 0 O1 A N Fixture Blind Subma Blind Sub Return gt Focus ster Sub 2 Select Sub Bump Status Sub List gt Sub List Spreadsheet gt Sub SS Solo Previous Page Next Page Rate Delete Sub More Softkeys gt Sub 2 More Softkeys gt Sub
196. elp you use console displays When alternative navigational techniques perform the same function examples in the text illustrate the technique that many find the most convenient or efficient to use Navigation and mE Console menus pI IST Select a menu item Highlighted characters Item selected In these Navigation and Feedback tables oon represents the keypad S represents the softkeys AY represent the up and down keyboard arrows ss represent the right and left keyboard arrows and X represent the plus and minus keys P represents an encoder page button not shown in this table 1 f you have a pointing device such as a mouse installed the right and left device buttons work the same as the x keys Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Output level conventions The console uses both a highest level or pile on convention and a last action convention to determine levels for channels affected by more than one control Channels may be defined to operate with either convention HTP channels The behavior of a pile on channel is defined by the Highest Takes Precedence HTP rule The console reads all output levels it receives for an HTP channel and sets that channel to the highest of them A channel controlled by a submaster always obeys the HTP rule but the Blackout key Grandmaster control and parked channels all have priority over levels set from the keypad For example if an HTP channel is included i
197. en the Macro and Macro pins and switch either of these leads Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 345 Upgrading software Upgrading a console NOTE If upgrading system software in a lighting playback controller LPC some of the steps below are slightly different because LPC controls are different See your LPC QuickGuide for information about these differences Expression software upgrades are distributed in kits that contain one or more upgrade diskettes and usually an installation document Follow these kit instructions when provided When upgrading make sure the diskette you use is marked for your console 1 Installing new console software clears all system memory Please save your current show 2 Turn the console off 3 Insert the console software diskette into your console s diskette drive 4 Turn the console back on The console displays the boot screen and automatically installs the software This process takes approximately one minute The console displays the following messages as the installation progresses Loading Erasing Flash Writing Flash Wait until the Stage display appears 5 Press Setup to confirm that the new software has been successfully installed The current software version is displayed in the lower right corner of the display This version number should match the number on the diskette If it does not repeat the procedure 6 Press 4 Enter S1 Reset System Enter to complete the upgrad
198. ence between a group and a cue is that a group cannot be played back through a fader or slider Consequently it has no fade times wait times or other playback attributes Group numbers which are independent of cue numbers are whole numbers in the range of 1 to 999 This chapter includes the following sections Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Creating groups Working with groups in Blind Working with groups in Stage Modifying groups Labeling groups Deleting groups Copying groups Using cues or submasters as groups Using groups to modify cues groups or submasters 135 136 Recording a group in Stage The following example illustrates the creation of a group using newly selected channels Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects the Stage display 2 Press 1 Thru 5 Full Select channels and set levels And 8 And 1 0 At 5 Enter 3 Press Record Group Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER 4 Press 1 Selects group 1 to record 5 Press Enter Records group 1 Recording a group from a look on stage To create a group from the look that s already on stage follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Record Group Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters the group number you want to record Corner reads Group 2 4 Press Enter
199. eplace and press ENTER Prompt reads Select new level and press ENTER Changes all channels in the range 5 though 10 with level 50 to level full 191 Group spreadsheet Go to the group spreadsheet as follows Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Group Enter 2 Press S3 Spreadsheet 041 O2 03 04 05 06 50 50 50 50 Creating a group TEN 07 08 Actions Selects the group mode of the blind display Shows the group spreadsheet Chan 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 46 17 19 20 18 EE i5 FL FL FL FL FL eee eee 80 80 80 80 80 After entering the group spreadsheet as explained above create a group as follows Keystrokes 1 Press S2 Create Group 2 Press 5 Enter Press 5 Thru 11 0 Press Full 5 Repeat steps 3 4 192 Actions Prompt reads To create a new group select group number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects group 5 Prompt reads Select channel s Selects channels to include Sets channels 5 through 10 to full Prompt reads Enter intensity Continue selecting channels and setting levels until done Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Editing groups You may edit a group in the group spreadsheet Follow all steps in the procedure under Creating a group on the previous page except Press S1 Select Group in step 1 Deleting groups After entering the group spreadsheet as explained on the previous page delete a group
200. ept as noted below If they are lower the established levels take precedence If a submaster slider contains a recorded pile on submaster the green LED glows Note Channel levels set on the keypad and inhibitive submasters both override pile on submaster levels Inhibitive submaster An inhibitive submaster holds the output of channels below a specified level An inhibitive submaster doesn t actually set channel levels it just prevents them from exceeding a specified level Only submasters 13 through 24 may be inhibitive If a submaster slider contains a recorded inhibitive submaster the red LED glows Effect submaster An effect submaster has an effect recorded in it Press an effect submaster s bump button or move its slider to start the effect running See Chapter 16 Effects page 205 for more information on effect submasters Any submaster may be programmed with an effect If a submaster slider contains a recorded effect submaster the green LED glows 158 Chapter 13 Submasters Changing type You can change a submaster s type by using the Type key When you change a submaster type levels recorded in the submaster are retained This means that you can change a submaster from pile on to inhibitive and back without losing any level or timing information If you change the type to effect channel and level information is erased To change a submaster s type follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects
201. er that you want to see In Blind mode you can also use and to move through recorded cues and cue parts one ata time Press Cue then press to display the next cue or part Press to display the previous cue or part Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 88 The oversized show If your show requires more than 600 cues you can still run it by creating the show in segments with each segment having less than 600 cues Follow the procedures below to create and play back an oversized show as a series of separate show segments Creating the oversized show Let s assume that you want to create a show containing 800 cues Create the intended show as two separate shows using the following procedure 1 Create a show containing the first 400 cues and store it on a diskette called Beginning You will have the show called Beginning stored on diskette as well as in console memory 2 Next erase all cues from the show in the console memory not the one on diskette 3 Re program that show in memory for the remaining 400 cues you need 4 Store that second show on a new diskette called End Playing back an oversized show 1 When it s time to play back the show load and play back the show called Beginning 2 When all cues in Beginning have been played load and play back the show called End Arrange the break between shows Beginning and End so that it occurs during a natural break in the show or between cues Note If
202. er displays Chan the next number you press will be taken as a channel number If you enter a range such as with the Thru And or Except keys each number is displayed in turn but only the last number in the range remains Channel area Shows channels their levels and focus point references if any in selected cues submasters groups or focus points Below each channel number is its level if set Below each level is the reference to the focus point if any used to set the level Prompt area Shows a prompt or information display related to your next or just completed action Attribute bar Shows current settings for the selection such as a cue group or submaster Softkeys Shows additional functions available by pressing console keys S1 through S8 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 13 Stage The Stage display shows you the current levels of all active channels Up to 125 channels appear on the display at a time Display name Keypad corner Chan 03 33 PM OS 006 07 08 09 10 011 13 5 8 13 20 021 8 29 30 031 33 35 03 38 39 40 3 45 046 47 Channel 3 ES nose 8 59 60 06 E2 E E 62 69 70 07 area gt S 55 056 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 68 69 70 0714 80 081 8 85 89 90 93 95 096 97 98 99 00 03 04 05 106 09 10 111 3 8 19 20 121 22 Prompt area Attribute bar Cue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label Softkeys scat Rug MENT Blind The Blind display lets you work on cues groups and submasters without
203. erent models of Kurta digitizers have been used as Designer s Worksheets and each has a different configuration procedure described below Refer to Kurta digitizer tablet documentation if you need additional information After installing the digitizer tablet using one of the two procedures that follow select which template to use and where the sliders will be controlled Then calibrate the template These setup operations are all performed in the Designer s Worksheet Display which is shown below er s Worksheet Menu 1 09 44 RM Enabled Current Sliders Enabled Console 1 52 S3 S4 ss S6 57 sS Cc AS d ete Installing the Kurta XGT The Kurta XGT digitizer tablet shipped with Designer s Worksheet systems is configured by ETC for proper performance with its consoles 4 Follow these steps to install and configure your Kurta XGT Designer s Worksheet 1 Turn off your console or Remote Interface Plug the 9 pin serial connector on the interface cable into the console or Remote Interface connector labeled Digitizer Plug the other end of the interface cable into the interface connector on the back panel of the XGT There is a small arrow or dimple on the Plug the transformer cable into the DC connector on the interface cable s serial connector plugged into the back panel of the console or Plug the transformer into an electrical outlet or a surge protecting See Designer s Worksheet page 315 for operatio
204. error messages are appropriate To avoid problems you should plan your macro before you start recording it by determining exactly what keystrokes you want to include You might want to do this by running through the task and writing down each keystroke Using Learn The Learn function allows you to create a macro by performing an actual sequence of keystrokes The console records the keystrokes as you make them The recorded keystroke sequence can then be played by pressing the appropriate macro key Once you record a macro in Learn mode you can edit the sequence in Macro Editing mode to adjust its operation Learn works in any display mode except the Macro Editing display and the Designer s Worksheet Editing display To create a sample macro using Learn follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Live display mode 2 Press Learn Prompt reads Select macro number to learn then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 7 Enter Learning Macro 7 flashes in red in the upper left corner of the monitor Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros 4 Enter Channel 1 Thru Sets channels 1 through 5 at 50 5 At 5 Enter percent 5 Press Macro Wait Prompt reads Enter wait time Press ENTER when done 729 Macros cannot execute MIDI commands Chapter 18 Macros Expression 3 User Manua
205. ervice subject to the terms of this limited warranty The warranty period shall begin on the date of delivery of a portable system or on the date of energization of a permanently installed system and shall continue for the following periods a one year for all Irideon products and b two years for all other ETC products Warranty is limited to 60 days from shipment for purchase of demo or loaner products Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident negligence alteration abuse or misuse or any accessories or parts not supplied by ETC Warranty does not cover consumable parts such as fuses lamps color media or components warranted directly to the owner by the original manufacturer ETC s warranty does not extend to items not manufactured by us Freight terms on warranty repairs are FOB ETC factory or designated repair facility Collect shipments or freight allowances will not be accepted ETC s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be to repair or replace at ETC s option such parts as shall be determined to be defective on ETC s inspection ETC will not assume any responsibility for any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment without ETC s prior written authorization ETC SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL GENERAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES DAMAGES TO PROPERTY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF USE TIME PROFITS OR INCOME OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES The customer s obli
206. ess 7 Designer s Worksheet Editing and press Enter Press S6 Clear Region Press 7 Press Enter Press Enter to clear the region or Clear to cancel the action Actions Selects Setup display Selects Designer s Worksheet Editing display mode Prompt reads To clear region s select region number s and touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR Selects region 7 to clear Corner reads Region 7 Prompt reads To confirm touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR Clears region 7 from the Designer s Worksheet layout removes the assignment of macro 7 to region 7 319 320 Alphanumeric keyboard The Expression console supports an alphanumeric keyboard If you have either a Remote Interface Unit or a Remote Video Interface unit attached to your console you can also attach an alphanumeric keyboard to that peripheral device and achieve the same results The keyboard s function is to allow you to assign labels also called names to your show and to elements of it including cues submasters groups channels dimmers time code events and fixtures Names may have up to 16 characters composed of letters numbers or the symbols 96 amp Gy t L1 2aswellas the comma and period Labeling procedure 1 Goto the display in which you want to create a label For example go to Stage or Blind to label cues submasters groups or focus points Go to the Time Code Events display to label an event 2 Atth
207. ess Clear to end dimmer check Actions Prompt reads Enter dimmer number s then press AT to select level Keypad corner reads Dim 1 Prompt reads Select dimmer level Press FULL button for 100 Prompt reads To unpatch dimmer for dimmer check press ENTER To park or unpark dimmer s press PARK Dimmer 1 is set at 75 percent Dimmer Check window appears Prompt reads Press or to step through dimmers Press Clear to cancel dimmer check Dimmer 1 returns to zero dimmer 2 is set at 75 percent a If the dimmer is doubled the dimmer check is performed on dimmer A of the doubled dimmer first Pressing moves to dimmer B of the doubled dimmer 74 f a dimmer is parked the Dimmer Check window displays a Parked message and shows the level at which it is parked The Dimmer Check does not change a parked dimmer s level on stage 50 Chapter 4 Patching channels About Dimmer The About Dimmer display tells you about the characteristics patch and use of individual dimmers For the contents of the About Dimmer display when using ETCLink see About Dimmer with ETCLink page 52 For similar information about channels see About Channel page 65 Go to the About Dimmer display as follows 2 Keystrokes 1 Press About Dim 2 Press 8 3 Press Enter Action Prompt reads About Select dimmer number then press ENTER Keypad corner reads Dim 3 About Dimmer window i
208. ess Enter or press Clear to cancel the operation Action Selects Setup display Selects Diskette Functions menu Screen clears and Read System Parameters window appears Message in record window appears and remains until read is complete Read system configuration in progress 32 System configuration information was not saved on diskette for shows recorded prior to version 3 03 software Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 255 256 Chapter 20 Diskette functions Chapter 21 Printing The console supports parallel printers including some laser printers Printer installation is described in nstalling a printer page 337 This chapter includes instructions for using the console s print options the following printouts are introduced and explained in this chapter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Stage display Cues Groups Submasters Cue list Group list Submaster list Macros Patch Profiles Channel attributes Real Time Programs Time Code events Focus Points Focus Points List Moving Lights Tracksheet 257 258 Printer options Before you begin printing verify that your printer is installed correctly and that it is turned on For instructions on installing printers see nstalling a printer page 337 All print options are located on the Print Functions menu To display the menu press Setup then select 5 Print Functions and press Enter The console displays the Print Functions menu
209. ess Enter to advance the cursor across the event line e Press horizontal arrows to move to other fields in the event line e Press vertical arrows to move up or down to other events e Press the right arrow at the end of an event line to move the pointer to the first field of the next event e Press the down arrow in the last event to create a new event 298 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Creating a program by definition Use the following procedure to define a time code program in the Time Code Events display A time code program created in this manner is not recorded until you leave the Time Code Events display which sorts the program s events as well Keystrokes Actions 1 Enter 1 0 0 Enter Selects one second as the time of the first event you want to create Prompt reads Select A B Cue 2 Press 1 Enter Enters cue 1 for event 1 to play on the AJB fader Prompt reads Select A B Rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 3 Press 1 2 5 Enter Enters a rate of 125 percent of the recorded fade rate Corner reads Rate 125 4 Press Enter Highlight moves to the C D field Prompt reads Select C D Cue 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 Moves the highlight to the Bump field for fader C D Prompt reads Select submaster number for bump event then press for ON or for OFF 6 Press 1 2 Enter P Selects submaster 12 and turns the submaster ON Prompt reads Select Bump Rate 0 to 2000 100 z normal
210. ession 3 User Manual v 3 1 245 Link List overview Press Setup 1 1 Channel Attributes Enter S7 Link List to reach the Link List display Chan Y Chan channe emm When two or more channels are used together such as the color and intensity channels for a color scroller the Link List allows you to determine which of the wheels will control each channel When you select a channel it is placed under the control of one of the wheels and all channels linked to it are also selected and placed under control of the other wheel Links may contain up to ten channels on each of the X and Y lists Channels on the X list are controlled by the X wheel and are shown in gold in displays channels on the Y list are controlled by the Y wheel and are shown in yellow in displays Each channel may appear in only one link All channels in a link from one list are selected if any channel is selected from the other list 246 Chapter 19 Link lists Setting up a link To set up a link you must assign at least one channel to the X channel list and one channel to the Y channel list In the following example two color scrollers are linked so that their color settings are controlled by the wheels For the two scrollers color is controlled by channels 1 and 11 respectively To link two channels follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Press S7 Link List Pres
211. essor does not contact the backup processor within 30 seconds the following message appears System B does not respond System A is now operating as a stand alone system System B has been disconnected from the network To reconnect System B to the network you must reboot both System A and System B Press Clear to remove the message You can now use the main console in normal single console operation If either console fails the other console takes control automatically and allows you to use the functioning console in normal single console operation If the link between the two consoles is interrupted the system informs you and allows you to use both consoles in normal single console operation Full Tracking Backup with an LPC A Full Tracking Backup system may consist of two tracking consoles or of one console and a Lighting Playback Controller LPC In a system that includes an LPC the A B keyswitch on the console remains active regardless of which processor is in control You can always use the keyswitch to switch from one to the other For more information regarding running a show from an LPC please refer to the LPC QuickGuide that came with your LPC 322 Chapter 25 Accessories Moving Lights Module The Moving Lights Module ML Module is an option for Expression 2x consoles It is a free standing device containing the page buttons and encoders that are standard equipment on all Expression 3 consoles With moving ligh
212. every control output 4 Press 1 0 0 to enter the Corner reads desired number of Chan 100 channels 5b Press Enter Number of channels is set to 100 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 25 Setting default fade times The console assumes default values for upfade and downfade times but you can change them Change all fade times at once by changing the default values as explained below You can also change fade times individually as explained under Recording a cue with a single fade time page 91 and also under Recording a cue with split fade times page 92 8 Fade times may be programmed from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes The number may be entered in normal time format or in decimal format When entered with a decimal point the number must be less than one minute 0 1 to 59 9 seconds to be accepted When entered without a decimal point a 2 digit number will be treated as seconds if less than 60 and as a calculated value of minutes and seconds if between 60 and 99 For example if you enter 70 the time will display as 1 10 If you enter either a 3 digit or a 4 digit number the last two digits up to 59 are interpreted as seconds For example if you enter 9930 the time will display as 99 30 Follow these steps to assign new default fade times Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 3 Default Fade Prompt reads
213. ey The default value for Level is 100 percent See Setting default Level key page 27 for instructions on changing the Level key s setting For example if Level is set at 75 percent press 1 Thru 5 Level to set channels 1 2 3 4 and 5 to 75 percent Flash Flash sets the selected channel s level to 100 percent if the channel is currently at a level at or below 50 percent If the channel s level is above 50 percent Flash sets it to zero Levels set by Flash are only maintained while the key is pressed For example press Channel 5 then press and hold S8 Flash to set channel 5 to either 100 or zero 32 To clear channels press At Clear Chapter 5 Setting channel levels Sneak Sneak is a softkey that you can use to fade channels on stage to a level you choose in a specific time or to restore channels to the last level at which they were set with a fader or submaster For example if you bring up a cue then change the look you can use sneak to go back to the look created by the original cue You can use Sneak with groups submasters and focus points as well as with cues If you do not indicate a time the sneak occurs in the default sneak time set in System Settings Follow these steps to use Sneak to set a channel level Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press S1 Sneak Selects Sneak mode Prompt reads Sneak mode Select channels then press ENTER to sneak or
214. fade type 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Effect 4 Subroutine or 5 Blocking Select subroutine fade type Prompt reads Select step number s then press ENTER Selects step 1 Prompt reads Enter cue number to fade or press STYLE to change step type Selects cue 1 for step 1 Prompt reads Enter type of cue 1 Crossfade 2 Allfade 3 Blocking Designates cue as a crossfade within the subroutine Prompt reads Enter intensity Selects a level of 55 percent for the cue within the subroutine Prompt reads Enter upfade time Sets an upfade time of 8 seconds Prompt reads Enter downfade time Sets a downfade time of 8 seconds Prompt reads Enter follow time Sets a follow time of 20 seconds Step 1 is now complete Selects step 2 to edit Adds additional steps to the subroutine Chapter 17 Subroutines 20 VAR Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press S1 Step 6 Enter Press S8 Style to select a subroutine style You may need to press S7 More Softkeys first Press 3 Enter Press 8 Enter Press 2 Complete entering all cue steps and style steps as described above Press Record enter cue number and press Enter to record subroutine cue a Blocking is the default Selects step 6 to edit Prompt reads Select style of subroutine command 1 Loop 2 Bounce 3 Jump to cue 4 Hold for go Selects Jump to cue style for step
215. fader leaving it in the fader where it stopped or press Go to resume the fade Back Each fader has its own Back key Press Back to replay the cue most recently played on that fader Press Back again to play the cue before it on the Cue List and so forth moving backward through the Cue List Cues play back using the fade and wait times recorded with the cue The cue following the cue replayed by pressing Back becomes the first cue in the Cue List If you then press Go that cue plays Replaying with Back ignores cue links This example demonstrates the use of the Go Hold and Back keys Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage mode display 2 Press Cue 2 Selects cue 2 3 Press Go Runs cue 2 4 While cueisrunning press Running cue pauses Hold 5 Press Go Cue resumes Once cue finishes press Previous cue fades up on stage Back 24 The default fader clear time is zero which means that pressing Clear ends a downfade immediately For instructions on changing fader clear time see Setting default fader clear time page 27 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 127 Playback Cue List The Playback Cue List shown below is a short list of cues in the show It displays on the Playback in the lower section of the monitor usually the left monitor Shown along with cues are cue attributes such as fade timing linking and the cue s label if any Cue indicators The color in which a cue
216. fading in the background with Cue 1 timing and channel Chan 2 starts fading in the foreground to level 50 with Cue 2 timing e If Cue starts before Cue 2 ends channels Chan 1 and Chan 3 start fading in the foreground to level 50 with Cue 3 timing channel Chan 2 continues fading in the background with Cue 2 timing Chapter 1 Introduction Enabling LTP You can set a channel s status to LTP or HTP as long as the channel is not used in Fixture Patch If the channel is patched to a fixture the personality controls the HTP LTP status All attributes channels are set to LTP by a personality except the intensity attribute All channels not patched to a fixture default to HTP considered normal Set channels to HTP or LTP either singly or in ranges in the Channel Attributes display using the following procedures Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Selects the channel attributes display 2 Press 1 Thru 1 0 Specifies channels 1 through 10 Enter Press gt gt gt gt Move to LTP field Press 1 Sets channels to LTP Working with LTP channels Background overrides Cues running in the background can be stopped adjusted or otherwise controlled with background overrides There are five override options as shown in the table below Background Override Operations Clear Cue s Clears cue levels Cancel Cue s Stops the fade or effect Finish Cue s Takes cue channels to their comp
217. fatal messages and secondary messages Fatal messages deal with anything that could potentially terminate or drastically change the look of your show You may set fatal messages to be displayed even when secondary messages have been disabled Secondary messages deal with individual dimmer problems and warnings of potential rack temperature problems These messages are generally less critical than the fatal messages If you wish secondary messages may be disabled without disabling fatal messages The procedure for enabling or disabling ETCLink error messages is given in the next section The console shows error messages in pop up advisory windows that appear regardless of which display mode you have chosen They may also appear in abbreviated forms on the Status and About screens Advisories are cleared as soon as you enter any keystroke An example of such an Advisory message is shown below 01 19 PM 05 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 18 19 20 021 22 dv i sory Dimmer 1 output has failed off 046 Either the circuit breaker has tripped or the dimmer needs to be replaced Press Clear to continue 076 77 7 Cue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label 1 XF 5 Cues left 600 S1 S2 3 S4 5 6 E T4 S8 Backgrnd Previous More Sneak D Duerr ides Page age Sof tkeusl Fixture 2 See ETCLink errors page 357 for a listing of errors To identify errors on specific dimmers see About Dimmer with ETCLink page 52
218. ffects to create similar looks However subroutines have some advantages over effects You can also create nested loops or even use an effect cue as a step in a subroutine This chapter contains the following sections e Steps e Cue steps e Style steps e Creating a subroutine e Editing a subroutine e Deleting a step e Inserting a step Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 227 Steps All subroutine steps are either cue steps or style steps A cue step contains an existing recorded cue which may be an effect cue The subroutine lets you change levels and fade rates for the cue step without changing the original cues A style step contains an instruction that controls the subroutine s playback pattern This allows you to run loops run bounces pause the subroutine until you press go or end the subroutine and jump to any other cue The following display shows a subroutine that runs a series of cues in a loop Time Rate Lobel Subroutine SUB CUE 77 The next two pages describe the types of cue and style steps that are available Cue steps There are three types of cue steps e Crossfade A crossfade step is a cue in which all increasing levels fade in the upfade time and all decreasing levels fade in the downfade time e Allfade An allfade step is a cue in which all channels in both faders fade to a level that you choose and assign to the step e Blocking A blocking step is a cue that first stops all background cues f
219. g lights The Moving Lights option from the Print Functions menu brings up an additional menu called the Print Moving Lights menu The four options on this menu and the printouts they produce are explained below 1 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Personalities Lists all personalities in the show and identifies the attributes of each by channel order name data type independent sta tus LTP status and Flip status Fixture Patch Lists all fixtures in the show according to all parame ters in fixture patch Also identifies the channel assigned to the fix ture s intensity attribute Attribute Setup Lists the setup in the show for all 64 attributes by number name and category of assignment Encoder Setup Lists the page by page setup in the show for all five encoders for the two wheels and for the two axes of the pointing device if installed 259 260 Chapter 21 Printing Chapter 22 Clear functions This chapter includes instructions for using the console s clear options Each of the following clear functions is explained and illustrated on the following pages Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Show Cues Groups Submasters Show and patch Focus points Designer s Worksheet Macros Reset patch Reset profiles Channel attributes Real Time Programs Time code events Moving lights 261 Clear functions Each option on the Clear Functions menu erases information regarding a console function from the conso
220. gations during the warranty period under this warranty are to notify ETC at ETC s address within one week of any suspected defect and to return the goods prepaid to ETC at their factory or authorized service center Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 THIS WARRANTY IS CONTINGENT ON THE CUSTOMER S FULL AND TIMELY COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS OF PAYMENT SET FORTH IN THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OF OTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITIES ON OUR PART THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT NO OTHER REPRESENTATIONS WERE MADE TO HIM OR RELIED UPON BY HIM WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY AND FUNCTION OF THE GOODS SOLD This written warranty is intended as a complete and exclusive statement of the terms thereof Prior dealings or trade usage shall not be relevant to modify explain or vary this warranty Acceptance of or acquiescing in a course of performance under this warranty shall not modify the meaning of this agreement even though either party has knowledge of the performance and a chance to object Terms and Conditions The following terms and conditions and those on the face hereof shall control as to any order accepted by Electronic Theatre Controls Inc ETC notwithstanding any terms and conditions that may be contained in any purchase order or other document of Customer
221. gel Selects the stage display 2 Press Record 5 Prepare to record to cue 5 3 Press S7 More Softkeys until S4 reads DMX In 4 Press S4 DMX In Selects DMX In channels Enter 5 Press Enter Records DMX In levels to cue 5 a Press Except before pressing S4 in this step to record all active channels except DMX In channels Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 295 Using DMX In to set levels You may be interested in having your cues or other recorded elements reflect DMX In levels continuously not just at one point in time The console allows you to do that by recording with reference to focus point 0 which always contains the current value of DMX In after DMX In is enabled The following procedure illustrates how to record a cue with reference to focus point O Assume for this example that DMX In was enabled for channels starting at channel 600 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects the stage display 2 Press Channel 6 0 0 Sets channels 600 699 at levels Thru 6 9 9 Focus established in focus point O Point 0 Enter 3 Press Record Cue 5 Records cue 5 Enter Viewing DMX In View DMX In channels with the Fader display Either choose option 5 when entering the Fader display or press S1 Select Fader while you re in the Fader display 296 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Time Code You can create and run shows that respond to programming based on a standardized tim
222. groups You may copy a group in Stage or Blind with small differences in the procedure and prompts that occur The following procedure illustrates how to copy a group in Stage Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press Group Prompt reads Group mode Select group number to use as group 3 Press 1 Enters the number of the group you wish to copy Corner reads Group 1 4 Press Full Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit 5 Once the group is Prompt reads displayed press Record To record group select number and Group press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 5 Enter Enters the number of the new group and completes the Copy Corner reads Group 5 a To copy a group s channels and levels to a cue or a submaster press Cue or Sub in place of Group in step 5 28 You can delete all groups at once with the Clear Groups option from the Clear Functions menu See Clear and reset options page 263 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 143 144 Using cues and submasters as groups You may treat channels recorded in a cue or submaster as if they were in a group such as to bring them up in Stage or record them into other cues or submasters For example follow this procedure to bring up a cue in Stage as a group Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Group
223. h bar represents the percentage of the full fade level defined as intensity Twenty of these bars are editable for intensity and are called fade points In between the 20 editable fade points are the remaining 20 bars and these indicate the calculated intensity levels between fade points 20 See Proportional patching page 42 if you want to use this procedure to assign a proportional level to the dimmer Chapter 4 Patching channels Also the Profiles display contains the following information e The profile s number and name if labeled see Labeling Profiles below e For each fade point the percent of the fade complete at that point Each fade point contributes 596 to the total fade e For each fade point the intensity at that point S Ay Select a fade point Change the intensity X Yellow numbers Fade point percentage and intensity values Yellow bar Fade percent point selected Note Use At to set the level with the keyboard or use At or At to bump the level by one Creating or editing a profile If you need a profile that is different from any of the ten provided you can either edit one of those that already exists but not default profile 0 or create a new one As you edit the profile changes to display the results Edit intensities in the Profiles display as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press S1 Profile 11 2 Selects profile 12 Enter Prompt reads S
224. han 1 Cue 1 50 Cue 1 1 50 Cue 2 50 Cue 3 50 Cue 4 25 Cue 5 00 Figure 6 Channel 5 tracks through cue 5 and ruins the blackout cue Chan 2 FF FF FF 00 Chan 3 FF FF 00 Chan 4 50 00 FF 00 Chan 5 FF FF FF FF FF FF Chapter 8 Track If cue 5 is an allfade the console records all unused channels at 00 percent In the example below an allfade enters 00 in channel 5 cue 5 When you track channel 5 through the sequence it won t track through the blackout cue To select the allfade type for cue 5 enter these keystrokes Blind 5 Type 2 Selects allfade fade type Record Enter Re records cue Now when we track channel 5 through the sequence cue 5 blocks the track The result is illustrated in Figure 7 Chan 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chanb5 Cue 1 50 FF Cue 1 1 50 50 FF Cue 2 50 FF 00 FF Cue 3 50 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 00 Figure 7 For more information on cue fade types see Cue types page 86 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 115 Using Tracksheet With the Tracksheet display you can track one channel at a time through any group of cues at any level including zero Tracksheet is useful when you want to track a channel through blackout cues or when you want to complete a track that has been blocked To track a channel follow these steps Keystrokes 1 116 Press Tracksheet Press 5 Press Cuel Press 2 Thru
225. hange wheel Wheel ticks 0 1 1 8191 412 596 8192 12 5 655 1 655 1 Controller change 77 Controller change 77 Controller change 78 Controller change 79 Controller change 80 Controller change 81 Controller change 82 Controller change 83 Controller change 84 Controller change 85 Controller change 86 Controller change 87 Controller change 88 Controller change 89 Controller change 90 Controller change 91 Controller change 92 Pitch bend value hexadecimal 2000 2001 1 FFF 3FFF 0 228F 1D71 parameter 0 parameters 1 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters O 127 parameters 0 127 parameters O 103 parameters 1 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters 0 127 parameters O 127 parameters 0 127 parameters O 103 Message values decimal II 0 mm 64 lI 1 mm 64 lI 127 mm 63 ll 127 mm 127 II 0 mm 0 lI 15 mm 69 ll 113 mm 58 Chapter 24 Control interfaces MIDI Show Control MSC The consoles recognize the following MSC commands which may be either transmitted or received all other commands are ignored e Go e Stop e Resume e Fire Configuring MIDI Show Control The console can receive MSC information send MSC information or both Enable the sending and receiving of MSC information by specifying the device s that will act as the sender and receiver with res
226. he back panel Repeat for second monitor using CRT 2 4 Insert the female end of the console power cord into the connector labeled Power in on the console s back panel 5 Insert the female end of the monitor power cord into the connector on the back of the monitor 6 Insert the male end of the monitor power cords into the console connector labeled Switched AC Outlets The switched AC outlets provide the same voltage as that supplied to the console in Step 7 below 7 Insert the male end of the console power cord into a grounded power outlet VGA monitor connections Connector HD DB15 female VGA monitor pinout 1 Red video 2 Green video 3 Blue video 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Red ground 7 Green ground 8 Blue ground 9 notconnected 10 Ground 11 Ground 12 not connected 13 Horizontal H V sync 14 Vertical sync 15 not connected Note In some installations you may need additional grounding An additional grounding location is provided on the rear of the console for this purpose This console is not certified for use in wet locations Appendix A Installation Understanding ETCNet The console is capable of operating with other devices in local area networks ETC has two such networks ETCNet and ETCNet2 and both operate using Ethernet protocols None of the Expression family consoles are capable of operating directly on ETCNet2 One exception is through the use of a ETCNet2 DMX Node as a DMX to ETCNet2 converter but t
227. he cue list runs in the A B fader e facue number is sent the specified cue runs on the AJB fader e facue number is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry that cue runs on the C D fader Go e f cue 0 is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry the command presses C D Go The pending cue runs in the C D fader You may also press A B Go by sending Go Cue 0 1 e The Stop command by itself holds all fades in both Stop fader pairs e If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only the cue running in the A B fader holds e If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue running in the C D fader holds e The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent e The Resume command by itself resumes all Resume holding fades in both fader pairs e f Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only a cue holding in the A B fader resumes e f Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue holding in the C D fader resumes e The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent e The Fire command executes a specified macro Macro number must be in the range 1 127 If no macro is specified or if the macro number is out of range the command is ignored Fire 284 Chapter 24 Control interfaces MSC commands transmitted by the console MIDI Show Control MSC allows the consol
228. hen you perform a Read System Configuration From Disk operation These configuration items are identified by the display in which each may be edited System Settings display Blackout key Flexichannel Master type Record lockout Bump keys Options Settings display ETC MIDI channel ETC MIDI show control device IDs DMX In starting channel Infrared remote ETCLink enable ETCLink address Real Time Programs enable External port Baud rate ETCLink Functions display Display advisories Clock Functions display 12 24 hour clock Latitude Longitude Time zone 360 Appendix D Showfile Appendix E Softkeys Stage Stage 2 Sneak Enable Disable Quickstep Update Sub List Background Overrides Solo Previous Page DMX In Next Page Rate Park Delete More Softkeys gt Stage 2 More Softkeys gt Stage 3 Fixture Flash Stage Fixture Only Position Image Color Beam None Attribute More Softkeys gt Stage Return Step Blind Cue Fixture Blind Cue Select Cue Cue List Cue List Spreadsheet Cue SS Solo Previous Page Next Page Rate Delete Cue More Softkeys Cue 2 More Softkeys Cue Fixture Cue List Blind Cue Cue SS Select Cue Create Cue Rate Replace Level Previous Page Previous Page Next Page Next Page D
229. his network configuration will not be discussed in this User Manual When operating on ETCNet any network interface device connected to the network mimics the output of the console Your network devices can be the older style Remote Interface Unit RIU devices or Remote Video Interface RVI devices Or they may be ETC s newest remote interface devices including the ETCNet2 DMX Node and the ETCNet2 Video Node You can mix and match old and new interface devices in your network Only the newer nodes are capable of operating on ETCNet2 Installing interface devices To install RIU or RVI devices follow the instructions given in the Reference appendix of this manual To install an ETCNet2 node see the separate Installation Guide for that device Network wiring Your console may be connected to the network using either thinnet BNC or twisted pair RJ45 wiring If you are connecting your console directly to an ETCNet2 interface device you must use twisted pair wiring If you use more than one remote interface device you must use a hub If the hub has thinnet ports you can connect the console and older interface devices to the hub using either twisted pair or thinnet but you must use twisted pair when connecting any ETCNet2 interfaces to the network Preparing interface devices Every device operating on your ETC network must be running the same system software If you have a new system most likely the software installed in each devic
230. hold Press bump button to begin downfade Red Solid Inhibitive submaster loaded Red Slow Blink New submaster is an inhibitive submaster Loads when slider reaches home position Red Fast Blink Inhibitive submaster on timed hold Press bump button to begin downfade If the LED on a slider is blinking slowly it means that you have changed pages and a new submaster is waiting to load The old submaster stays loaded until you move the slider to the home position If the green LED is blinking move the slider to zero If the red LED is blinking move the slider to 10 If the submasters are changing type you may need to do both When the slider reaches home the channel levels from the new page replace the old levels Note If a submaster slider has both a submaster loading and a submaster on hold the submaster on hold takes priority and the LED blinks fast Press the bump button to downfade the old submaster Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 163 Recording submasters You can create submasters in Stage or Blind mode Follow these steps to record a simple pile on submaster Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Select channels and set Creates look channel levels 3 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Sub 5 Enter The current stage look is recorded into Or submaster 5 Press Submaster 5 s bump button Note Use So
231. ially terminate or drastically change the look of your show You may set fatal messages to be displayed even when secondary messages have been disabled Secondary messages deal with individual dimmer problems and warnings of potential rack temperature problems These messages are generally less critical than the fatal messages If you wish secondary messages may be disabled without disabling fatal messages See Error messages page 267 for more information Fatal messages Dimmer has shut down due to an overtemperature condition The dimmer will remain shut down until the condition is cleared at the dimmer rack Use Dimmer Status to determine the rack number for the dimmer Rack DMX port A B failure Either there is a problem with the DMX cabling connections between the console and the rack or the rack has been configured incorrectly Rack A B C phase input main voltage is in error at V Rack input main frequency is out of spec at Hz Rack has shut down due to fan failure or other interruption of air flow Please check the rack looking for dirty air filters blocked air passages or fan failure ETCLink has failed Please check cabling and connections If the problem persists please call a qualified service technician Rack processor error Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 357 Secondary Messages Dimmer has a load but the recorded load is zero Because the recorded load is zero the Dimmer Monitoring sys
232. ich to jump Hold for Go The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Hold for Go step It then pauses until you press Go Subroutine attributes The following attributes may be applied to each cue step Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Level Sets an intensity level for the cue within the subroutine The level proportionally affects the channel levels assigned to the original cue Levels must be entered as two digit numbers e g 20 for 20 percent 05 for five percent Use Full for 100 percent Fade times Upfade times may range from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes If you do not enter a time the downfade will match the upfade Follow time Follow time is the time between the start of one step and the start of the next Follow times may range from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes 229 230 Creating subroutines Create subroutines in the Blind display A subroutine can have up to 100 Steps Each step lists a cue or a style To create a subroutine follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Create the cues you want to use in your subroutine Press Blind Press Cue 7 Press Type Press 4 Subroutine Press 1 gt Press 1 5 Press 1 Press 5 5 Press 8 gt Press gt Press 2 0 Press S1 Step 2 Enter Repeat steps 7 through 13 Action Displays Blind mode screen Selects cue 7 Displays fade type menu Prompt reads Select
233. iently you must first determine what constitutes a normal load The console procedure for determining normal loads is called Record Loads and it is explained in the next section You may also perform a Record Loads procedure from the Sensor system Load Management display The Load Management lists dimmers for which load errors have been detected either by the Sensor system or by a Load Check you initiated If you have a printer attached to your system you may print the data shown in the Load Management display by pressing S1 Print Screen An example of a Load Management display is shown below If load errors are reported for many dimmers Use Page and Page to page through the display e Recorded Load lists the loads determined for the listed dimmers during a Record Loads procedure e Actual Load lists the current loads for the listed dimmers Loads may not be recorded on Sensor systems without the AF option See the Sensor CEM Users Manual for more information on recording loads from your dimming system Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring Record Loads procedure Perform a Record Loads any time you relamp your fixtures change the type of fixtures you are using change the dimmer numbering scheme or make any other significant changes to your system In general Record Loads should be the last step in setting up your system When you perform a Record Loads the system records load information for dimmers set at a leve
234. imere de tk uu 89 Subroutine nanana anaana eee 86 Subroutine StepS 228 VDO HE t sick me eO ecd RM SS 86 Update eret 102 103 MW a E A a 87 Custom patCh o oooooooo o o 41 D Data Type 6 ee 59 Date set Clock wu sse dcs reed 34 Default Channel Submaster link 32 Dimmer profileS 48 Encode s 5 eem ped bathe ree 79 Fade MiNaS 26 Fader Clear Time 27 EA aeu ortos 27 Submaster times 164 Index Delete ETENOE 242 n tte 354 CU OS MERE aoa E 104 Remote Interface 351 O een t o egt 74 Remote Video Interface 353 354 Focus point cores 155 Disable GIOUDas Cu om ear dd eU 143 Blackout KGy zov eder eeu 31 Bl cM pM UEM 250 Bump buttons 33 Mac sk de A oe eels p 241 Flexichannel 0040 31 Part of multipart cue 121 MIDI Show Control 283 REGION amp c cbe bee SE 319 Record Lockout 33 SMPTE eventS 303 Discover nodes 347 Submaster 005 177 Diskette Designer s Worksheet Drive specifications 374 Clear regions 263 319 Erase diskette 252 Copy RegiON o o o ooo o 318 Error messages 356 DIP switch settings 340 FORMAT joc ake Shek hA 252 Explained ost aor 315 Management 252 Programming regions 316 A tes 254 Setting options
235. immediately on stage Use the procedure below to add channels and set levels for effect cue 100 assumed to have been previously created Keystrokes 1 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Stagel Cue 1 O 0 Press S8 Fixture 4 Thru 6 Full Set the pan and tilt levels Press S2 Update Press 7 More Softkeys until you see Step at softkey S8 Press S8 Step 1 Press Only S8 Fixture 5 Press Enter Press Rel Rel Repeat steps 2 through 8 a Action Selects effect cue 100 in Stage Selects fixture 4 and 6 and sets their intensity levels to full Sets the levels of the position attributes of all selected fixtures Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER To update step press STEP Selects step 1 Prompt reads Select step number Restricts the update to fixture 5 Prompt reads Select fixture number s To cancel press CLEAR Updates step 1 of cue 100 Clears captured channels Update other steps in the same cue Use your mouse or equivalent pointing device if available b Optional step If not restricted with Only all captured and selected channels are included in the update For more information on the uses of Only see The Only command page 8 215 Editing channel levels Regardless how channels were added to the effect channels may be individually edited in the effect either individually or in ranges Level
236. in Flexichannel mode 61 Setting channel levels lllsee eee 62 Level wheel oo 62 Bull m ie detur end ea YU RUE UE ace de on d ea ale 62 IOV SI qe MR O A MEER 62 Flash de o e oec Rr EE Ue Cb pee s 62 Sea raya Aus ade AA ee PA ac otf N rae S Cof ern d 63 Channel check ie oca ex ater eto en ae ae e UE e cd A 64 AboutChartiel eue Eiee cete re tue E 65 Features of the display 00002 eee 65 Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show 67 Moving Light Functions menu 00002 22 sls 68 PersonalitysSetup 4 sms e Lek dd 69 Go to the Personality Setup display 69 Loading personalities into the console 70 Viewing a personality 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 71 Deleting personaliti6S gt 2 xar ai RE ced 71 Resetting defaults 0 20 00 ssl 71 Patching MOVING IIgbts sacs sa reden rt umet nbn bee ga 72 Go to the Fixture Patch display ooo o oooooo o 72 Patching one fixture or a fixture range 73 Editing the TRUST soe em tipo PS PR pU wees 74 Attribute Set p parar ur d bed hw ess oio pa ox Ae dd 75 Go to the Attribute Setup display o o o o o o o 76 Encoder Setup uu c tee ae RERO PAARE DEP 77 Level setting controls for Expression 3 77 Level setting controls for Expression 2x 77 Go to the Encoder Setup display o
237. in the background ends when its last fading channel has finished or a background override ends the cue prematurely Sometimes however you would like to end a background cue prematurely The way to do that is to follow the background cue with a blocking cue A blocking cue does to timing what an allfade cue does to level As soon as an allfade cue is started all unused channels are forced to zero Similarly when a blocking cue starts all channels running in background cues are faded to completion in the blocking cue s timing A blocking cue ends all background cues Aside from its initial effect on background cues the blocking cue runs from that point on just like any other cue including the possibility that it could be forced to the background itself by the next cue Chapter 1 Introduction Moving light concepts and terms Fixtures Conventional lights sometimes called fixtures are single attribute devices whose intensity can be controlled by a console connected to a dimmer In this User Manual however the term fixture is often used to refer to multi attribute devices such as moving lights to distinguish them from conventional lights The programming methods in this manual apply to any multi attribute device controlled by DMX512 as to moving lights Fixture attributes Every fixture has a set of attributes that you use to control it For instance a basic moving light might have only three attributes intensity pan and tilt Y
238. ine as well and free the console for other purposes One advantage of using Expression Off Line is that you can print lists from your show without attaching a printer to the console Another advantage is that you can label elements in your show without the need to attach a keyboard to your console Expression Off Line is available without charge from ETC It can be ordered through your dealer or directly from ETC at 800 775 4382 You can also download Expression Off Line from the ETC website at www etcconnect com Chapter 25 Accessories Appendix A Installation This appendix includes instructions for installing your console and optional accessories Chapter 3 System settings and Chapter 4 Patching channels include instructions for entering the software settings you will probably update before you begin a new show Appendix A includes the following installation procedures Installing your console Installing your monitors Installing a mouse or other pointing device Connecting your dimmers System configuration Installing the alohanumeric keyboard Installing a printer Installing Designer s Worksheet Installing Remote Focus Unit MIDI SMPTE ETCNet Installing remote video monitors Installing Full Tracking Backup Installing Remote Macros An illustration of the console s back panel is shown on the next page Operating instructions for optional accessories are included in Chapter 25 Accessories page 313 Expression 3 User
239. ing to Stage mode This allows you to bring channels up on stage to view the proportional settings of dimmers assigned to a channel while you set them To select channels from the patch screen follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Patch Press Channel Use the keypad to enter the desired channel number s Use And and Thru if you want to select more than one channel Press Full to set channel level at 100 percent Level to set channel at the default level or press At and enter a level setting Press Rel to release channel s Action Selects Patch display Prompt reads Select channel numbers Prompt reads Select channel numbers Selected channels are set at the indicated level 49 Dimmer check The console s dimmer check allows you to raise unparked dimmers to a specified level on stage one at a time Select the starting dimmer set it at a level and then use to check consecutive dimmers You may do a dimmer check in any display except Patch and Park Perform a dimmer check with the following procedure Keystrokes 1 Press Dim 2 Press 1 to start dimmer check with dimmer 1 3 Press At 4 Press 7 5 to set the dimmer s level at 75 percent You may also press Full or Level to set the dimmer at 100 percent or at the Level setting 5 Press Enter 6 Press to select dimmer 2 Repeat as necessary Pr
240. ired to four connectors on the LPC rear panel These macros are numbered 1 901 through 1 932 See the Expression LPC QuickGuide for further information Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 312 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Chapter 25 Accessories Chapter 25 provides information about the following lighting system accessories e Remote Focus Unit RFU e Designer s Worksheet e Alphanumeric keyboard e Full Tracking Backup e Moving Light Module e Expression Off Line For accessory installation instructions see Appendix A Installation page 325 For purchase information please contact your local dealer or ETC Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 313 314 Remote Focus Unit RFU The Remote Focus Unit RFU is a small portable control panel you can use from a remote location such as in the house on your studio set or from backstage with or without a remote monitor You can control most console functions not submasters with an RFU The console keypad and RFU are able to operate simultaneously Changes made from both console and RFU are displayed immediately on both the console monitor and the RFU Remote Focus Unit Keypad The keys on the RFU s keypad function exactly like their counterparts on the console Fader window The top line displays the next cue on the cue list The bottom line displays the cue in the A B fader on the left and the cue in the C D fader on
241. is highlighted f Prompt reads Select A B Rate 5 Press 5 0 Sets the rate to 50 percent 6 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the remaining rate fields a Alternatively you can press other softkeys at this point to edit code time cue submaster or macro settings 14 Pressing the Learn Mode key twice is a shortcut way to reset the event list pointer See Re setting the event list pointer page 301 for information Chapter 24 Control interfaces Or if you wanted to move ten events five seconds later in a program Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 until S1 reads Select Event M Press S1 Select Event Prompt reads Select event number Press 1 1 Thru 2 0 Press S2 Code Time The time field is highlighted Prompt reads Select Code Time Press TIME to edit specific fields 5 Press Time Time Selects the seconds field for all ten events Prompt reads Select seconds 6 Press 4 five times Each time you press 4 the seconds field for each event increases by one second 7 Press Enter Sets the new times Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 307 Running a time code program You can run a time code program in three ways using the console s internal time code clock using an external time code clock or manually When using the external time code source the internal clock serves as a back up to continue the program if the external clock fails 15 Internal time code clock Follow this proc
242. isplay 2 Press Time Time Prompt reads Enter effect dwell time Press CLEAR for hold 3 Press Clear Hold appears in the Dwell box of the cue attribute line 4 Press Enter Enter Dwell time set to Hold Prompt reads Select step numbers Chapter 16 Effects Setting a random effect rate An effect runs at a rate set by the submaster or cue in which the effect is recorded t can also run at a random rate within minimum and maximum parameters Set the minimum and maximum parameters with the following procedure to control the range of randomness of the effect Keystroke Action 1 Press Blind Cue 2 Selects cue 2 in the Blind display 2 Press S7 More Displays available attributes across the Softkeys 58 Attribute bottom of the screen 3 Press S7 Random Rate Prompt reads Select low random rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 4 Press 5 0 Enter Specifies the slowest effect rate Prompt reads Select high random rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal 5 Press 2 O O Enter Specifies the highest effect rate Running an effect cue Play back effects recorded as cues on the console s A B or C D faders just as you would any other cue The effect will run using the cue s Up Dwell and Down times to determine how long the cue lasts To run the cue press Stage Cue enter the effect cue number and press Go An effect cue with a Hold dwell time runs on the fader until you press that fader s Clear ke
243. isplays sse 11 Colors IndisplayS s yan kada nacti seen PR bae ee Be e 12 Channel numbers Standard patch 000 005 12 Channel numbers Fixture patch 00 000 eee ooo 12 Channel output l velS x eevee kee ee ek eee 12 CHANGING PAGES nice Racal taaan t a 12 Display features 13 Sic AS SVO EE Wd eens 14 BING eva joe oad EWERNMC ELLE EDU UN er sued ER 14 Faden edo esten na e A Lodel m e atu 14 Elexichanriel s oe RUE RU e EU RR RR Rs 15 Updating Flexichannel 20 200002022 e eee 15 dtackshiGet ion Sane te summe Rede d Bua ates A AS a CE d 16 Patria sedie ten Eia tei ED n Ro RUM Lob sce rd dni d 17 Pare ast Rid coke he leg EY due wes UT DRE ER 18 PAY DAC AAA MERCED 19 Time Code List display 0 0 0 keii aens hii eee 20 LED GISPIGVS a ir A pad Bad AS Gu 21 A B GIS plays 5 are setenta avr Ried EE Ged ARE M 21 Next cue display oe eret rt RR eel ee 21 EN DIYs eset a ipte cres ney AAE m LL eed ans ed 21 Record display wc scone es artt ne b Best mM DU a 21 Channel Group display 0 0 00 c eee eee ees 21 Ratex display s b ess s Aa ore ULL ele d 21 Love display oo Sate pei bet eb epe dud 21 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 lii Chapter 3 System settings occ 23 Setting the number of dimmers 00000002 eee eee 24 Setting the number of channels llle 25 Setting default fade times llle 26 Setting default Level key liliis 27 Setting default fader c
244. ix B References DIP switches in earlier consoles Some models sold before Expression 3 had DIP switches located on the console s main processor board Identify these consoles by the presence of a power keyswitch on the right side of the console s face panel To gain access to these internal DIP switches raise the console s face panel as explained under Opening the console page 326 The main processor board appears as shown below LEDs 00000000 s4 ETCNet DIP a switches TEITET 1 2 red switches ETC part number Main Processor Revision 4031B4006 REV O COPYRIGHT 1993 ETC INC MADE IN THE U S A When installing ETCNet Full Tracking Backup or SMPTE for an earlier model console adjust the processor board s DIP switches according to the information below Switch packages S1 and S2 These switches are moved with a sharp pointed object ON is labeled 1 If using Twisted Pair wiring RJ45 connector for ETCNet set all switches of S1 to ON and set all switches of S2 to OFF 2 If using ThinNet wiring BNC connector for ETCNet set all switches of S1 to OFF and set all switches of S2 to ON Switch package S4 These are rocker switches OPEN is labeled Rock toward OPEN to set the switch to OPEN 1 Set DIP switch 1 to OPEN 2 Set DIP switches 2 and 3 to indicate ETCNet network status If you are using Full Tracking Backup the switches also determine which console is A and which is B DIP 2 D
245. ixture Box is cleared You can clear away the Fixture Box even in the midst of a lengthy command sequence without altering the results For instance set the intensity of fixtures 1 through 3 to full and clear away the Fixture Box in one command sequence as follows press Blind S8 Fixture 1 thru 3 Clear Full Setting levels when you have encoders Use the procedure below the Navigation and Feedback table below to set attribute levels with Expression 3 or with an Expression 2x that is equipped with an ML module Navigation and Feedback Fixture Box display with encoders P ty Select page X Select fixture Page highlighted white Fixture attributes exist on page Page highlighted yellow Selected page Attribute gold Attribute of selected fixture 1 Once the Fixture Box is on the screen use the or keys or pointing device buttons to bring the fixture you want into the box 2 If the fixture attribute you want to adjust is not in the Fixture Box change the encoder page to bring it in 3 Adjust the indicated level control device 4 Adjust the levels of other attributes for this fixture as needed by repeating Steps 2 if necessary and 3 5 Adjust the levels for other fixtures as needed by repeating Steps 1 through 3 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 81 Setting levels without encoders Use the procedure below this Navigation and Feedback table to set attri
246. keypad to enter dimmer numbers as you create your patch If you select a doubled dimmer without specifying A or B the system defaults to A See Dimmer profiles page 45 to alter a dimmer s profile The profile takes effect after the dimmer proportion if any is first applied Available only for 8 bit channels applying dimmer scaling to 16 bit channels will yield unexpected results 3 the desired dimmer number s Use And Thru or Except for multiple selections 4 5 the desired maximum output level for the digit levels i e 08 15 16 17 Note If the dimmer s level is highlighted white on red you may use and to adjust the level Press Enter to record the edited level Chapter 4 Patching channels Unpatching individual dimmers When you unpatch dimmers they are assigned to channel zero Channel zero functions as a holding area in which you may store dimmers not included in your patch It is not an actual control channel Before you begin creating a custom patch you may find it helpful to assign all dimmers to channel zero Then when you begin patching you can select dimmers from channel zero and patch them to channels as you like Dimmers assigned to channel zero are listed at the end of the channel list in the Patch display as These dimmers are not assigned to any channel but remain on the patch screen Follow these steps to assign dimmers to channel zero Key
247. keys until Rate appears at S5 4 Press S5 Rate Prompt reads Use keypad to select submaster rate 0 to 2000 100 Normal Press 1 5 0 Corner reads Rate 150 6 Press Enter Rate of 150 percent is recorded into submaster 7 f you do not enter a dwell time for a submaster the submaster defaults to a manual dwell Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 167 168 Specifying a submaster s page You may specify the page to which you record submasters For example if page 1 is loaded you can record a submaster to page 2 To do so follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Create a look in Stage 2 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster press BUMP or select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press Pagel 2 Prompt reads Select page on which to record submaster then press submaster bump button 4 Presssubmaster6 sbump Current levels are recorded into button submaster 6 on submaster page 2 Using Except to record a submaster The console allows you to program a submaster containing all the current levels on stage except for those contributed by a specific cue group or another submaster This example illustrates how you record a submaster without including levels contributed by the specified submaster Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Select desired channels and set channel levels 3 Press Record Sub Prompt reads T
248. l v 3 1 Press 5 Enter Enter Channel 1 Thru 1110 Full Press Macro Wait Press 5 Enter Enter Channel 1 Thru 1110 At 0 Enter Press Enter Macro Press M 7 Enter Inserts a five second wait into the macro Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros Sets channels 1 through 10 at Full Prompt reads Enter wait time Press ENTER when done Inserts a five second wait into the macro Prompt reads Select operation s for this macro press ENTER MACRO when done Wheels trackpad and sliders are not valid entries in macros Sets channels 1 through 10 at zero Concludes macro recording Macro 7 runs Channels 1 through 5 rise to 50 percent After five seconds channels 1 through 10 rise to Full After five seconds levels drop to zero 235 Using Macro Editing The Macro Editing display allows you to create or edit macros without affecting channel levels Some of the softkeys in this display such as S2 Replace and S7 More Softkeys are for editing purposes only and cannot be entered into a macro Others such as S1 Select Macro and several softkeys available after first pressing S7 More Softkeys may be entered into a macro Three keys that cannot be entered into a macro in the Macro Editing display are Enter Macro lt and 1 28 Insert Mode Macro
249. l 4 Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Sub 2 Press 5 3 Press Time Time 4 Press Clear Clear Press Enter Enter Action Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Selects submaster 5 Corner reads Sub 5 Prompt reads Enter dwell time For hold or manual operation press CLEAR until desired setting appears Corner reads Dwell Man Dwell time is set to Manual for submaster 5 Chapter 13 Submasters Adding a rate to a submaster Rate allows you to record submasters that play back faster or slower than their recorded fade times This can be especially helpful when you are trying to calculate complex timing information for effects loaded to a submaster Note If you adjust the rate on a submaster containing an effect the rate adjustment affects individual step timing but does not change the overall effect timing Rate is expressed as a percentage A submaster with a rate of 100 plays back at its recorded fade time A rate of 300 plays the submaster back three times faster than its recorded fade time A rate of 50 causes it to play back half as fast as its recorded fade time You may assign a rate of up to 2 000 percent To add a rate to submaster 7 follow these steps Action Keystrokes 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Sub 7 Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Press S7 More Soft
250. l Between Enter 7 Finish profile to end Resetting a profile Action Selects profile 15 Selects the 5096 fade point Changes all fade points above 5096 to undefined Selects the 7596 fade point Sets the 7596 fade point to intensity 10 Fills between the 5096 and 7596 fade points with a straight line Fade points above 7596 are unaffected Set inattentiveness of fade points between 7596 and 10096 Press S7 Reset eliminates all editing performed on a selected profile When profiles 1 9 are reset the original relationships shown under Pre defined profiles page 45 are restored When profiles 10 through 32 are reset they return to linear relationships Labeling a profile You can name any profile by assigning it a label Profile names can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long The name appears at the top left corner of the display next to the profile number and on profile printouts After pressing Label use the alphanumeric keyboard to name profiles 21 22 23 48 Undefined intensities are marked on the Intensity line You may reset all profiles at once by selecting Clear Profiles from the Clear Functions menu See Installing an alohanumeric keyboard page 336 if you do not have the keyboard installed Chapter 4 Patching channels Captured channels in Patch The console lets you select and capture channels without return
251. l above zero or for a list of dimmers If setting dimmers above zero you can record 24 dimmers per rack at a time until all non zero dimmers have been recorded If you have multiple racks 24 dimmers in each rack are recorded simultaneously Caution Record Loads changes levels on stage Dimmer outputs rise and fall for several minutes during the procedure To cancel a Record Loads operation that has already started press S7 Cancel Enter Keystrokes Action 1 Set desired dimmers to a level above zero Only dimmers at levels above zero are recorded 2 Press Setup Selects Setup display 3 Select 9 ETCLink Selects ETCLink Functions menu Functions and press Enter 4 Select 4 Load Selects Load Management display Management and press Enter 5 Press S5 Record Loads Prompt reads If you wish you may enter To record loads select dimmer s a specific dimmer or and press ENTER Enter 0 to record dimmers to record loads for all dimmers 6 Press 0 Enter Advisory reads New loads will be recorded for all dimmers with levels above zero Levels on stage will change while the Record Load is in progress The system will automatically vary the dimmer outputs during the Record Load The process may take several minutes to complete Press Enter to proceed or press Clear to cancel 7 Press Enter New loads are recorded for all dimmers with levels above zero a If you wish instead of setting
252. l have their loads checked Levels on stage will change while the Load Check is in progress The system will automatically vary the dimmer outputs during the Load Check The process may take several minutes to complete Loads are checked for all dimmers with levels above zero Once complete advisory reads Load check processing has completed Press Clear to continue a If you wish instead of setting the desired dimmers to a level in step 1 you may enter a list of dimmers to record in step 5 2 Press Setup 3 Select 9 ETCLink Functions and press Enter 4 Select 4 Load Enter 5 You may enter specific dimmers to check 6 7 with the load check or operation 6 On single phase racks the system checks 16 dimmers per rack at a time Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring Clear Loads procedure Clear Loads allows you to clear recorded loads information for selected dimmers thus disabling dimmer monitoring for those dimmers This can be useful if you know that the load on a dimmer or group of dimmers will change over the course of a show and don t want to receive load error messages every time it happens To clear recorded loads follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Ze Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Setupl Select 9 ETCLink Functions and press Enter Select 4 Load Management and press Enter Press S6 Clear Loads If you wish you may enter a specific
253. le for systems operating at other voltages or frequencies 27 The Source Four lights should be running 77V HPL lamps when operated by a doubled dimmer Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 53 54 Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack Strand CD80 dimmer racks have 48 dimmer slots Each dimmer slot holds either two 2 4kW dimmers or one 6kW or 12kW dimmer The console requires that you include all 96 possible dimmer numbers per rack in the patch Refer to the charts below to determine dimmer numbers for each slot on each rack When patching 6kW or 12kW dimmers enter the slot s odd dimmer number under the desired channel number Enter the slot s even dimmer number under channel zero For example to patch a 6kW dimmer into the last dimmer slot on the first rack enter dimmer 95 in the desired channel number and dimmer 96 in channel zero 1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 Ejea jajaja 14 16 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 33 35 26 28 30 32 34 36 ajajajaja 38 40 42 44 46 48 co co oN 92 Q O 00 e co R3 Es 3 Es 3 ool 33 oo Y Su am eo NN NA NN BW mE EE NN oo a NN 00 N pe WN O co a WW N C2 CO ES con Pu WO RO WwW 20 BA RO OO AA hbo dd ati BRA O mer pA 00 N perque as oo e ool N xm ool BW A EE oo oOo 49 51 53 55 57 59 50 52 54 56 5
254. le s memory If that information is saved in a show on a diskette it can be restored to the console Otherwise the information is lost permanently Warning Be certain to save your shows on disk before erasing information you may need in the future See Chapter 20 Diskette functions page 251 for information about saving shows All clear options are located on the Clear Functions menu To display the menu press Setup then select 4 Clear Functions and press Enter The console displays the Clear Functions menu illustrated below Menu Clear Moving Lights Clear and reset procedure Follow the procedure below for all clears and resets This example shows the prompts for the Clear Show option from the Clear Functions menu Use this procedure for all clear and reset options varying as directed by the onscreen prompts Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Displays Setup menu 2 Press 4 ClearFunctions Displays Clear Functions menu Enter Prompt reads Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 1 Clear Show Prompt reads Enter To clear show data press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter Show cleared Returns to Stage display mode 2 Press softkey S1 Reset System here to erase all show information from the console reset to a 1 to 1 patch and reset the system options and configuration to factory defaults 262 Chapter 22 Clear functions Clear and reset options Following is a list of
255. lear time o oo ooooooooo o o 27 Setting default sneak time erri nea ETE ee 28 Setting Designer s Worksheet options 040 29 Enabling the template liliis 30 Reassigning slider controls liiis 30 Enable disable Blackout key 0000002220 e eee 31 Enable disable Flexichannel 0002200000 31 Set grandmaster type 0 6 eee 32 Set channels submasters 1 to 1 2 2 2 eee 32 Record lockout ey er ake sth tle ugue qe DTE A 33 Enable disable bump buttons llle eee 33 Setting ie Clo kun iso ak pere ok eked 34 Glock fu nctions display s ru ele s 34 Daylight Savings Time ccce e ee 35 Set time date lese ees 35 12 24 hour COCK iuda RR wih A ERR E Eus 35 Latitude longitude time zone 0 cee 36 Naringi the Show necs ener tangs ug alot eid eee alah el ale Maes 37 AbOUE SNOW tes at nie OIN TORO aet fus Meee Su e ah dente 38 Chapter 4 Patchingchannels ooo 39 Selecting one to one patch issues be dad eS dde d 40 Creating a custom patch asuaan ea 41 Proportional patching 2 i exce eL sem d eX ose e og 42 Unpatching individual dimmers llle 43 Labeling diniers usa edo tee LA eti den 44 Dimmer profiles coo ea Foe we bed eee ee eed as 45 Pre defined profiles 0 0 0 200000 cece eee 45 Assigning a profile toa dmmer esses 46 Protiles display 24 x ud p Aa wath as rin tee ee
256. lect 1 Number of Prompt reads Dimmers and press Select number of dimmers then Enter press ENTER Note Fixtures require one dimmer for every control channel 4 Press 8 0 0 to enter the Corner reads desired number of Dim 800 dimmers 5 Press Enter Number of dimmers is set to 800 Chapter 3 System settings Setting the number of channels You may find that in some circumstances you don t need all the channels available in your console The system default is the maximum number of channels the console can address By reducing the channel count below this maximum you can significantly reduce processing time and free console memory for other purposes If you plan to reduce the number of channels note that when patching fixtures you need one channel for every attribute in a fixture s personality two channels for each 16 bit attribute For example a fixture s personality might require the assignment of 20 channels for the mix of attributes and data types used by that fixture If you patched five of those fixtures your console would need to provide 100 channels Follow these steps to set the channel count for your console Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 2 Number of Prompt reads Channels and press Select number of channels then Enter press ENTER Note Fixtures require one channel for
257. lect channel number s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s Records your changes to the cue Chapter 16 Effects Deleting steps You may delete any step from an effect which causes other steps to be renumbered For instance if deleting step 5 step 6 becomes step 5 step 7 becomes step 6 and so on For example to delete step 5 follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Cuel 2 Selects cue 2 2 Press S7 More Softkeys 3 Press S6 Delete Step Prompt reads Select step number to delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Usethe T and l keysto Selects step 5 highlight step 5 5 Press Enter Deletes step 5 Prompt reads Select step numbers 6 Press Record Enter Records your changes to the cue Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 219 Modifying effect attributes Attributes control how the effect plays its steps Set effect attributes by pressing S7 More Softkeys S8 Attribute Except for setting a random rate make one or more softkey selections Each softkey toggles the effect attribute so pressing it can either add or remove the selection Effect attributes are defined as follows e Positive Negative Softkey S1 toggles between the positive and negative attributes Steps in a positive effect set their channels to their High Level and set the channels of the previous step to their Low Level Steps in a negative effect
258. lects five minutes for the first event to move Copies event 1 to a new event starting at the five minute point the rest of the events maintain their original relationship in time a To move a single event you may also use the arrow keys to highlight the code time for the event you want to move then press or until the new code time is displayed in the keypad prompt window and press Enter Or use the keypad to enter the new time then press Enter 305 Editing events You may add change or delete events in the Time Code Events display The changes are effective when you quit the Time Code Event display or press the Learn Mode softkey twice 4 Follow the procedure below to edit a time code program Keystrokes Actions 1 Use the arrow keys to Selects field to edit highlight the field of the item you want to edit 2 Enter the new contents of the field If you wish to delete the item press Clear 3 Press Enter or use the arrow keys to select another field Range editing If you wish to apply a change to a range of events you may select multiple events and edit them all in a single step For example if you wanted to set the rates for your first ten events to 50 percent proceed as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 until S1 reads Select Event 2 Press S1 Select Event Prompt reads Select event number 3 Press 1 Thru 1 0 4 Press S4 Rate The first rate field
259. leted levels immediately Master Cue s Takes proportional control of cue on X Wheel levels immediately Alter Rate of Cue s Adjusts cue timing on X Wheel Control background overrides as follows Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage S3 Selects the Background Overrides list Background Overrides Press 5 Enter Specifies cue 5 3 Press Enter Specifies the override operation you want performed a Press 0 in this step to apply an override operation to all cues Identify which cue contains a particular channel from the About Channel display covered under About Channel page 65 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Effects LTP channels may be used to preserve an effect in certain channels regardless of levels in the effect Also multiple effects can run simultaneously and other looks can be provided concurrently with effects These features are available in the console when you use LTP channels When an effect cue is sandwiched between two other cues LTP channel levels in the effect cue are ignored when determining which control takes precedence A cue that runs after an effect skips over the previous effect cue to determine what happens to levels If there is a move in the current cue with respect to the same channel in the cue before the effect the channel fades in the current cue and is stolen from the effect If no move the channel continues in the effect Blocking cue A cue running
260. listed below The RVI checks DIP switch settings when the unit is turned on You must restart the unit for the new settings to take effect DIP Switch Position Function 1 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 2 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 3 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 4 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 5 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only 6 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 7 On Closed Normal operation Factory Use Only 8 Off Open Normal operation Factory Use Only Switches are either On Closed or Off Open Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 353 354 RVI ETCNet DIP switch settings In order to enable the RVI for use on the ETCNet network you must first adjust the settings of the two sets of ETCNet DIP switches You will need to use a pin or a similar fine pointed object to set the switches To set the switches follow these steps 1 Locate the two sets of DIP switches visible through the right side panel of the RVI 2 If the ETCNet cable is plugged into the BNC ThinNet connector set the back six DIP switches to Off up Set the front six to On down 3 Ifthe ETCNet cable is plugged into the RJ45 Twisted Pair connector or the DB15 ThickNet connector set the front six switches to Off up Set the back six to On down Installing remote video monitors 1256 Hillas You can have additional monitors at remote locations
261. ll cues along with their attributes The last cue that ran in the faders is highlighted in yellow and the next cue in sequence is highlighted in white This can be changed from Stage mode but not from Blind Fader status Shows current status of both fader pairs including which cues are running their fade times percentage of completion and follow time Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 19 20 Time Code List display You may toggle between the Cue List and Time Code List in the Playback display as follows 1 Press Setup 2 Choose 6 Option Settings from the Setup menu then press Enter 3 Choose 7 Display Cue Time Code List from the Option Settings menu then press Enter 4 Follow prompt to toggle the display For information about creating and interpreting time code events see Time Code page 297 Chapter 2 Monitor displays LED displays Next Cue Rate Level NB E C D Record Channel Group X Y CL CL CIO 40s Expression provides a set of seven LED displays across the top of your console face panel These displays provide information regarding your faders cues submasters groups and levels This information supplements the information supplied by the monitors A B display The A B display shows the cue number of the cue currently playing in the A B fader Next cue display The Next cue display shows the cue number of the next cue on the cue list This is the cue that will play the next time you p
262. lled through diskette drive Retrieve show and configuration contents separately or together Macro functions Up to 2 000 macro selections for programming Macros may activate any key except Enter Macro Live Learn mode Macro editing Macros programmable for Macro wait Can include in real time programs Can include in time code events Eight macros operated by remote switches Powerup macro Effects functions Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters Up to 100 steps each Live effects recording Spreadsheet editing 8 bit and 16 bit data types Variability of rate during playback Step times In Dwell Out Step fade times High Low Levels In Dwell Out Effect fade times Range editing of effect attributes and step values Appendix G Specifications Profile functions e Profiles may be assigned to dimmers e Ten preset profiles nine of which are editable e Twenty three additional profiles that may be programmed Level X and Rate Y wheels e Proportional intensity control of channels or groups e Proportional rate control of cues and submasters 0 2000 percent Encoders e Five encoder knobs e Six encoder pages e Reassignment individually or automatically with Autoload function Options e Parallel printer e Alphanumeric keyboard e Remote Focus Unit e Designer s Worksheet e Lighting Playback Controller e Full Tracking Backup e Remote Interface Unit e Remote Video Interface e SMPTE external control e Remote Macro con
263. lled when it covers both pins It is not installed when it covers one or none of the pins see illustration below Jumper Jumper not installed installed Remote Interface Unit RIU The illustration below shows the RIU s back panel and indicates the connector used by each accessory The front panel includes a connector for a digitizer and an alphanumeric keyboard The RIU back panel contains connectors for up to two monitors three DMX512 outputs and an RFU P switched outlets manufactured optional I O 6 26A sb 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Electronic Theatre Controls Inc RFU Middleton WI USA Bocteric Theato Conds ic 3130 Laura Lane Mddeton Wisconsin 53582 1784 H Patet Moda DMX out 15 E Seid f Ex 626Asb 120 VAC 50 60 Hz EINE AA CRT2 TCN amp CPT plas LLLI RI E c O dep dsp S dB 350 Appendix B References RIU DIP switch and jumper settings The RIU s main circuit board contains one 8 switch DIP at location S1 and a set of 14 jumpers at location J22 as shown in the illustration below fee qct isi aC O Main Processor Revision ETCNet card Jumpers DIP Video card Video card iii i enor mone eRe ORF ol Remove the screws that secure the top panel Raise the top panel to expose the internal circuitry Locate jumpers 1 through 14 location J22 If your network cable is plugged into the BNC conn
264. lly repudiate this contract then customer shall be entitled to recover from ETC such part of the purchase price as has been paid by customer to ETC The remedy stated in the preceding sentence shall be customer s exclusive remedy for any breach non delivery or repudiation by ETC or for any other liability of ETC to customer This exclusive remedy shall not be deemed to have failed its essential purpose so long as ETC is willing and able to repair or replace defective parts in the prescribed manner 381 382 Appendix Limited Warranty Index Numerics 16 bit About Channel RAE O E ovt Irt es 1 to 1 Patch A AB display societe tes About Channel Background overrides Explained c ltd About Dimmer Error reporting Explained iu oe ens 24 About Show 0 00000 Accessories Designer s Worksheet Full Tracking Backup ML Modul8 Remote Focus Unit Allfade cue Blackout cue 00 AO acide Aik Ge dons Subroutine step Alphanumeric keyboard Function Installation Astronomical Clock Back Ky nsn MM ore oM Back panel diagram Background Channel vaccine A ae ee as Override Backing up shows See Full Tracking Backup Backup looks Plica tees Recording System Status display Backup power fail Baud Rates pe
265. lo to record specific channels into the submaster rather than the full stage look For example 5 Thru 1 0 Solo Record Sub 5 Enter records only the current levels of channels 5 through 10 in submaster 5 regardless of what other channel levels may be up on stage Fade and dwell times for submasters Normally pressing a sub bump brings channel levels to their recorded level immediately Channels stay at full recorded levels as long as the bump button is held You can also set upfade dwell and downfade times for submasters These times are activated for each submaster by its bump button Upfade time is the length of time it takes a submaster s channels to fade to their recorded levels when the submaster bump button is pressed Dwell time is the length of time the submaster s channel levels stay at their full recorded levels before the downfade starts A manual dwell time means that you can override the bump button fades with the slider see Controlling submaster fades manually page 174 for more information Downfade time is the length of time it takes a submaster s channels to fade from their recorded levels to zero Fade times may be programmed from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes The number may be entered in normal time format or in decimal format When entered with a decimal point the number must be less than one minute 0 1 to 59 9 seconds to be accepted When entered without a decimal point a 2 digit number will be tre
266. low Keystrokes Action 1 Press Bling Selects the Blind display mode 2 Press S8 Fixture 1 0 Selects moving light fixtures 10 Thru 1 5 through 15 3 Press Only Color Restricts the selection to the color attributes of these fixtures 4 Press Record Focus Point Records the color attribute settings 7 Solo into cue 7 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Working with focus points in Stage Placing a focus point on stage You can place an entire focus point on stage with or without the focus point references then record those channels into something else If the references are present you know the channels will automatically update where they were recorded if their levels change in the focus point Follow the procedure below to place a focus point on stage with the references Note the footnote showing how to place the focus point channels on stage without the references Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Focus Point 2 Selects the channels of focus point 2 Focus Point 2 and links them to the focus point itself Prompt reads Select focus point and press ENTER 3 Press Enter Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit a To drop the reference and also the updating capability you need only select the focus point channels and set a proportional level such as press Focus Point
267. ludes the following sections e Recording a multipart cue e Converting a standard cue to a multipart cue e Wait times in multipart cues e Editing a multipart cue Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 118 Recording a multipart cue In the procedure below one or more parts are recorded to a cue The maximum number of parts you may record to a cue is eight Follow Link and Label attributes may be assigned to the overall cue Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Select channels enter Prompt reads channel levels and press Select channel numbers Enter 3 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Enter the cue s number followed by Enter Press Part Indicates the selected cue us a multipart cue Prompt reads Select part number to record To cancel press CLEAR Enter the number of the Records the part part you want to record Prompt reads followed by Enter Select channel numbers Press Rel Rel Releases captured channels Repeat steps 2 through 7 Records subsequent parts adding channels for each part you want to include in the multipart cue a If recording several parts to the same multipart cue you do not need to enter the cue number for subsequent parts after recording the first part b You may select any part number in the range 1 8 regardless of previous parts recorded for this cue Chapter 9 Multipart cues
268. me date In the following procedure press Enter to scroll through the fields on the Screen Keystrokes Press 2 Enter Action Prompt reads Enter current standard time 12 hour clock To start clock press Record to cancel press Clear e Enter the current time in hours and minutes In 24 hour format 930 9 30 AM 1625 4 25 PM In 12 hour format use to select AM or PM Press Enter e Enter the day of the month 1 31 Press Enter e Enter the month 1 12 Press Enter e Enter the year 00 99 Press Enter e Enter the day of the week 1 Monday thru 7 Sunday Press Enter e Press Record to reset Real Time Clock with the new settings 12 24 hour clock Keystrokes Action 1 Press 3 Enter Prompt reads Enter 12 or 24 hour clock 0 12 hour 1 24 hour 2 Press 0 Enter Sets 12 hour clock Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 35 36 Latitude longitude time zone Choose the latitude longitude and time reference data from Appendix E for the city closest to you The example below is for Middleton Wisconsin at 43 04 N latitude 89 23 W longitude and 6 time zones west of Greenwich England Keystrokes 1 Press 4 Enter 2 Press 4 3 Enter Press 0 4 Enter Press 5 Enter 5 Press 8 9 Enter 6 Press 2 3 Enter Press 6 Enter 8 Press 6 0 0 Enter Action Prompt reads Enter latitude in
269. move to other edit fields and the up down arrows to move to other fixtures Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Attribute Setup Personalities may have as many as 64 attributes Most of the 64 attributes have names that describe the function to which they are assigned such as pan tilt gobo or strobe The rest have either User or Reserved designations and are unassigned The system software assigns each attribute to one of five categories by default but you can change these assignments The category assignments affect all fixtures in the show alike See the list of categories and examples of attributes assigned to them in the table below Categorization provides a way for you to refer to attributes during programming in relation to their function such as position or color rather than to attributes by their individual names Use the Only command when referencing attribute categories Default attribute category assignments Position attributes such as pan and tilt control the Position direction of the fixture Beam attributes such as intensity and zoom control Beam the quality of the fixture s field Image attributes such as gobo and F X control the shape of the fixture s field Image Color attributes such as cyan and magenta control the Color color of the fixture s beam None are those attributes such as speed and control None not included in the other four categories Expression
270. mp button to start the upfade Press the button again to interrupt the upfade and start the downfade Bump button status Submaster bump buttons may be individually enabled disabled or placed in Solo mode An enabled bump button functions normally a disabled button doesn t function at all and a button in Solo mode brings its channels to their recorded level and reduces all other channels to zero If a submaster s bump button is disabled or in Solo mode a Doran S appears next to the submaster s number on the Playback Submaster List and the Status Bar To set a bump button s status follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Sub 5 Selects submaster 5 3 Press S7 More Prompt reads Select bump status Softkeys 51 Bump and press ENTER Status 1 enabled 2 disabled 3 solo 4 Press 2 Selects disabled The keypad corner indicates the choice you have made 5 Press Enter Submaster 5 s bump button is disabled 162 Chapter 13 Submasters Submaster LEDs Each submaster bump button contains one or two LEDs The color and state of the LED indicates the current state of that submaster as shown in the chart below Color State Meaning Off Submaster not loaded Green Solid Submaster pile on or effect loaded Green Slow Blink New pile on or effect submaster Loads when slider reaches home position Green Fast Blink Submaster pile on or effect on timed
271. mperature is low at degrees F Please check the heating ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient temperature is outside the acceptable operating range at degrees F Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room immediately A ground fault GFI RCD error has occurred in dimmer Use Dimmer status to determine the rack number for the dimmer The phasing in Rack is not allowed The rack has been shut down Please check the input power service 358 Appendix C Error messages Appendix D Showfile Each showfile saved with version 3 03 or later system software contains recordings or settings in two general programming classifications Some programming pertains directly to the show such as recordings of cues groups and focus points Other programming pertains to your system configuration such as clock or MIDI settings that seldom if ever change At your option you can read show and configuration contents separately or at the same time using the console s diskette read operations If you read show contents only from the diskette your console s system configuration at that time will not change Conversely if you read only the System configuration contents from the diskette the show information in console memory does not change The portion of a showfile that represents show contents is identified below There are some configuration settings however that are also considered part of the show contents These are ide
272. n both a submaster and a cue that has played back and is in a fader the console sets the channel at the higher of the two levels Or you may use the keypad to select that channel and set it to any level regardless of the levels set either by the cue or the submaster HTP channels in the console are called normal channels LTP Channels Channels may also be defined in the console to follow the Latest Takes Precedence LTP rule An LTP channel obeys the latest command to set its level When the command is to fade to a level an LTP channel can fade either in a physical fader in the foreground or in a background fader Each LTP channel has its own background fader An LTP channel fades in the foreground if its level moves to a new level in the next cue When a channel is fading in the foreground and no change in that channel is commanded by the next cue the fade continues in the background A cue stops running in the background when the last of its channels stops fading in the background Up to 600 cues may run in the background at once For example consider three cues recorded for channels Chan 1 Chan 2 and Chan 3 all of which are set as LTP channels The cues contain percentage levels for these three channels as follows Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Cue 1 25 0 0 Cue 2 25 50 0 Cue 3 50 50 50 e When Cue 1 starts channel Chan 1 starts fading to level 25 with Cue 1 timing e f Cue 2 starts before Cue 1 ends channel Chan 1 continues
273. n instructions 2 3 plug It should face up 4 Remote Interface 5 power strip 3 4 If you obtained the digitizer from another source or suspect that the ETC factory settings may have changed call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 for a copy of the Kurta XGT configuration procedure Appendix A Installation Setup Follow the procedure below to select a template specify where the Turn on your console or Remote Interface The XGT also turns on The red power on LED in the back left corner should blink off and then on again If it doesn t check to be sure all cables are properly connected Place one of the standard ETC template sheets under the clear plastic flap on the digitizer Follow the procedure Setup below sliders will be controlled and calibrate the template 1 Press Setup Press 1 System Settings Press 7 Designer s Work Press 1 2 or 3 then Enter Touch the pen to the digitizer Follow instructions on the screen to finish calibration Go to setup menu Go to System Settings display Go to Designer s Worksheet Setup display Enables one of the three template setups Toggles slider control between console and digitizer a Or press F2 F3 or FA on the Worksheet template b Or press F1 on the Worksheet template button bar 2 Enter 3 sheet Setup Enter 4 5 Press S1 6 region labeled Calibrate 7 button bar 5 Expres
274. n loop cue played when you stop the loop would be cue 7 Follow these steps to create a five cue loop Keystrokes Action 1 Createfivecuesnumbered Cue list displays cues 1 through 5 1 2 3 4 and 5 2 Press Cuel then press 1 Selects the first cue the number of the first cue you want to include in the playback loop 3 Press Follow 5 Enter Assigns a follow time of five seconds to the first cue 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for Assigns a follow time of five seconds cues 2 through 5 to the remaining cues 5 Press Cue then press 5 Selects the last cue in the playback the number of the last cue loop in the playback loop 6 Press Link then press 1 Creates a loop by linking the last cue to the number of the first cue the first cue in the playback loop Press Enter 14 You may also use effects to create loops See Chapter 16 Effects for more information Chapter 7 Cues Linking a macro to a cue Link allows you to automatically run a macro when a cue runs If you link macro 6 to cue 1 then macro 6 runs when you play cue 1 If you want the macro to delay before running one way is to start the macro with a Macro Wait of the desired length You can also delay the macro by assigning a follow time to the cue Follow these steps to link a macro to a cue Keystrokes 1 Press Stagel or Blind Cue 1 Press Link Press Enter Macro Press 7 Enter Action Selects display
275. n the cue highlighted on the Cue List follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage mode display 2 Press Cue 2 Selects cue 2 3 Press Go Runs cue 2 130 Chapter 10 Playing back cues Controlling fades manually The console provides two ways to take manual control of cue playback manual override and rate override Manual override Manual override allows you to use the fader sliders to take manual control of fade levels When you take manual control of cue playback moving the fader slider controls the fade Leave the fader sliders at 10 before pressing Go to play cues back as recorded When you move the fader sliders below 10 the cue runs until it reaches the slider setting You can set the slider before you play the cue or move the slider after the fade starts The fade stops when it reaches the slider s level and the slider then controls the fade For example if you set the sliders at 8 the cue will play until it reaches 80 percent of its recorded levels then give you manual control Set the sliders at 0 before you press Go to take manual control of fade from the beginning of cue Hint If you start a cue and the performers skip ahead to the next cue you have two options for speeding up to the next cue If you do not need the current cue to reach its full intensity level settings press Go to interrupt the current cue and begin the next one However if you need the current cue t
276. nal channels and sets their levels Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Restricts channels in update Prompt reads Select channel number s To cancel press CLEAR Press 0 to reselect all non zero channels Updates focus point 4 all captured and selected channels For an explanation of captured channels see Channel modes page 56 For an explanation of Only see The Only command page 8 151 152 Updating a recorded focus point You need not place a focus point on stage to update it The following procedure illustrates how to update any recorded focus point Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Press S8 Fixture 8 Full Press Only Color At 5110 Press S7 More Softkeys Press S2 Update Focus Point 3 To restrict channels in the update use Only here Press Enter Action Selects Stage display mode Sets fixture 8 intensity to full Sets levels for fixture 8 color category at 5096 Returns to main Stage softkeys Selects focus point 3 to update Prompt reads To update focus point select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects channels to update Prompt reads Select channel number s To cancel press CLEAR Press 0 to reselect all non zero channels Updates focus point 3 a If not restricted with Only all captured and selected channels are included in the update Chapter 12 Foc
277. ncluding channels that haven t been used in the show so far press 1 Thru Thru 5 Pressing Thru a second time alerts the system to ignore Flexichannel for that channel selection Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 61 Setting channel levels You assign output levels to channels using the basic format Channel At where the first number is the channel and the second is the level For example Channel 4 At 7 5 sets channel 4 at 75 percent If you enter a single digit for the level the console multiplies it by ten and you must follow it with Enter In other words Channell 4 At 1 Enter sets channel 4 to 10 percent To set channel 4 to 1 percent enter Channel 4 At 0 11 92 Level wheel To set channel levels with the level wheel labeled Level Y select the channels whose levels you want to modify then use the level wheel to set the desired output level You can also use the level wheel to adjust output levels for all active channels To set selected channel levels enter Channel 1 Thru 5 then move the level wheel to set levels To modify all channels currently at a level above zero press Enter then move the level wheel to set levels Full Press Full to set selected channel levels to 100 percent For example press Channel 1 Thru 3 Full to set channels 1 2 and 3 to 100 percent Level key Level sets selected channel levels to the output level assigned to the Level k
278. nd records real time programs according to time of day when you exit the display or when you move copy or delete programs You can force a sort at any time you are in the display by pressing S7 More Softkeys S8 Sort Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 293 DMX In You can use DMX512 levels from another source such as another console to control a show in your console When DMX512 information is used as input to your console it is called DMX In There may be circumstances where you want to obtain a snapshot of current levels of DMX In such as if you want to use a particular look on stage that has been established by another console For that purpose you may record current levels of DMX In into cues or other program elements in your console You may also use DMX In levels to set channel levels dynamically in your console In that application you would refer to DMX In as focus point 0 As DMX In varies any channel levels set with reference to focus point O will automatically and immediately update just as they would do if recorded with reference to any other focus point The first step in using DMX In for either purpose is to enable DMX In The enabling procedure is given in the following section You can refer to focus point O in your commands without first enabling it but levels will not be set in cues or other recorded elements that reference focus point O until DMX In is enabled Enabling DMX In Record DMX In directl
279. nect up to three DMX512 cables to DMX512 output connectors on the console s back panel shown under Console s back panel page 326 DMX512 connector XLR 5 pin female 512 digital multiplex dimmers DMX512 pinout 1 Common 2 Data 3 Data 4 not connected 5 not connected 332 Appendix A Installation Configuring the DMX512 ports Once your console is installed you may need to reset some hardware configuration settings The Output Configuration screen allows you to reset the starting dimmer numbers for your DMX512 ports set your ports for dimmer doubling and adjust the DMX512 signal speed if your dimming system requires a slower signal Out put Confi gurat ion 08 06 RM DMXS12 Ports Operating Mode Starting Dimmer Number 4 Normal 4 2 Normal 513 3 Normal 1025 Current DMX512 Transmission Speed 51 352 S3 S4 ss S5 S S8 a NNI Port starting dimmer numbers Each port has a starting dimmer number which can re reset in the Output Configuration display Shown above are the default starting dimmer numbers for consoles with three DMX512 ports Unless using dimmer doubling you might want to set different starting numbers such as when default port settings would result in some racks being connected to two ports For example if your system included 15 racks each with 96 dimmers you could set ports 2 and 3 to start at 481 and 961 Set port starting numbers in the Output Configuration screen as follows Press Se
280. neously when you press Go Follow these steps to assign a wait time to a part Keystrokes Action 1 Press Cue then enterthe Selects cue number cue number Prompt reads Select cue number 2 Press Part then enterthe Selects part number part number Prompt reads Select part number 3 Press Wait 1 0 Selects wait time of ten seconds Prompt reads Enter wait time 4 Press Enter Sets wait time for the part to ten seconds Part will wait ten seconds then run Chapter 9 Multipart cues Editing a multipart cue Once you have created a multipart cue you can add or delete parts add or delete channels from the parts change channel levels or change fade and wait times Except for Update all multipart cue editing is done in Blind Deleting a part from a multipart cue Deleting a part from a multipart cue is the reverse of creating a multipart cue from a standard cue When a part is deleted the channels in the deleted part do not leave the cue but transfer to part 8 where they can be reassigned if desired Channel levels are unaffected Follow these steps to delete part 1 from a multipart cue in Blind Keystrokes Action 1 Press Bling Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Cue 4 Selects the cue 3 Press Part 1 Selects the part 4 Press S6 Delete Part Prompt reads To delete part press ENTER Delete part amp tracking press TRACK ENTER To cancel press CLEAR T Enter Prompt re
281. ng the Time Code Events display arises when you are playing the program you are currently editing If the program has not yet come to the place where you made the edits those edits will be effective on that pass If however the program has already passed the place where you made the edits those edits will not be effective until the next pass of the program In some cases you may want to reset the event list pointer which is explained below To sort note if your softkeys show Sort at softkey S8 If not press S7 More Softkeys one or two times until that softkey appears Then press S8 Sort Editing time code programs Edit time code programs in the Time Code Events display While editing a time code program you can run it simultaneously because the editing procedure is buffered in memory Your edits however may not be effective immediately upon leaving the Time Code Events display because the program is controlled by the events list pointer If that pointer has already passed an event you edited the edits don t take effect until the event list pointer is reset to the beginning of the program Re setting the event list pointer The event list pointer jumps through time code events regardless of what the time code signal is doing For example if the program s next event is 100 frames away the event list pointer resets immediately to that frame while a steady time code signal moves to it uniformly frame by frame You can inte
282. nless you use Link to specify a different sequence Follow times may be expressed in minutes and seconds or as fractions of seconds up to 99 59 minutes Follow these steps to record a cue with Follow Keystrokes 1 Press Stage or Blind 2 Press Cue 7 3 Press Follow 4 Press 5 Enter Action Selects display mode Selects cue 7 Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads Enter follow time or press ENTER to confirm default time Press CLEAR to cancel follow time Records cue 7 with a Follow time of five seconds After you start cue 7 the next cue in the Cue List plays automatically five seconds later a Press Clear in this step to remove an existing follow time Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 95 Create playback loops with Link and Follow You can use Link and Follow to create cue playback loops in which a group of cues play back automatically and repeat Stop a loop that was created by Link and Follow by pressing GO after the loop has played through at least one time If you press GO before the loop plays through you will only advance to the next cue in the loop sequence If you press GO after it plays through at least one time you temporarily override the Link sequence and advance instead to a non loop cue The non loop cue that would play is the next one in order after the linked cue For example if cue 6 is linked to cue 10 in a loop the no
283. nter 122 Action Selects stage display Selects fixture 4 Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking To cancel press CLEAR Selects multipart cue 1 to update Updates part 2 of cue 1 Chapter 9 Multipart cues Modifying fade and wait times If you do not assign fade and wait times to a part the console assigns default times No wait time will be recorded Follow these steps to assign fade and wait times to parts to a multipart cue Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Enter the cue number Press Part then press or until the part you want to edit is displayed Press Time Enter an upfade time between 1 second and 99 59 minutes and press Enter If you want a downfade time that is different from the upfade enter the desired time and press Enter If not just press Enter Press Wait Enter wait time and press Enter Wait time is the delay between when you press Go and when the part begins If you do not enter a wait time the console assigns a wait time of zero Action Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt reads Select part number Prompt reads Enter upfade time Prompt reads Enter downfade time Fade times are set for the part Prompt reads Enter wait time Wait time is set for the part 23 See Setting default fade times page 26 Expre
284. ntified on the next page Also identified on the next page is the portion of the showfile that represents configuration contents and which can be read separately Show contents e Bump button status e Channel attribute settings e Cues and their settings e Designer s Worksheet regions e Dimmer profile and proportional settings e Dimmer profile revisions e Doubled dimmers e Encoder setup e Fixture attribute setup e Focus points e Groups e ink lists e Macros e Parked channels and dimmers e Patching for conventional lights e Patching for ML fixtures e Show name e Personalities loaded e Submasters and their settings e Time code events Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 359 Configuration settings Read show results Certain configuration information is included with show contents information when you do a Head Show From Disk operation These items are identified below by the display in which each may be edited Setup display Show name System Settings display Number of channels Number of dimmers Default fade time Default level Default fader clear time Default Sneak Time Designer s Worksheet setup Output Configuration display DMX512 mode Starting Dimmer DMX512 speed Options Settings display Time code input Time code frames per second Display Cue Time Code list Powerup macro Time Code Events display Clock enable disable Read system configuration results Certain configuration information is retrieved w
285. ntrol lists Full function Level sets a channel to an editable default value Independent channels Flip channel Link List allows channels to be linked together for control by the two wheels Moving light functions Fixture personalities may be loaded from diskette Patch fixtures by assigning personalities starting channels starting DMX512 address remote dimmer swap focus pan or tilt flip Five attribute categories Fixture box level adjustment Fixture focus with Solo Cue functions Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Up to 600 cues in the range 0 1 to 999 9 Discrete upfade and downfade times 00 00 99 59 for each cue Linked cue sequences Effect cues Split wait times Follow time Link to cue or macro Label Eight part multipart cues Selective cue recording Update cue command Attribute range editing Subroutines with cue or style steps Spreadsheet editing Cue list 373 374 Group functions Up to 500 groups Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group Group labels Spreadsheet editing Group list Focus point functions up to 99 preset focus points Hard key for quick access Update cues and submasters when focus point changes Record level of focus point without link Focus point 0 2 DMX In Available in effects Printout available Spreadsheet editing Focus point list Diskette functions 3 5 inch high density diskette drive for show storage One show per disk Software updates insta
286. nts 1 the title line 2 an inventory of network devices and 3 the Remote Units list The title line names the display and identifies the version of code on the diskette you used to bring up the display the upgrade diskette The device inventory located below the title line identifies all possible ETC network interface devices by type version number and CRC number For a device in your network to be compatible with the code on the upgrade diskette both the version number and the CRC number must match Your console will detect remote interface devices operating on your network by listing them in the Remote Units list From this list you can make the following determinations e Are any interface devices in your network not showing up in the list e Does every device in your network display a software version that matches the version for that type in the device inventory e Does every device in your list display a CRC number that matches the CRC number for that type in the device inventory Devices missing from the Remote Units list There can be several problems preventing an interface device from showing up on the Remote Units list most of which are easily correctable First of all verify power to a missing device as well as to the hub to which it is connected if any Second verify all network connections along the network route along between the console and the missing device If a missing device is an ETCNet2 node set the pro
287. nts in Stage or Fader Update takes levels from all captured and selected channels and those selected may be restricted with the Only command Updating an active cue The following procedure illustrates how to update a cue that has been played back Keystrokes 1 Zi Press Stage Press Cuel enter cue number and press Go Modify channel levels as desired Press S2 Update To restrict channels in the update use Only here Press Enter P a Optional step Action Selects Stage display mode Plays back selected cue bringing up its current levels Sets cue levels or selects additional channels and sets their levels Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER TRACK ENTER for tracking To cancel press CLEAR Selects channels to update Prompt reads Select channel numbers To cancel press CLEAR Updates the active cue b If you want the update to track into subsequent cues press Track before pressing enter 19 For an explanation of captured channels see Channel modes page 56 For an explanation of Only see The Only command page 8 Chapter 7 Cues Updating a recorded cue You need not play back the cue to update it The following procedure illustrates how to update any recorded cue Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Stagel Press S8 Fixture 1 Thru 8 Full Set the pan and tilt levels Press S2 Update
288. o copy is complete The contents of macro 2 have been copied into macro 25 a n step 4 you may use And and Thru to enter multiple macros to copy If you do the new macros will be numbered consecutively starting with the macro you enter in step 6 Sample macros To create these sample macros go to Macro display mode Setup 8 Enter select a macro and enter the keystroke sequences as shown below More sample macros created by Expression style console users are available on ETC s website at www etcconnect com Channel check This macro brings each channel up to full for a channel check Before you begin you ll probably want to bring up at least one channel for working light then clear all other channels from stage Press Stage and start macro Press macro key again to check each subsequent channel At 0 Enter Full Macro line reads At 0 Enter Full 242 Chapter 18 Macros Auto channel check This macro automatically runs through each channel with a two second wait between each channel beginning with channel 1 You can effectively pause the check by cancelling the macro at any channel If you replay the macro after the cancellation the check begins at the next channel in sequence At 0 Enter Full Macro Wait 2 Enter M Macro line reads At 0 Enter Full Mwait2 MZ 4 this macro s macro number Turn off all lights except work lights This macro captures all channels and sets them
289. o indicate ETCNet network status If you are using Full Tracking Backup the switches also determine which console is A and which is B DIP 2 DIP 3 Console mode on start up UPUP Network off DOWNDOWNNetwork on Single console DOWNUPNetwork on FTB Console A UPDOWNNetwork on FTB Console B 2 Set DIP switch 4 for SMPTE DIP 4 SMPTE status UPDisabled DOWN Enabled 3 Set DIP switch 7 to indicate what kind of wiring you are using DIP 7 Wiring type connector UPBNC ThinNet connector DOWNRJ45 Twisted Pair connector 4 If you are using Twisted Pair wiring it may be necessary to change the setting of DIP switch 8 If you are using an external null concentrator set DIP switch 8 up If not set the switch down DIP 8 Twisted Pair Polarity UPOff DOWNOn Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 331 Connecting dimmers to console These instructions explain how to connect DMX512 outputs and provide DMX512 connector pinout specifications The console provides three DMX512 output ports for a total capacity of 1 536 outputs Follow these steps to connect dimmers to your console 1 Verify that your dimmer connector pinout matches the pinout listed below If your pinout does not match contact your dealer or ETC Caution Your dimmer control common must be compatible with console control common they must either be the same level or the dimmer control common must float Verify compatibility with your dealer if you are not sure 2 Con
290. o reach its full level settings push the sliders down to the lit LEDs and then back up to 10 immediately Then press Go to start the next cue Once the fade is complete the cue is no longer controlled by the fader Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Rate override Rate override allows you to control both the fade s rate and percentage of completion When you play back a cue using rate override the console controls the percentage of completion but you control the rate 9 Rate override allows you to play back a cue faster or slower than the rate at which it was recorded The rate wheel adjusts the fade rate Fade rate is expressed as a percentage A cue with a fade rate of 100 percent plays back at its recorded fade time A fade rate of 300 plays the cue back three times faster than its recorded fade time A fade rate of 50 plays the cue back half as fast as its recorded fade time For example if you record a cue with a 10 second fade time a rate of 200 causes it to play back in five seconds A fade rate of 50 causes it to play back in 20 seconds You may take control of a cue s fade rate while the cue is running In addition you may press both Rate keys to control rate of both fades Follow this example to place a cue in a fader under rate override Keystrokes Action 1 Press Rate key for the Activates rate control fader in which the cue is running Press both Rate keys if you wish to control both faders 2 Move th
291. o record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 5 Selects submaster 5 to be recorded 5 Press Except Sub 3 Instructs that levels raised by submaster 3 be ignored Prompt reads Select excepted submaster number 6 Press Enter Records submaster 5 minus submaster 3 s levels 2 Press Cue or Group in place of Sub in step 5 to leave out the channels supplied by a cue or group Except will not work with effect cues or effect submasters Chapter 13 Submasters Inhibitive submasters Creating A red LED on the bump button indicates an inhibitive submaster Only submasters 13 through 24 may be inhibitive Inhibitive submasters allow you to limit the output of a group of channels Channel outputs are limited to the level at which you set the slider An inhibitive submaster set at 10 100 percent does not affect channel output An inhibitive submaster controls the levels of its assigned channels in the same way the Grandmaster controls the levels of all channels Note If channels that you expect to see on stage are missing or at the wrong levels check to see if a submaster is inhibiting them If a channel is fully inhibited by a submaster its level will be displayed as a yellow zero Follow these steps to create and add channels to an inhibitive submaster Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press Sub and enter the Selects sub to change number of
292. o their category defaults go to the Attribute Setup Display Then Press S7 Reset Defaults followed by Enter Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Encoder Setup Level setting controls for Expression 3 In Expression 3 fixture attribute levels may be controlled by wheels encoders or by an optional pointing device All these devices are available with user defined assignments on six selectable pages For each page you can control as many as five attributes with encoders two attributes with wheels and two attributes with a pointing device Generally the pointing device is used only for pan and tilt attributes so that means you can directly control as many as 44 fixture attributes with the encoders and wheels simply by changing pages poo 000 NIN OO OO ALO 0000080001010 0 AAA 0001010080000 010 Encoders Encoder Pages For each page attributes are assigned by default to encoders wheels and to the two axes of a pointing device You can change the default assignments to suit your needs or preferences such as if your console is not equipped with a pointing device Level setting controls for Expression 2x Expression 2x does not have encoders or multiple page buttons You can have these Expression 3 features however by purchasing an ETC Moving Lights module This small device which connects to the Digitizer Serial port of your console also allows you
293. of column contents e Type identifies the ETC type designation e Recorded load displays the load at which the selected dimmer was recorded e Firing mode identifies whether the dimmer is normal doubled or switched indicates a normal firing mode e Curve identifies the output curve assigned to the dimmer e Rack identifies the dimmer s rack number e Slot identifies the dimmer s slot number in the rack e Panic mode identifies whether the dimmer is assigned to a panic circuit indicates an unassigned dimmer e Scale Boost indicates either the dimmer s Scale or Boost value Either can be returned for each dimmer depending upon the rack s CEM software Scale is expressed in voltage and indicated by a V following the number Boost is expressed in percentage and indicated by a 96 following the number A non boosted level of 100 percent is indicated by the symbol Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 271 272 Monitoring dimmers When used in conjunction with Sensor Advanced Feature dimming equipment the console allows you to monitor individual dimmer loads in your system This can greatly simplify troubleshooting by identifying such things as burned out lamps and incorrectly lamped or unplugged fixtures When dimmer monitoring is in use Sensor electronics constantly monitor dimmer loads Monitoring information is displayed by the dimming system and also sent to the console To use this monitoring information effic
294. ole e Channel This field in the effect display shows the channels in each step e Time The Step Time which is measured from the beginning of a step to the beginning of the next step Default Step Time is 0 2 seconds e In The In Time the meaning of which depends upon whether the effect has a positive or negative attribute For a positive effect the In Time is the time the effect step takes to fade from its starting level to its High Level For a negative effect the In Time is the time the effect step takes to fade from its starting level to its Low Level Default In Time is zero seconds e Dwell The time between the end of the infade and the start of the outfade is called the dwell Default Dwell time is zero seconds 14 13 See Modifying effect attributes page 220 Chapter 16 Effects e Out The Out Time the meaning of which depends upon whether the effect has a positive or negative attribute For a positive effect the Out Time is the time the effect step takes to fade from its High Level to its Low Level For a negative effect the Out Time is the time the effect step takes to fade from its Low Level to its High Level Default Out Time is zero seconds e Lo Knownas Low Level this is the lowest level the effect is allowed to reach The default Low Level is zero e Hi Known as High Level this is the highest level the effect is allowed to reach The default High Level is Full Effects in Stage You can also creat
295. ompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 2 Press Typel 3 Defines the cue as an effect type Prompt reads Select channel numbers 3 Press Group Cue 1 Captures the channels of cues 1 and 2 And 2 Full setting all to full Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channels numbers to edit 4 Press Record Enter Records the step and advances the step indicator to the next in sequence channels to the effect step Prompt reads Select channel numbers 5 Repeat steps 3 4 to create other steps 4 To add grouped submasters rather than grouped cues press Submaster rather than Cue in this step b Specify the step number after Record if you do not want to create the next step in order See Notes on working with steps in Stage page 212 You may also use either of the other two methods discussed in this section to create additional steps 214 Chapter 16 Effects Modifying the effect You can set channel levels or add channels to steps with Update in Stage In Blind however you can do these and many more editing functions such as deleting channels from steps inserting or deleting steps and modifying the attributes of the effect The first procedure below applies to Stage and all the rest in this section apply only to Blind Using Update With Update you can do live editing of effect steps in Stage and Fader and see the results
296. on their encoders if available or on the X and Y wheels otherwise When updating Following is a list of things you can select when using Only after the Update command in Stage or Fader If you make selections and change your mind press Channel 0 to reselect all non zero channels Channels Example Press Only Channel 1 Thru 5 Fixtures Example Press Only S8 Fixture 1 And 2 Fixture attributes Example Pressing S8 Fixture 1 Only S6 Attribute 6 selects attribute 6 of fixture 1 Fixture categories Example Pressing S8 Fixture 1 Only Beam selects all attributes in the Beam cate gory for fixture 1 A Example Pressing Only Cue 5 selects all channels in cue 5 not for effect cues Submasters Example Pressing Only Sub 6 selects all channels in submaster 6 not for effect submasters Groups ssss Example Pressing Only Group 7 selects all channels in Group 7 Focus Points Example Pressing Only Focus Point 8 selects all channels in Focus Point 8 DMX In Example Pressing Only S4 DMX In selects all DMX In channels DMX In need not be enabled to make this selection but must be enabled for playback See Enabling DMX In page 294 When recalling channels Use to restrict a selection from among the channels fixtures and
297. on working with steps in Stage You may only add channels to one step at a time Steps may be specified in any order but always default to the next highest one in order To specify a step number Press S7 More Softkeys until S8 reads Step Then press S8 and enter the step number If a channel is added to a step more than once its level will be the last one assigned Adding channels directly The procedure for creating an effect in Stage and adding channels to its steps is shown below Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Cuel 5 Specifies cue 5 Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE 2 Press Typel 3 Defines the cue as an effect type Prompt reads Select channel numbers 3 Press 1 Thru 9 Full Selects channels to add and assigns them a level Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press Record Enter Records the step and advances the step indicator to the next in sequence Prompt reads Select channel numbers 5 Repeat steps 3 4 to create other steps 4 Specify the step number after Record if you do not want to create the next step in order See Notes on working with steps in Stage page 212 b You may also use either of the other two methods discussed in this section to create additional steps 17 The level of a channel linked to a focus point automatically changes in the step if the level changes in the focus point Chapter 16 Effects Adding groups or focus
298. onic personality that describes how it can be controlled The personality specifies the attributes for the fixture and the order in which these attributes are presented to DMX512 channels Assigning a personality to a fixture makes channel patching quick and easy All you need to do is define which console channels and DMX512 addresses are first the personality directs the rest of the assignment Many personalities are included with the console software Other personalities for leading moving light fixtures on the market are being developed by ETC As additional personalities become available these are made available to dealers and placed on the ETC website for downloading Also available from dealers and at the website is a program called the Expression Personality Editor which enables you to create and edit fixture personalities on an IBM compatible computer For further information about these options call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 or visit the ETC website at www etcconnect com Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 The Only command Only is a particularly powerful console command Use Only to restrict a selection while programming or creating a look on stage When working with fixtures Use Only to restrict the selection of fixture attributes by category such as when you are creating or modifying a cue submaster group or focus point For example press S8 Fixture 8 Only Position to place the pan and tilt attributes
299. only be parked in the Stage display When you park a fixture all channels patched to the fixture are parked whether you select them to set levels or not After setting attribute levels from the keypad Follow the procedure below to park fixtures with their intensity and position attributes set from the keypad Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display 2 S8 Fixture 1 Thru 3 The fixture box appears and is set to fixture 3 Press Full Sets fixture intensities to full Set pan and tilt with Sets position attribute levels encoders or your mouse 5 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Press ENTER to park channel s press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark channel s 6 Press Enter Parks the fixture After setting attribute levels at a focus point You can park a fixture that has attributes set at a focus point If you do not select fixture attributes all attributes are parked at the focus point If you select attributes before parking those selected are parked at the focus point and the remaining attributes are parked at their existing levels Follow the procedure below to park all attributes of a fixture at a focus point Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display 2 S8 Fixture 1 The fixture box appears and is set to fixture 1 Press Focus Point 5 Sets all attributes at focus point 5 Press S6 Park Prompt reads Press ENTER to park channel s press AT
300. ons ee oboe Bede 3 SOUS eere ce reme 335 Move LINK e ot eins env TR pA 249 Moving channels defined 56 Moving light See also Fixture Clear od 225 8 Sen Beet a 263 FixtureiboXs esie V xS 80 Patehlfigi esu tare rem dp 72 73 FIR IBI POCHE a ee ee ere MC RUE 259 SetlevelS o o o o o oooooo 81 Multipart cue Converting regular cue to 119 CROC EHE PEEL 118 Definied erp Ok A EE a 117 EGNOS siat o leo e ias 121 123 Modify fade wait 123 Update part 00 122 Wait time 0 000004 120 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Multipart cues Definition o ved ecce 117 Delete part iis ii pens 121 Recording us Sons eate 118 N Name See Label SHOWS Lak soeben deve er es rx d ats 37 Naming SHOWS a aed iod tette doe pued 37 Navigation Attribute Setup 76 EMO a 208 Encoder setup uod bert 78 Explained 2220055 3 Fixt re BOX x X gosse nos 81 Fixture Box no encoders 82 Fixture patch 72 74 Mouse buttons o o 3 Personality setup 69 Real time programs 289 Submaster liSt 182 Network requirements 329 Next cue display 21 O One to one patch 40 Only Explained zs soe EE vv 8 Recall channels 8 Updating cue 102 103 Updating effect 215 Updating group 140 141
301. onsole connector DB 25 female Pin Function 1 Macro 1 901 2 Macro 1 902 3 Macro 1 903 4 Macro 1 904 5 Macro 1 905 6 Macro 1 906 7 Macro 1 907 8 Macro 1 908 9 not connected 10 Ground 11 12 Vdc 12 not connected 13 not connected 14 Macro 1 901 15 Macro 1 902 16 Macro 1 903 17 Macro 1 904 18 Macro 1 905 19 1 Macro 1 906 20 Macro 1 907 21 Macro 1 908 22 not connected 23 Ground 24 4 12 Vdc 25 not connected Remote connector Connector type depends on unit Appendix A Installation Wiring remote macros There are three typical ways to wire the Remote Go function 1 Connect all Macro pins pins 1 8 to ground pin 10 and switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 14 21 to 12 Vdc pin 24 as shown in the following diagram 1 Macro 1 901 14 0 Macro 1 901 Macro 1 902 15 s Macro 1 902 Macro 1 903 3 16 E Macro 1 903 Macro 1 904 4 17 5 5 Macro 1 904 Macro 1 905 18 6 Macro 1 905 Macro 1 906 19 5 Macro 1 906 Macro 1 907 7 20 8 Macro 1 907 Macro 1 908 21 Macro 1 908 not connected 10 not connected Ground 23C 311 Ground 12 Vdc 4 12 Vdc not connected 25 3 not connected not connected 2 Connect all Macro pins pins 14 21 to the 12 Vdc pin pin 24 and Switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 1 8 to the ground pin 10 3 Provide your own power supply that generates a 12 Vdc potential be twe
302. ontrol interfaces Deleting time code events Follow these steps to delete time code events 1 Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 until S6 reads Delete Event 2 Press S6 Delete Event Prompt reads Select event number s to delete then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 5 And 6 Enter Enters events 5 and 6 to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press Enter to delete the event or Clear to leave it unchanged Inserting time code events Insert a time code event into an existing time code program with this procedure Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 until S1 reads Insert Event 2 Press S1 Insert Event Prompt reads Select event number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 4 Enter LITO Select number of events to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 2 Indicates that you wish to insert two new events Corner reads Insert 2 b Press Enter New events 4 and 5 are inserted all following events are renumbered a The new event s will be inserted before event 4 The Clear Time Code Events menu option on the Clear Functions menu allows you to delete all recorded time code events To do so press Setup 4 Enter 1 8 Enter Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 303 304 Copying time code events If you are creating a series of similar time code events you may find it
303. ord cues with a wait time of up to 99 59 minutes Wait time may be entered in normal time format or in decimal format When entered with a decimal point the number must be less than one minute 0 1 to 59 9 seconds to be accepted When entered without a decimal point a 2 digit number will be treated as seconds if less than 60 and as a calculated value of minutes and seconds if between 60 and 99 For example if you enter 70 the time will display as 1 10 If you enter either a 3 digit or a 4 digit number the last two digits up to 59 are interpreted as seconds For example if you enter 9930 the time will display as 99 30 The console allows you to program a wait time for either the upfade or the downfade not both You can see which type of wait you have in the Wait field of the Attribute Bar If an upwait a small up arrow T is shown next to the time If a downwait a down arrow J is shown instead If you do not enter a wait time the console assigns the cue a wait time of zero Follow these steps to change the upfade and or downfade wait time Keystrokes 1 Press Stagel or Blind 2 Press Cuel Press 5 Press Wait once OF Press Wait twice 5 Press 6 6 Press Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue 5 Prompt reads Enter upfade wait time Or Enter downfade wait time
304. ou can record a total of 240 submasters 24 submasters in each of ten pages of submaster memory Each submaster slider is accompanied by a bump button and one or two LEDs The slider allows you to bring up the submaster look manually The bump button allows you to flash the submaster to its full recorded level or to begin its programmed fade if it has one The green LEDs show you which sliders control recorded submasters The green LEDs in the bottom row glow when the submaster is an effect or pile on type A glowing red LED in the bottom row signifies a recorded inhibitive submaster This chapter includes the following sections e Submaster types e Submaster pages e Playback Submaster List e Submaster LEDs e Submaster bump buttons e Recording submasters e Creating inhibitive submasters e Modifying submasters in Blind e Modifying submasters in Stage e Using Update to modify submasters e Live control of a submaster e Controlling submaster fades manually e Labeling submasters e Copying submasters e Loading cues or groups to submasters e Copying cues or groups to submasters e Clearing submasters Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 157 Submaster types Submasters can be pile on inhibitive or effect Pile on submaster A pile on submaster consists of channels recorded at proportional levels If a pile on submaster s channel levels are higher than established channel levels the submaster s levels take precedence exc
305. ou control the fixture s brightness by adjusting the level of a DMX512 channel that controls a dimmer assigned to the fixture Similarly you control the fixture s horizontal and vertical movements by adjusting the levels of DMX512 channels assigned to the fixture s pan and tilt attributes This simple fixture would require three channels to fully control it Other more complicated fixtures could have additional attributes such as color focus or gobo and each additional attribute would require an additional DMX512 channel to control it In contrast a standard ellipsoidal spotlight needs only one DMX512 channel to fully control it namely the one that controls the dimmer assigned to the spotlight Only the spotlight s intensity can be controlled by changing the channel level It has no other attributes Categories Most attributes can be naturally categorized as affecting the beam the image the color or the position All attributes are initially assigned to one of these four categories or to a fifth one called None Beam attributes include Intensity Zoom Focus lris and Frost Image attributes include Gobo and F X Color attributes include Color Cyan Magenta and Yellow Position attributes include Pan and Tilt You can customize the assignment of attributes to categories including assigning an attribute to multiple categories and assigning as many attributes as you want to a single category Personalities Every fixture has an electr
306. oup select the number and set to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER Group s channels are set proportionally to 5096 Prompt reads Group mode Enter intensity Prompt reads To record submaster press BUMP or select number and press ENTER To cancel press clear Records submaster 2 as modified by group 3 s channels 145 146 Chapter 11 Groups Chapter 12 Focus points When working with moving lights sometimes the attributes of several lights are stored together in a group and the group recorded into one or more cues If the group changes such as if the lights are repositioned toward another point on stage the cues need to be manually updated or replaced to account for that change Focus points can be used to provide automatic updating in situations like this and others such as when colors are changed after show programming is essentially complete Channels referencing focus points that store color information automatically update when the color channels in the focus point change If many references are made to these focus points in the show all will change when the focus point changes making widespread updating a convenient operation The console allows up to 99 user definable focus points It also has a special focus point focus point O that contains all DMX In levels 90 The topics covered in this chapter include e Creating focus points e Displaying focus points on Stage e Wo
307. our circumstances 1 If the port is doubled make allowance for the B components of doubled dimmers that start at DMX512 address 257 ETC recommends that you use the full capacity when a port is doubled 2 Ifa moving light is patched to a port make allowance for all the channels in the fixture s personality even when no external dimmer is required For instance a Cyberlight contains its own dimmer and needs 20 channels to control all the fixture s attributes so 20 DMX512 outputs are required When one or more moving lights are patched to a port you can either total the channels needed for all moving and conventional lights on that port or you can play it safe and use the port s full capacity 3 If the port is neither doubled nor used for moving lights the port s dimmer count can be the actual number of dimmers connected to it Example Suppose you have 96 dimmers connected to each of your 3 ports with port 1 doubled port 2 used for moving lights and port 3 undoubled and unused for moving lights An optimal dimmer setting would be 1 120 dimmers 51244512496 If you increase the number of dimmers the additional dimmers are initially patched to channel zero From there you can assign them to the channel of your choice Follow these steps to set the dimmer count for your console Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Se
308. our dimmer and channel settings are the way you want them See Setting the number of dimmers page 24 and Setting the number of channels page 25 for information on setting the dimmer and channel counts Setting these counts configures the Patch display for your specific needs and when channel count is reduced reduces memory utilization and speeds processing Chapter four includes the following sections e Selecting one to one patch e Creating custom patch e Proportional patching e Labeling dimmers e Assigning a profile to a dimmer e Capturing channels in patch e Dimmer check e About Dimmer e Setting dimmers to dimmer doubling e Patching to a Strand CD80 dimmer rack Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 39 40 Selecting one to one patch The one to one patch assigns dimmer 1 to channel 1 dimmer 2 to channel 2 and so on If there are more dimmers than channels the one to one patch assigns the first extra dimmer to channel 1 the second extra dimmer to channel 2 and so on NOTE Selecting the one to one patch unpatches all moving light fixtures Follow these steps to select the console s default one to one patch Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup to display Selects Setup display the Setup menu 2 Press 4 Clear Functions Prompt reads Enter Select function number then press ENTER 3 Press 9 Reset Patch Prompt reads 1 to 1 Enter To reset patch press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press
309. out installing an alphanumeric keyboard 175 176 Copying submasters You can copy a look from a submaster to another submaster to a cue a group or a focus point Follow the procedure below Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Sub Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE 3 Enter the number of the Corner reads submaster you wish to Sub 1 copy 4 Press Record Sub Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Enter the number of the Corner reads new submaster Sub 9 6 Press Enter Submaster Contents of submaster 1 are copied to copy is complete submaster 9 a To copy the submaster to a cue group or focus point press Cue Group or Focus Point in place of Sub in step 4 Loading cues or groups to submasters Load Sub allows you to load the contents of one or more recorded groups or cues into submasters To load a look from a range of cues or groups to submasters follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Load Sub Prompt reads Select submaster s to load To cancel press CLEAR 2 Press 9 Thru 1 2 Selects submasters 9 through 12 Corner reads Sub 12 3 Press Cue or Groupl Prompt reads Select cue s to load into submaster s To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 1 And 3 Thru Selects cues 1 3 4 and 5 to copy to 5 submasters 9
310. oves to the right of a slash inserted in the field Enter an address for the fixture within the DMX port 1 512 If entering a range picking the DMX address assigns a sequential address at that port to every fixture in the range Press Enter Remote Dimmer If the personality signals that the fixture has its own dimmer an n automatically appears in this field If the fixture needs a remote dimmer enter the dimmer s number If entering a range picking the dimmer number automatically assigns a unique dimmer to every fixture in the range Press Enter Swap Focus If you use a pointing device pan level adjustment is normally on the X axis and tilt level adjustment is normally on the Y axis Regardless of where pan and tilt level adjustments are assigned you may reverse these assignments with Swap Focus Follow the onscreen prompt or toggle with the or keys to switch between swap and normal Press Enter Flip Normally when the control to which pan or tilt is assigned is increased the level increases too You may invert this relationship for pan or tilt with Flip which can be used to mirror two moving lights In Fixture Patch Pan is prompted first tilt second For each follow the onscreen prompt or toggle with the or keys to switch between flip and normal Press Enter to complete each assignment Intensity Channel Identifies the channel number of the fixture s intensity channel Expression 3 User Man
311. p 2 00000020005 322 Full Tracking Backup with an LPE e coso nenti eena netam 322 Moving Lights Module 20 20000 eee eee 323 Expression OfPLing amis a ete wpa ite xD dedo g 324 Appendix A Installation co 325 Console s back panel oere e 0 0 00 ees 326 Opening the 6ornsole ak a a ee NE NES 326 Raising the face panel 0 0000 ee eee 326 Replacing fuses ooo 326 AG nputfllses x eret eee bre S P edes 327 RFU Remote OTIS usu tutu e ers 327 Installing the console and monitors 2 0 0 0 328 VGA monitor connections 0 0 sees 328 Understanding ETCNet sess serre rmm RR Es 329 Installing interface devices o ooooooooocooooooo 329 Network WINO desde metere eels ned EE Ded 329 Preparing interface devices llle 329 Installing Full Tracking Backup 0 000220055 330 Installing S MIP TIE sis 4 192 cr da hatte Mace ics p ee dE 330 Setting Expression 3 DIP switches 0004 331 Connecting dimmers to console 0 000000 ea ee 332 Configuring the DMX512 ports 2 6 ee 333 Port starting dimmer numbers 333 Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling 334 Setting DMX512 speed ouaaa ee 334 Mouse or other pointing device liliis iss 335 Installing an alohanumeric keyboard 2 4 336 stalling a printer xo ttv agents of T PEE LES 337 Installing Designer s Worksheet 020220
312. pect to the console The sending and receiving device numbers are disabled by default To enable these devices proceed as follows 1 Press Setup Go to the setup display 2 Press 6 Enter Selects the Options Settings menu 3 Press 2 Enter Prompt reads Select MIDI receiver device 0 126 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI Show Control 4 Enter a number from O to Specifies the number of the device 126 that will send to the console console is the receiver 5 Press Enter Prompt reads Select MIDI transmitter device 0 126 or press DISABLE MIDI to disable MIDI Show Control 6 Enter a number from 0 to Specifies the number of the device 126 5 that will transmit the MSC signal 7 Press Enter Completes the setup a If the MIDI receiver device had been previously specified press S1 Disable MIDI here to remove that specification b If the MIDI transmitter device had been previously specified press S1 Disable MIDI here to remove that specification Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 283 MSC commands received by the console Consoles enabled for MSC accept the following MSC commands When the console receives one of these commands it executes the command immediately In order to accept MSC commands the console s receiver Device ID must match the target device ID for the MIDI device sending the signals e f no cue number is sent Go presses A B Go on the console The next cue on t
313. point to use as group 3 Press 1 Selects focus point 1 to copy Corner reads Focus 1 4 Press Full Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit 5 Once the focus point is Prompt reads displayed press Record To record focus point select number Focus Point and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 5 Enter Enters the number of the new focus point and completes the Copy Corner reads Focus 5 a To copy a focus point s channels and levels to a cue or a submaster press Cue or Sub in place of Focus Point in step 5 32 You can delete all focus points at once with the Clear Focus Points option from the Clear Functions menu See Clear and reset options page 263 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 155 Setting levels with focus points Focus points are commonly used as level setting devices for fixtures but they can be used to set levels for individual channels as well First create a focus point with a certain characteristic such as all fixtures pointed to a particular location or set to a certain color Then set individual fixtures at the levels contained in the focus point as part of your recorded cues groups or submasters Since those recordings are linked to the focus point if levels in the focus point change the corresponding levels in the recordings change to match those in the focus point For example if you change the
314. points The procedure for creating an effect in Stage and adding one or more recorded groups or focus points to its steps is shown below 18 Keystrokes 1 Press Stagel Cuel 6 Press Typel 3 Press Group 5 And 8 Full Press Record Enter Repeat steps 3 4 to create other steps Actions Specifies cue 6 Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Defines the cue as an effect type Prompt reads Select channel numbers Captures groups 5 and 8 at full on stage Prompt reads Group mode Press AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channels numbers to edit Records the step and advances the step indicator to the next in sequence Prompt reads Select channel numbers a Substitute Focus Point for Group to add one or more focus points Specify the step number after Record if you do not want to create the next step in order See Notes on working with steps in Stage page 212 You may also use either of the other two methods discussed in this section to create additional steps 18 Channels added in Stage in focus points do not update in the effect Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 whenever the focus point changes 213 Adding grouped channels The procedure for creating steps in the Stage by adding channels grouped from cues or submasters is shown below Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stage Cuel 7 Specifies cue 7 Pr
315. position levels in the focus point any cues groups or submasters recorded with reference to those fixture positions in the focus point change at the same time Sometimes however you may want to use a focus point to set channel or attribute levels without preserving the link to the focus point You can do that with a unique application of the Level key The following procedure illustrates how to use a focus point in Blind to set the position attributes of fixtures link the levels to the focus point and record the result into a cue The footnote to the procedure explains how to accomplish the same purposes but without the link 1 Press Bling Selects the Blind display 2 Press S8 Fixture 1 Selects fixtures 1 and 2 And 2 3 Press Only Position Sets the pan and tilt attributes of Focus Point 6 Enter fixtures 1 and 2 at focus point 6 4 Press Record 11101 Records into cue 10 a For level setting without a link substitute Level for Enter in this step 156 Chapter 12 Focus points Chapter 13 Submasters Expression 3 provides you with 24 submaster sliders A submaster is a group of channels recorded at proportional levels and controlled by a slider and a bump button Submasters enable you to save complex looks you use frequently and play them back manually They can also be used as building blocks when you create scenes cues or other submasters A channel may be included in any number of submasters Y
316. program by the color of the Timecd number in the upper left corner A red number means the internal clock is running the program a green number means that the external clock is running the program Losing events on the first pass can also happen if you edit a program that is running at the same time To avoid that see Re setting the event list pointer page 301 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 309 Manual playback The Manual Mode Pause Model and Step softkeys allow you to manually control playback of time code events without a time code source enabled Press Time to select an event out of sequence by specifying its code time Use either the Manual Mode or Pause Mode softkeys to ensure that neither an internal nor an external time code clock can run events while you are creating or editing a time code program Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S3 Manual Mode Stops the time code input and resets the console to the first recorded time Or code event Or Press 4 Pause Mode Interrupts time code input at the current time code event 2 Press S5 Step Advances to the next recorded time code event 3 Repeat step 4 to advance sequentially through time code events 4 fyouare in Manual mode X Returns to normal operation and the press S3 Manual Mode time code resumes If you are in Pause mode press S4 Pause Mode a In Manual mode pressing Step starts with the first recorded time code event and procee
317. ption must have been installed at the factory Connect the console to SMPTE equipment using an appropriate SMPTE cable Follow these steps to connect SMPTE equipment to the console 1 Turn console power off 2 Insert SMPTE cable into the connector on the back of the console labeled SMPTE 3 Seta console DIP switch number 4 to enable SMPTE with reference to Setting Expression 3 DIP switches page 331 SMPTE console connector 3 pin female XLR Balanced SMPTE pinout 1 Common 2 Signal 3 Signal Note This pinout is for balanced input For unbalanced input make the following connections in the user cable Connect XLR pin 1 and pin 2 together tying Common to Signal 4 The unbalanced signal connects to XLR pin 3 Signal l See Full Tracking Backup page 321 for more information 330 Appendix A Installation Setting Expression 3 DIP switches All consoles check DIP switch settings when the system is turned on You must restart the console whenever you change DIP switch settings for those new settings to take effect Expression 3 and later models of Expression 2x Concept 2x and Impression 2 those without a key type power switch on the face panel have recessed DIP switches located near the middle of the rear panel shown in Console s back panel page 326 You may toggle these switches up or down from the outside of the console without raising its face panel Set these switches as follows 1 Set DIP switches 2 and 3 t
318. r Press Record Enter Actions Go to the Blind Effects display Prompt reads Select cue number To write effect press STEP Specifies step 5 Select step number s To clear step s select step number s then press CLEAR Selects channels 5 and 8 Prompt reads Select channel number s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s Deletes channels Records your changes to the cue 217 218 Inserting steps You may insert a new step in place of an existing one in an effect The inserted step takes the place of the selected step and other steps are renumbered For instance if inserting a step at number 5 the existing step b becomes step 6 step 6 becomes step 7 and so on The timing and level settings from step 4 are set as initial settings in the new step 5 For example to insert a step between steps 4 and 5 follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Z Press Blind Cue 2 Press S7 More Softkeys Press S5 Insert Step Use the T and N keys to highlight the step you wish to insert Or Enter the number of the Step Press Enter Add channels using one of the techniques available Press Record Enter Action Selects cue 2 Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Select step number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Prompt reads Se
319. r The currently playing backup look will be cleared from the stage Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring Chapter 24 Control interfaces The console can control and be controlled by a wide variety of external devices These control interfaces may be as simple as a switch and as complicated as another piece of electronic equipment They may be timed or asynchronous Chapter 24 explains the following interfaces with the console e ETC MIDI e MIDI Show Control e Real Time Programs e DMX512 Input e MIDI and SMPTE time codes e Remote Macros e Serial Interface Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 279 MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a digital communication protocol that allows you to interconnect musical instruments and digital electronic equipment such as lighting control consoles The console supports MIDI Show Control 1 0 MSC and a subset of MIDI known as ETC MIDI If you are not familiar with MIDI and would like more information on how it works Control Systems for Live Entertainment by John Huntington includes several sections that deal with the subject ETC MIDI The console both transmits and receives MIDI messages with any MIDI instrument The MIDI protocol can control cues macros submaster bump switches and the level wheel ETC assumes that MIDI users have a working knowledge of MIDI This section provides ETC MIDI interface information message formats and message definitions See Installing MIDI pag
320. r disconnected Full Tracking Backup has turned full control of your system over to console A Unable to connect this console as part of a tracking system because of a conflict on the network Verify that no more than two consoles are attached to the network with one set as A and the other set as B Any other combination will not be valid for tracking Be sure to turn on both consoles within thirty seconds of each other Waiting for the master console to respond Please make sure the master console is turned on Both consoles must be turned on within 30 seconds of each other for Full Tracking Backup to be enabled Master console does not respond Please check connections and cabling and make sure that network termination resistors are installed This system is now operating as a stand alone system To re establish tracking turn off both consoles then turn both back on within thirty seconds of each other Waiting for the backup console to respond Please make sure the backup console is turned on Both consoles must be turned on within 30 seconds of each other for Full Tracking Backup to be enabled Backup console does not respond Please check connections and cabling and make sure that network termination resistors are installed This system is now operating as a stand alone system To re establish tracking turn off both consoles then turn both back on within thirty seconds of each other Errors have been detected in the network
321. r eau EX A Blackout Cue 1 cee eee Blackout key Enable Disable With Park eee Blind Cue Tis st 2 Ane hao Displays os wise A et N Multipart cues Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Blocking cue C Ue type Sane trucs eel a eo 86 Explained 2 202 4 6 Bump buttons Enable Disable 33 Status o 162 C C D display i cse ees 21 Captured channels DESTINE dou seta rote dots mathe Be 56 PATCH io oo seated eee ee 49 Category Default assignments 75 IDetihiltiOn sta e roo tn ets et 7 Reset defaultS 76 O dr ce ot ETE 54 Channel AD OUD no rats A ms Bh e iO 65 Captured cro tes oe he op reae t 56 Captured in Patch 49 Channel check 64 Channel levelS 55 Color vs A Ges oe ee 12 FlaShie tens di ons und sims 62 A e Ree e 62 Label 4 4 2 vite Lee ied MAS pe 60 Match to submasters 32 Modest Rs 56 MOVING wie dico savers ettet 56 Plural arta tato 200 Recorded o sd Gavin in tes 56 Release captured 56 Selecta taa ees 62 Selected mesita meni t need 56 Selecting channels 61 Set nil ber se due Loa alado ua 25 SNEAK eg eerte e Reg 63 Specifications 373 System SettiNQS 25 Tracked 3 ond ux eds 56 Wheel s tri t o te a ms 62 Channel Attributes Clear zu stesse ter Sh 263 Pls Li Mead PE sp e ferte 259 SOTINGS aie aie
322. r press RELEASE to unpark 3 Enter the dimmer Selects the dimmer to park number s to park then Prompt reads press At Enter intensity for park dimmer s 4 Enterthe level at which Parks the dimmer at the selected level to park the dimmer Alert appears Parked Dimmers n all references in this chapter to the use of At to set a level you may substitute the Fulll or Level keys See Park page 18 for information about using the Park display 198 Chapter 15 Park Unparking dimmers Unparking one dimmer Unpark one dimmer at a time as follows Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park Dim 3 Enter the dimmer number to unpark and press Rel Unparking all dimmers Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select dimmer number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark Unparks the dimmer Unpark all dimmers at once as follows Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press S6 Park Dim 3 Press Rell 4 Press Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects Stage display Prompt reads Select dimmer number s then press ENTER to park press AT to select level or press RELEASE to unpark Prompt reads To release all parked dimmers press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Unparks all parked dimmers 199 Parking channels Park a channel by specifying the channel number and level You may park multiple channels
323. r reads Focus 2 4 Press Enter Records focus point 2 148 Chapter 12 Focus points Recording a focus point using Solo You can use Solo to selectively record into a focus point in the same manner as using Solo to selectively record into a cue or group There are two ways to select channels with Solo while clearing other independent channels such as other lights and while clearing ALL other channels including non independent ones See Recording a cue using Solo page 98 for examples of these two procedures When using those procedures to record channels into a focus point rather than into a cue press the Focus Point key where they call for pressing the Cue key When working with focus points you are more likely to record selected attribute settings for moving lights than the intensities of ordinary fixtures For example you might use a focus point to store the pan and tilt settings for several lights aimed at a particular location on stage Or you might want to store the settings of colors for those moving lights so that you can use them later when recording cues groups or submasters Remembering that all attributes but the intensity of moving lights are independent only the Solo procedure that can clear either of these allows you to select out moving light attributes such as position and color This was procedure was explained under Using Solo as a pre recording filter page 98 An example of its use for moving lights is given be
324. rameter This chapter includes the following sections e The Blind Effects display e Creating an effect in Blind e Creating an effect in Stage e Modifying the effect e Modifying step timing and levels e Effect fade times e Setting a random effect rate e Running an effect cue e Using an effect submaster Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 205 206 Blind Effects display Effects may be created or edited in the Blind Effects display You enter the Blind Effects display from Blind as soon as you specify the effect type for a new cue or submaster You also enter the Blind Effect display as soon as you specify a cue or submaster that already exists as an effect An illustration of the Blind Effects display for a cue is shown below Cue Type Up Dwell Down Link Follow Rate Label 1 ER D Hold D 200 51 52 53 S4 S6 57 S8 Features The following information is contained in the Blind Effects display e Attributes There are seven attributes of an effect which control how it plays its steps e Random rates When an effect has random rates its steps run at randomly selected step times and step fade times The randomness varies between two editable limits that are shown in the display e Step Each effectis composed of steps There can be up to 100 steps in an effect and each step contains one or more individual channels The number of channels in an effect step is limited only by the number of channels available to the cons
325. rded submaster Also submaster labels and percentage of completion are gray Green ous A green submaster number identifies a pile on sub master Red A red submaster number identifies an inhibitive sub master White A white submaster number identifies an effect sub master Blue A blue submaster number identifies a submaster with a rate that is currently being controlled by the rate wheel A blue R appears at the top of the list with the wheel s setting 2 A Cue List is also shown in this display by default Alternatively you can show a Time Code List in place of the Cue List Toggle between these two displays by pressing Setup 6 Enter 7 Enter select 1 or 0 and press Enter again Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 161 Submaster bump buttons A bump button is located immediately below each submaster slider The bump button s function depends on its status see below and on whether the submaster has a programmed fade If the submaster does not have a programmed fade the bump button allows you to bring up the submaster s contents on stage instantly Press the bump button to raise the submaster to its full recorded level Hold the button to maintain the levels on stage Release the button to remove the submaster s levels If the submaster has a programmed fade the bump button allows you to start the fade or to reverse the direction of an ongoing fade Press the bu
326. re presented with the Blind Effects display Prompt reads Select step number s To clear step s select step number s then press CLEAR Following is a table illustrating how to navigate in the Blind Effects display and the resulting feedback Navigation and Feedhack Blind Effects Display fy Z Select a step X X Select a field X X White row selected step Yellow field selected field a f the channel field is selected all channels are highlighted white except for a selected channel which is colored yellow Once you have specified an effect type you may proceed to specify steps either one at a time or in ranges and add channels to them Specify steps by identifying the next one in sequence or by moving through steps with the up down arrow keys Only steps that contain channels will be active in the effect Add channels to an effect step in any of the following ways e directly either individually or in a range e in groups focus points or channels linked to a focus point e in grouped cues or submasters Channels added in a focus point or linked to a focus point automatically change in the step whenever they change in the focus point Chapter 16 Effects Notes on working with steps in Blind e Steps may be specified one at a time or in ranges e Channels at Full in the Blind Effects display do not show the level except when set at a focus point e f you add a channel mo
327. re than once to a step it takes the last level assigned 6 Adding channels directly The procedure for creating steps by adding channels to them in the Blind Effects display is shown below Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S1 Step andenter Specifies next step to be created the step number A new Prompt reads step mustalways have the Select step number s next highest number To clear step s select step beginning with step 1 number s then press CLEAR 2 Press Chan 1 Thru B Specifies channels to be added Prompt reads Select channel number s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel levels 3 Press S8 Add Channels Adds channels to step at level 50 At 5110 Prompt reads Select channel number s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel levels 4 Press Record Enter Records the channels to the effect step Prompt reads Select cue number To write effect press STEP Channels groups focus points or grouped channels may be added one at a time or in multiples If added in multiples and the number to be added exceeds the number of steps specified they are assigned on a one to one basis in a rotating order to all specified steps For example adding channels 1 through 10 to steps 1 through 4 results in the following assignment Channels Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 5 9 6 1 0 Ah 0 NO O1 Expression 3
328. re to park the channels of a cue submaster or focus point except press the Cuel Sub or Focus Point key in place of the Group key in step 2 of this procedure Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Live display 2 Press S6 Park Group Prompt reads Group mode Select group number then press AT to park or press Release to unpark 3 Enter the group number Selects the group to park and press At Prompt reads Group mode Enter intensity 4 Enter the level at which to Parks the channels at the selected park the group s channel level Unparking recorded channels You can unpark all channels that are recorded into a cue submaster group or focus point Follow the procedure below to unpark the channels in a cue To unpark channels in a submaster group or focus point press the Sub Group or Focus Point key in place of the Cue key in step 2 of this procedure Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display 2 Press S6 Park Cuel Prompt reads Group mode Select cue number to use as group then press AT to park or press Release to unpark 3 Press 5 Rel Unparks cue five s channels 95 Parking focus point channels only takes the current levels in the focus point It does not create a link to the focus point 202 Chapter 15 Park Parking fixtures You can park fixtures one at a time or in ranges either at levels set from the keypad or at a focus point Fixtures may
329. readsheet In the cue spreadsheet you have the option of tracking any cues you create or modify Press Blind S3 Spreadsheet to go to the cue spreadsheet 3 04 05 06 07 OS Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 187 Creating cues Cues may be created in the cue spreadsheet with or without tracking enabled After entering the cue spreadsheet as explained on the previous page create a cue with the tracking option enabled as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S7 Enable Sets tracking enabled Tracking 2 Press S2 Create Cue Prompt reads To create a new cue select cue number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 5 Enter Selects cue 5 Prompt reads Select channel s 4 Press 5 Thru 1 0 Selects channels to include Press Full Sets channels 5 through 10 to full Prompt reads Enter intensity 6 Repeat steps 4 5 Continue selecting channels and setting levels until done a Use either the Track key or the cue spreadsheet softkey to toggle the tracking mode Press once or twice until the yellow message in the upper right corner of the spreadsheet display confirms your choice Editing cues Follow the procedure above for creating a cue in spreadsheet except press S1 Select Cue rather than softkey S2 in step 2 Deleting cues In the cue spreadsheet delete one or more cues as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press S6 Delete Cue Prompt reads To delete cue s select number s
330. red changes to the additional ones and set levels cue 4 Press Record Enter Re records cue with desired modifications a Insert a different cue number between Record and Enter in this step to record the look to another cue When you record to another cue the modifications are not reflected in the fader If you don t want to lose the look from stage run the cue through a fader before you release channels 18 fyou are not familiar with procedures for playing back cues see Chapter 10 Playing back cues page 125 100 Chapter 7 Cues Modifying cue attributes If all you want to do is modify a cue attribute such as cue timing you can do that in Stage without first playing back the cue Use the procedure below to modify cue attributes Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage or Bling Selects display mode 2 Press Cue then enter the Selects the desired cue number of the desired cue 3 Press the key that corresponds to the attribute you want to modify Options include Type Time Wait Link Follow and Label 4 Enter the new setting for Modifies cue attribute the attribute 5 Press Enter Re records cue with modifications a Note that if you change the cue s type press Record Enter in step 5 Type changes will not take effect unless recorded Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 101 102 Updating cues Update allows you to modify previously recorded cues groups submasters or focus poi
331. ress 1 Dimming System Status Enter Press S3 Record Backup Enter the backup look number 1 32 and press Enter Action Creates look on stage Selects Setup display Selects ETCLink Functions menu Selects System Status display Prompt reads Select backup look to record then press ENTER Advisory reads Record Backup processing has completed Press Clear to continue 277 278 Playing a backup look Playing a backup look brings up the recorded look on stage You may play back a backup look from the console or from a CEM Only one backup look may be on stage at a time If there is a backup look on stage when you bring up a new one the second look replaces the first Up and down fade times for backup looks are five seconds They cannot be modified To use the console to play a recorded backup look follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 9 ETCLink Selects ETCLink Functions menu Functions and press Enter 3 Press 1 Dimming Selects Dimming System Status System Status Enter display 4 Press S2 Play Backup Prompt reads Select backup look to play then press ENTER Enter 0 to return to normal operation 5 Enter the backup look Advisory reads number 1 32 and press Play Backup processing has Enter completed Press Clear to continue a To clear a playing backup look enter 0 in step 5 as the backup look numbe
332. ress AT or use wheel or trackpad to alter levels or select channel numbers to edit 4 Press Record Cuel 3 Records the current level settings as Enter cue 3 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 137 138 Group Editing mode in Blind Add or delete channels or change channel levels in a recorded group by first entering Group Editing mode in Blind You can also set group levels with reference to a focus point 8 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode 2 Press Group 1 Selects group 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a group select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a group select the number and press ENTER 3 Press Enter Sets channels to their levels recorded in the group Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press 2 5 Thru 3 0 Modifies look adding channels 25 At 5 0 through 30 at 50 percent 5 Press Record Prompt reads To record group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter Records the modified group a Specify a number here to record to a different group such as 5 10 Enter If that group exists it is overwritten If it does not exist it is created 76 See Setting levels with focus points page 156 Chapter 11 Groups Working with groups in Stage Displaying a group To view a recorded group on stage follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press Group 2
333. ress Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Sub 1 5 Enter Selects sub 15 All channels in sub 15 if an inhibitive submaster are displayed with IN in their level fields Prompt reads Select channel numbers Press 5 2 Clear Clears channel 52 Press Record Sub Records sub 15 without channel 52 Enter Chapter 13 Submasters Modifying submasters in Blind To modify a submaster in Blind follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 1 3 Press Enter 6 Enter channel numbers and set desired new levels Press Record Press Enter Actions Selects Blind display Prompt reads Select submaster number To select submaster type press TYPE Brings up current level settings for submaster 1 Prompt reads Select channel numbers Sets new levels Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Changes to submaster 1 are recorded Modifying submasters in Stage Re recording submasters To modify a submaster in Stage with Record follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Stage Use the submaster slider to raise submaster 2 to full on stage Enter channel numbers and set desired new levels Press Record then press submaster 2 s bump button Press Rel Slide submaster slider to zero then back to full Actions Selects Stage display Submaster 2 s
334. ress either Go button C D display The C D display shows the cue number of the cue currently playing in the C D fader Record display The Record display shows the currently selected item In Stage or Fader modes this would be either a cue or a submaster In Blind mode this would be a cue submaster or group In Track Sheet this would be the selected cue or the highest selected cue if more than one are selected Channel Group display The Channel Group display generally shows the last selected channel or group In Stage Fader or Blind modes this could be either a group or a channel In Tracksheet the channel you are tracking appears In Patch mode if you are setting a channel to a level on stage that channel s number appears Rate X display When the Rate wheel is used as a level wheel when adjusting linked channels this display shows the level to which the channel is set Otherwise the display is not used See Chapter 14 Working with moving lights for more information about this wheel If more than one channel is selected the display will show the level of the highest numbered channel Level Y display The Level Y display shows the level to which the currently selected channel is set If more than one channel is selected the display will show the level of the highest numbered channel Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 22 Chapter 2 Monitor displays Chapter 3 System settings System settings allow you to cus
335. ress submaster 6 s bump Updates submaster 6 button You cannot update a channel in a submaster to a level higher than the submaster slider s level For example if you have the slider set to 5 the highest level to which you can update the sub is 50 5 If not restricted with Only all captured and selected channels are included in the update 6 172 For an explanation of captured channels see Channel modes page 56 For an explanation of Only see The Only command page 8 Chapter 13 Submasters Updating a recorded submaster You need not bring up the submaster to update it The following procedure illustrates how to update any recorded submaster Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Stagel Press S8 Fixture 1 Thru 8 Full Set the pan and tilt levels Press S2 Update Sub Press Pagel 3 To restrict channels in the update use Only as explained under The Only command page 8 Press submaster 6 s bump button a gt Optional step Action Selects Stage display mode Selects fixtures 1 through 8 and sets their intensities to full Sets levels for fixture 8 pan and tilt attributes Prompt reads To update submaster press BUMP or select number and press ENTER Press 0 ENTER to select all submasters only those channels already in sub Selects submaster page 3 Prompt reads Select submaster page to update and press ENTER or submaster BU
336. rking with focus points in Stage e Editing focus points in Blind e Labeling focus points e Deleting focus points e Copying focus points e Setting levels with focus points 30 See DMX In page 294 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 147 Recording a focus point You can create a focus point in Stage Blind or Fader displays using all the same techniques available to create groups Recording a focus point in Stage The following example illustrates the creation of a focus point containing settings for the intensity and position attributes of several fixtures Note the use of Only to conveniently identify the position category Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects the Stage display 2 Press S8 Fixture 1 Selects fixture 1 3 Set intensity pan and tilt levels 4 Press or S8 to select another fixture 5 Repeat steps 3 4 Repeat procedure for all fixtures to be included in the focus point 6 Press Record Focus Point 7 Press 3 Enters number of focus point 8 Press Enter Records focus point 3 Creating a focus point from a look on stage To create a focus point from the look that is already on stage follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode 2 Press Record Focus Prompt reads Point To record focus point select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 3 Press 2 Enters the focus point number you want to record Corne
337. rom running before it runs ina physical fader 228 Chapter 17 Subroutines Style steps The following playback styles are available for subroutines A style is assigned to a step When the subroutine runs the steps play back in numeric order until the subroutine reaches a style step The style step then determines whether the subroutine will loop bounce hold or end and run a different cue Loop The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Loop step It then returns to the first step and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Loop step enter the number of times you want the loop to return to the top of the step list If you enter 5 the sequence will play six times Enter 0 to create a continuous loop Bounce The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Bounce step It then runs back through the steps in reverse order and repeats the sequence for the number of times you specify When you create the Bounce step enter the number of times you want the subroutine to bounce One bounce equals running through the sequence forward once and reverse once Enter 0 for a continuous bounce Jump to cue The subroutine runs through steps until it reaches a Jump to cue step It then automatically starts another cue which is not included in the subroutine You can jump to any type of cue regular subroutine or effect When you create the Jump to cue step enter the number of the cue to wh
338. rom the fader fading all channels in that fader to zero Channels black out immediately when clear time is zero Fader clear times can be programmed from 0 1 second to 99 59 minutes See Setting default fade times page 26 for information about entering the time value Follow these steps to set a new default fade time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 5 Default Fader Prompt reads Clear Time and press Enter default fader clear time Enter 4 Press 9 to enter the time Corner reads value you wish to assign Time 9 5 Press Enter New default time is set to nine seconds The factory set default fader clear time is zero seconds Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 27 Setting default sneak time The sneak function allows you to fade or restore channel levels on stage in a specified time The console allows you to assign a default Sneak time For more information about the Sneak function see page 63 Follow these steps to set a new Sneak time Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Select 1 System Selects System Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Select 6 Default Sneak Prompt reads Time and press Enter Enter default sneak time 4 Enterthe time you wishto Sets the new default Sneak time assign as the Sneak time and press Enter 10 The
339. rrows 2 Select an encoder page with the left right arrows Press Enter 3 Select an attribute with the or keys or use Only to select attributes Press Enter 4 Continue making changes until done When a page and encoder are selected you can move quickly to other pages or encoders with the arrow keys Change automatically The console can make automatic level setting assignments for all fixture attributes you are using in your show One reason you may want to use this automatic assignment feature is to ensure that all your attributes are included in the encoder setup 20 do not appear in a default setup Another reason is to quickly concentrate your attributes on the lower numbered pages thus reducing the need to change pages when setting levels Only attributes in the current show are assigned pan and tilt are assigned to the pointing device on every page This feature is available as a softkey called Autoload Encoders in Fixture Patch or in the Encoder Setup display in Fixture Patch you may need to press S7 More Softkeys first In the Encoder Setup display press S6 Autoload Encoders you must press Enter twice to confirm After executing an Autoload assignment the Encoder Setup display resembles the one shown in the illustration below 51 52 53 S4 ss S6 i 37 58 Resetting defaults You may return to the default level setting assignments anytime you wish In the Encoder Setup display press S7
340. rrupt the program by interrupting the time code signal that drives it If you are using the console s internal clock you only need to disable that Likewise if you are driving the program with an external time code clock you need only disable the external clock If using both clocks you need to interrupt both the internal and the external time code signals to interrupt the program Please note that when you disable an external clock while relying on the internal clock for backup the resynchronization of the clocks cannot occur in less than five seconds after the external signal is restored Any events scheduled during that resynchronization period will be missed on that pass but will be picked up on the next pass of the program If you have been editing the program the events list pointer may need to be reset Without leaving the Time Code Event Display and without disabling the clock you can force the event pointer to reset with the Learn Mode softkey This works because when you leave Learn Mode by pressing softkey S6 a second time you force a resorting of time code events in the program and a reset of the event pointer There is no need to actually use Learn Mode just press the Learn Mode softkey twice in succession to do the job Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 301 Resetting loop time A time code program loop plays from the first event time to the last event time then resets and plays again Any events with code times before th
341. s 1 Enter Press 1 gt Press 1 1 bol Go back to step 3 Action Selects Channel Attributes display Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number Channels in ML fixture patch cannot be linked Selects link number for instance 1 Prompt reads Select X channel number s Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link Channel 1 is assigned to the link s X list Prompt reads Select Y channel number s Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link Channel 11 is assigned to the link s Y list Link entry is complete Prompt reads Select link number Channels in ML fixture patch cannot be linked Create additional links if needed 247 248 Inserting a link Use the edit features softkey S5 Insert Link to insert an empty link number ahead of the selected or specified link All subsequent links will be renumbered Note The order in which links are recorded does not affect their operation However your numbering may be useful to you in terms of logical organization To insert a link follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setupl 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 3 Press S5 Insert Link Prompt reads Select link number to insert then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 1 Enter Selec
342. s 2 Press 5 Enter Selects submaster 5 Prompt reads Select channel s 3 Press 5 Thru 1 0 Selects channels to include Prompt reads Select intensity 4 Press Full Sets channels 5 through 10 to full 5 Repeat steps 3 4 Continue selecting channels and setting levels until done 190 Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Deleting submasters After entering the submaster spreadsheet as explained above delete a submaster as follows Keystrokes 1 2 3 Press S6 Delete Sub Press 5 And 6 Press Enter Enter Replacing channel level As a convenient editing technique you may specify a particular level to change for a channel or number of channels After entering the submaster spreadsheet as explained on the previous page replace channel level as follows Keystrokes 1 M Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press S1 Select Sub Press 5 Enter Press 5 Thru 11 0 S3 Replace Level 5 0 Press Enter Press Full Enter Actions Prompt reads To delete submaster s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects submasters 5 and 6 Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes submasters 5 and 6 Actions Prompt reads Select submaster s Selects submaster 5 Prompt reads Select channel s Selects channels 5 through 10 at level 50 to change Prompt reads Select level to r
343. s If you move either wheel by itself the color will change only on the corresponding scroller To control the scrollers follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stagel Selects Stage display 2 Press 1 Selects channel 1 Channel number is gold signifying that it is assigned to the X list Through the link selects channel 11 Channel number is yellow signifying that it is assigned to the Y list 3 Place your hand so itrests The levels on both channels rise on both the X and Y together each controlled by its wheels Slowly push the corresponding wheel As they do the wheels forward colors change on the color scrollers corresponding to the levels Both wheels levels are displayed in the prompt corner 250 Chapter 19 Link lists Chapter 20 Diskette functions Disk Functions Menu 04 42 PM Write RII To Read Fr E Figuration d RII From Disk This chapter includes instructions for using console diskette options The console is equipped with a 3 5 inch disk drive on the console s right end panel The following options are described in this chapter e Diskette management e Formatting diskettes e Writing to diskette e Reading show configuration or all information from diskette Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 251 Diskette management The console lets you save one show on a double sided high density 1 44 MB 3 5 inch diskette This feature allows you to back up your shows for safety It
344. s Blind display Prompt reads Select submaster number Prompt reads To delete submaster s select number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Sub 2 Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Contents of submaster 2 are cleared 177 178 Chapter 13 Submasters Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets You can display lists of cues submasters groups and focus points on the command monitor using a softkey in the Blind display The command monitor lists of cues and submasters are similar to the Cue and Submaster Lists shown on the playback monitor These lists allow you to change the timing of cues and submasters and label items on the list They also allow you to delete items from a list Also available by softkey from the Blind display are spreadsheets for cues submasters groups and focus points Spreadsheets allow you to add or delete items from the list such as to create new cues or groups Following are the topics included in this chapter e Cue List on the command monitor e Submaster List on the command monitor e Group List e Focus Point list e Editing in lists e Cue Submaster Group and Focus Point spreadsheets e Editing in spreadsheets amp Sub List can also be displayed with a softkey in Stage Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 179 Cue List The Cue List available from the Blind display allows editing of upfade downfade and wait times link
345. s Sets group levels or selects additional desired channels and sets their levels 4 Press S2 Update Prompt reads To update cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Torestrict channels in the Restricts channels in update update use Only here Prompt reads Select channel number s To cancel press CLEAR Press 0 to reselect all non zero channels 6 Press Group 4 Enter Updates group 4 a If not restricted with Only all captured and selected channels are included in the update 27 For an explanation of captured channels see Channel modes page 56 For an explanation of Only see The Only command page 8 Chapter 11 Groups Updating a recorded group You need not place a group on stage to update it The following procedure illustrates how to update any recorded group Keystrokes 1 Press Stage 2 Press 5 0 Thru 71 5 At 9 Enter 3 Press S2 Update Group 3 4 To restrict channels in the update use Only here 5 Press Enter a If not restricted with Only are included in the update Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Action Selects Stage display mode Selects channels and sets levels Selects group 3 to update Prompt reads To update group select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects channels to update Prompt reads Select channel numbers To cancel press CLEAR Press 0 to reselect all non zero channels
346. s Setup display 2 Press S1 Show Name Prompt reads Type show label F6 clear to end 3 Enter the name you want New name appears in corner of screen to give the show on the alphanumeric keyboard The show name can have up to 20 characters 4 Press Enter on the Show is named alphanumeric keyboard or console to record the name or press Esc to quit and return to Setup display 14 See Alphanumeric keyboard page 320 for information about installing an alohanumeric keyboard Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 37 38 About Show About Show provides you with information about the currently loaded show It tells you how many channels and dimmers your show is configured for and your utilization of recordable entities such as cues submasters groups focus points macros and time code events This is important because not enough memory is available to store the maximum number of all recordable entities at the same time Use About Show to monitor your memory usage as the complexity of your show increases If you fill the available memory reclaim some of it by clearing recorded entities that you are no longer using for example by reducing how many channels and dimmers are patched Press About Enter to go to the About Show display About Show Label MyShow Humber of chann Humber of dimmer 1t Recorded G F D D hi Ln Memory left e Label Your show name assigned in the Setup menu
347. s displayed About Dimmer 3 Label Proportion 100 Console dimmer level DMX512 Port 143 e Label e Channel e Proportion e Profile e Console dimmer level e Parked e DMX512 Port Channel 3 Profile 0 Linear Parked n The dimmer s label if any The channel to which the dimmer is assigned The dimmer s assigned proportional level The dimmer profile s number and name if assigned The output level the console currently is sending to the dimmer Whether or not the dimmer is parked Port number address on the port 25 Press Clear to remove the About window Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 51 52 About Dimmer with ETCLink If your console uses ETCLink to monitor dimmers in an ETC Sensor dimming system the About Dimmer window displays additional dimmer monitoring information The following expanded About Dimmer window appears if dimmer monitoring is enabled Lobel Proportion 100 le dimmer level Port 1 3 Rack s lot number Rack dimmer level Dimmer level source Dimmer errors None e Label e Channel e Proportion e Profile e Console dimmer level e Parked e DMX512 Port e Rack Slot number e Rack dimmer level e Dimmer level source Channel 3 Profile 0 Linear Parked n orded lamp load d at full DMX A f yal load Scale Boost The dimmer s label if any The channel to which the dimmer is assigned The dimmer s assigned propor
348. s involves the next channel in order as well The enabled channel is called the HI channel because it holds the high order bits of the 16 bit data The subsequent channel is called the LO channel because it holds the low order bits Either may be reassigned to 8 bit data but when you do that both channels of a 16 bit pair are reassigned at once Use the procedure below to enable one channel or a range of channels for 16 bit data Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 3 Enter channel number s Selects channel s 4 Press S3 16b Prompt reads Enable Disable 16 bit channel s 1 Enable 0 Disable Channels in ML fixture patch cannot be edited except label 5 Press 1 Enter Each selected channel is set for 16 bit use Channel convention Channels normally operated in HTP mode but may be enabled to operate in LTP mode Use the procedure below to enable one channel or a range of channels for LTP mode Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Press 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 3 Enter channel number s Selects channel s 4 Press S6 LTP Prompt reads Enable Disable last takes precedence channel s 1 LTP 0 Normal Channels in ML fixture patch cannot be edited except label a Press 1 Enter Each selected channel is set as LTP 31 See Output level conventions pag
349. s may be set with the keypad or with reference to focus points Follow the procedure below to edit channel levels in a recorded effect cue that has at least 5 steps Levels are set with reference to a focus point Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Cue 1 Go to the Blind Effects display Prompt reads Select cue number To write effect press STEP 2 Press S1 Step 5 Specifies step 5 Select step number s To clear step s select step number s then press CLEAR 3 Press Chan 5 And 8 Selects channels 5 and 8 Prompt reads Select channel number s and press ADD CHANNELS to add to step s or press AT to edit existing channel level s 4 Press At Focus Point 1 Sets levels of channels 5 and 8 to their Enter levels in focus point 1 5 Repeat steps 2 4 to set Continue to edit channels levels in other steps Alternatively use the up down arrow keys to move to other steps for editing 6 Press Record Enter Records your changes to the cue Adding channels Add additional channels to an effect step using any of the procedures used to add channels when the step was created See Creating an effect in Blind page 208 216 Chapter 16 Effects Deleting channels Delete channels from a previously created effect step with the following procedure Keystrokes 1 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Blind Cue 1 Press S1 Step 5 Press Chan 5 And 8 Press Clea
350. s option from the Clear Functions menu as described on page 263 To clear identified macros follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 8 Macro Editing Selects Macro display mode and press Enter 3 Press S6 Delete Macro Prompt reads To delete macro s select macro number s and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 7 2 Corner reads Macro 7 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press Enter Clears macro 7 n step 4 you may use And and Thru to enter multiple macros to clear Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 241 Copying macros You may want to copy a macro or use macros as building blocks for new macros To copy contents of one macro to another follow these steps Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Setup Selects Setup display 2 Press 8 Macro Editing Selects Macro display mode and press Enter Prompt reads Select macro number then press ENTER 3 Press S7 More Prompt reads Softkeys S5 Copy To copy macro s select macro Macro number s to copy and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 2 2 Enters the number of the macro you wish to copy Corner reads Macro 2 5 Press Enter Prompt reads To copy selected macro s select target macro and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 2 5 the number of Corner reads Macro 25 the new macro 7 Press Enter Macr
351. s recorded into cue You can delete a cue in either Blind or Stage Follow the procedure below to delete a cue in Blind Follow the same procedure in Stage except press S7 More Softkeys after pressing Stage to display the Delete key as softkey S6 Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press S6 Delete Cue 3 Enter number of cue to delete 4 Press Enter 5 Press Enter Action Selects Blind mode Prompt reads To Delete cue press ENTER Delete cue and tracking press TRACK ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects cue to delete Prompt reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes cue a Optional if deleting the currently selected cue b To delete the cue and any channels that track press Track before Enter For more information on tracking see Chapter 8 Track Chapter 7 Cues Copying cues You may want to use a cue s channel levels as the foundation for a new cue group or submaster Use the following procedure to perform a copy operation This copy may be performed either in Blind or in Stage To copy a cue to another cue in Stage follow the procedure below If copying in Blind rather than in Stage omit step 3 from this procedure Keystrokes 1 2 Press Stage Press Cue 1 Press Go Press Record Press 2 Press Enter Actions Selects the Stage display Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Prompt
352. se level does not change through a series of consecutive cues is said to track from cue to cue That same sequence of unchanged levels is also referred to as a track The Track key in Blind tracks into the new cue by pulling channel levels from the previous cue In Stage or Blind the Track key adds tracks to subsequent cues The following examples demonstrate how Track works They include five cues each with five channels In these examples when a channel changes level from one cue to the next it is printed in bold tracked channels are printed normally This corresponds to how Blind displays levels channels that rise or fall are displayed in blue or green tracked channels are displayed in purple Using record to create tracks Use the following keystrokes in Stage to create the five cues illustrated below see Recording a cue in Stage page 89 Each cue adds channels to the previous cue Cue 1 1 Full Record 1 Enter Cue2 2 Full Record 2 Enter Cue 3 3 Full Record 3 Enter Cue4 1 At 2115 4 Full Record 4 Enter Cue5 1 Thru 4 At O O Record 5 Enter These keystrokes produce the results shown in the following illustration Notice the channel tracks that develop as a channel remains at the same level through a number of cues For example channel 1 tracks from cue 1 to cue 3 22 Chan 1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chand Cue 1 FF Cue 2 FF FF Cue 3 FF FF FF Cue 4 25 FF FF FF
353. secte pas 57 60 Channel zero Setting dimmer count 24 Unpatching dimmers 43 Channel Group display 21 Check Gharntiel uc aes oso vtm 64 CUS rss io iu cs ate ART e duin dud 133 DICTO TE e See oe to te e 50 Dimmer loads 274 383 384 Clear Channel attributes 263 Clear Functions menu 262 EA AE 127 FUNCIONS cms cece eru D oi 262 Groups ooo 143 155 LOS us a eina 275 IVIaGIOS 03 6 AA 241 Moving lightS 263 Patches e tact A caede cts 263 Real time programs 263 Regions 202 319 Reset system 00 262 SOW i e ot kee that geen at 263 SMPTE eventS 303 Submasters vote bs had be 177 Time code events 263 Clock heal tim pv ok ee bd 34 36 Time code external 309 Time code internal 308 Color Channel Fixture 12 LEDS ya Toa aS Php E emu 163 Submaster LiSt 161 Submasters 161 180 Tracked channels defined 56 Color scrollerS o o o o 247 Configuration Read from diSk 255 Saved to showfile 359 Write to diskette 253 Connectors Alphanumeric keyboard 336 BIME rrenetan ban 332 Monitor fitch te do e e ter 354 Printere ica eam ekle 337 BE ne ad 341 Copy Cue or group tosub 177 CUST iss ox NU e ED 105 WACO cT 242 A pope ees 318 SMPTE
354. select channel number then press ENTER To delete dimmers press UNPATCH Dimmer s are patched to the channel a Fora dimmer set to Dimmer Double press S2 A or S3 B after entering the dimmer number If you select a doubled dimmer without specifying A or B the selection defaults to A 41 42 Proportional patching Normally dimmers output with a linear profile at 100 percent unless you scale them to a lower level The console allows you to proportionally scale the output of an individual dimmer in the Patch display 9 For example if you enter a dimmer proportional level of 60 in Patch and set that channel to full in a cue or submaster the dimmer will output at 60 percent Follow these steps to assign a proportional dimmer output level 17 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 Ifthe Dim LED is unlit Prompt reads press Dim to indicate that Select dimmer numbers then press the next number entered ENTER to assign to a channel or will be a dimmer press AT to assign a proportion or press PROFILE to assign a profile Use the keypad to enter Press At Prompt reads Select dimmer proportion Use the keypad to enter Dimmer s proportional level is set dimmer s Full is displayed until a new level is entered Enter a zero before single a If a dimmer is doubled see Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling page 53 for an explanation Use S2 A and S3 B along with the numeric
355. settings page 23 for information about setting up your system If the system is already in place you may not need to refer to these chapters New users If you are new to lighting systems or to ETC s consoles read chapters 4 through 13 for instructions about patching conventional lights and moving light fixtures setting levels and using cues groups and submasters These are the building blocks for creating and running any show Once you are comfortable with these functions chapters 16 through 19 provide more advanced information on effects subroutines macros and link lists Keyboard Help Help screens are available for all console keys including softkeys and wheels To display help screens press Help then press any key on the console Text conventions In this manual console keys and softkeys are indicated by square brackets such as Enter and S1 Messages appearing on a console display are printed in boldface such as Select channel References to other sections of the manual are printed in italics such as Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction Navigation and visual feedback Move through console menus and displays in the ways that work best for you The console offers alternative navigational techniques and visual feedback that confirms your choices all along the way Note how navigation and feedback information is collected in the table below Tables like this are used throughout this User Manual to h
356. shows what results Note that the channel in the new cue is tracked into subsequent cues until a pre recorded level stops it Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Stagel Rel Rel Releases captured channels Prompt reads Select channel numbers 2 Press Cue 1 Go Plays back cue 1 Press 4 At 5 0 Modifies channel 4 Press Track Prompt reads To record cue amp tracking select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 111 111 Enter Records cue 1 1 and tracks for channel 4 through subsequent cues Chan1 Chan2 Chan3 Chan4 Chanb5 Cue 1 50 Cue 1 1 50 50 Cue 2 50 FF 50 Cue 3 50 FF FF 50 Cue 4 25 FF FF FF Cue 5 00 00 00 00 Chapter 8 Track Pulling channels in Blind If you insert in Blind using Track you can get a start on a new cue by using levels already defined in the previous cue You can then add channels or modify levels in the new cue From that point on you can use either Record or Track analogously to the procedures explained above depending upon whether or not you want the channels in the inserted cue to track into subsequent cues Press the following keys to insert cue 2 5 in Blind by pulling in levels from previous cue 2 0 and adding channel 5 at 70 percent Note that the new cue in this example will track into subsequent cues as well because of the second use of Track in step 5 Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind 2 5 Displays empty cue 2 5 Prompt reads Select
357. sion 3 User Manual v 3 1 Additional pads of Designer s Worksheet templates are available from your dealer or ETC 339 Installing the Kurta IS ONE The Kurta IS ONE digitizer tablet was shipped with older Designer s Worksheet systems Follow these steps to install and configure your Kurta IS ONE Designer s Worksheet 1 Insert the 9 pin serial connector of the Designer s Worksheet cable into the console or Remote Interface connector labeled Digitizer 2 Insert the plug end of the pointing device pen or stylus in the IS ONE connector labeled Pen Cursor 3 Attach the pen holder to the upper left or right hand corner of the Worksheet by removing the protective paper from the base and pressing the adhesive to the tablet 4 Place one printed template sheet under the clear plastic flap on the digitizer 5 Setthe voltage selection switch to match your electrical outlet In the US set the voltage switch to 110 6 Plug the power cord into the back of the Worksheet and into an electrical outlet or a surge protecting power strip 7 Setthe three sets of DIP switches on the Worksheet as indicated under Designer s Worksheet DIP switch settings page 340 8 Turn the Worksheet power on by pressing the on off switch The LED labeled Indicator on the back panel is lit when power is on If the LED blinks four times after you turn the power on the interface cable is not connected correctly 9 Follow the procedure under Setup p
358. sis order thaw oe 225 Submaster type 158 Update soe Las 215 Effect submaster defined 158 Enable Blackout key 31 Bump buttons 33 EEG Ines t toe e toe e es 266 Flexichannel 44 ss crees 31 Record Lockout 33 Encoder Autoload o an aaa aaan 0000 79 Print setup 259 Reset defaults 79 SSP i neis ed ona re dur 77 79 Error messages About Dimmer 52 Diskettes t Godin ats wes beds he 356 Full Tracking Backup 355 Ol sank ete eid ote eph 356 ETC locations uc is baba tac 10 ETC MIDI See also MIDI Show Control Message format 281 ETCLink About Dimmer sss 52 Backup looks 4 ees 277 ClearLoads 275 Dimmer statuS 269 Enable tcs Ouse Bad Ase 266 Error messages general 267 Fatal messages 357 Load Check ves ie ERR 274 Record loads 273 Secondary messages 358 Set dimmer 276 Unset dimmer 276 ETCLink address 266 ETCNet Console DIP switches 331 Install remote monitor 354 Monitor displays 11 Using ETCNet2 devices 329 MA Tal ne NOB ER DOT EQ ME 329 ETCNet2 devices Discover nodes 347 Using on BTCNet ies 329 A temer d 329 ETCNet2 DMX Node 329 ETCNet2 Video Node
359. sitive or Negative An effect is initially positive when it is created e Alternate Reverse Bounce and Build can be applied in any combina tion to a Positive or a Negative effect e Random can be applied to any Positive or Negative effect Random may not be combined with Alternate Reverse Bounce or Build 220 Chapter 16 Effects Modifying step timing and levels Once all steps are defined for an effect you can either accept the defaults or you can change one or more settings in a single operation The step defaults are as follows e Step Time 0 2 seconds e In Time 0 seconds e Dwell Time 0 seconds e Out Time 0 seconds Low Level Zero e High Level Full Set step timing and levels of a recorded effect with the following procedure Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Cue 1 Go to the effects display for a previously recorded effect cue Prompt reads Select cue number To write effect press STEP 2 Press S1 Step 5 Specifies step 5 Prompt reads Select step number s To clear step s select step number s then press CLEAR 3 Press S7 More Selects step time field Softkeys S2 Step Prompt reads Time Select step time 4 Press 1 0 Enter Sets step time to 10 seconds and advances to the next field Prompt reads Select step in time 5 Press 2 Enter Sets step in time to 2 seconds and advances to the next field Prompt reads Select step dwell time 6 Press 6 Enter Sets d
360. ss 2 Enter Press Enter Press 2 5 the number of the new region Press Enter Actions Selects Setup display Selects Macro display mode Prompt reads Select region number or touch a previously defined region then touch ENTER Prompt reads To copy region s select region number s to copy and touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR Prompt reads To copy selected region s select target region and touch ENTER To cancel touch CLEAR Prompt reads To copy selected macro s select target macro and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Corner reads Region 25 Region copy is complete The contents of region 2 have been copied into region 25 a You may use And and Thru to enter multiple regions to copy If you do the new regions will be numbered consecutively starting with the region you enter in step 6 Chapter 25 Accessories Clearing regions You must be in Designer s Worksheet Editing display mode to clear individual regions To clear all regions you can use the Clear Designer s Worksheet option from the Clear Functions menu as described in Chapter 22 Clear functions page 261 Note Clearing regions does not affect the macro assigned to the region Clearing a region removes it from the digitizer and the Designer s Worksheet display and removes the macro assignment To clear regions follow these steps Keystrokes 1 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Setup Pr
361. ssion 3 User Manual v 3 1 123 124 Chapter 9 Multipart cues Chapter 10 Playing back cues The console has two timed faders that allow you to play back recorded cues Cue selection and playback can be automated or you can control them manually This chapter includes the following sections Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Selecting cues Timed faders and LED displays Playback Cue List Fader Status display Selecting and playing cues Go to a different cue Controlling fades manually Quickstep 125 126 Timed faders and LED displays The console has two timed fader pairs called the A B and C D fader pairs that allow you to play back recorded cues A B pair illustrated at A B right The left slider A and C of each fader pair 10 controls upfades The right slider B and D of each fader pair controls downfades When reference is made in this and other sections of this User Manual to a fader you should assume that both sliders of the fader pair are implied s unless otherwise noted 5 You may play back a cue using the timing 3 information programmed into it or you may take manual control of the slider s Taking manual control of faders is covered under Controlling fades manually page 131 You may play back cues one at a time through the same fader or you may simultaneously play back a different cue in each fader For example you may play a ten minute sunset cyc cue in one fader and play several cues during
362. ster Yellow field selected field Editing submasters Changes made to a submaster in the Command Submaster List are immediately recorded Edit in the Submaster List as follows Keystrokes Actions 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display 2 Press Sub S2 Sub List Displays Submaster List Select submaster number s 3 Press 1 3 Enter Selects submaster 23 Prompt reads Select bump status and press ENTER 12enabled 2 disabled 3 solo 4 Press 1 Enter Enables bump status for the submaster Prompt reads Enter upfade time 5 Press 5 Enter Specifies 5 second upfade time Prompt reads Enter dwell time For hold or manual operation press CLEAR until desired setting appears 6 Press 1 5 Enter Specifies 15 seconds dwell time Prompt reads Enter downfade time a If not changing the bump status for example if the submaster is already enabled you may just press Enter Alternatively you may press Type Time or Label keys to reach the field you want Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets 7 Press 5 Enter 8 Press 2 Enter 9 Press 21 0 0 Enter 10 Enter your label on the keypad then press Enter Deleting submasters Specifies 5 second downfade time Prompt reads Select submaster type 1 Pile on 2 Inhibitive 3 Effect Specifies inhibitive type Prompt reads Use keypad to select submaster rate 0 2000 100 Normal Specifies rate 200
363. strokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 If the Dim LED is unlit Prompt reads Select dimmer press Dim to indicate that numbers then press ENTER to the next number entered assign to a channel or press AT to will be a dimmer assign a level or press PROFILE to assign a profile 3 Use the keypad to enter the desired dimmer number s Use And Thru or Except for multiple selections 4 Press S6 Unpatch Selected dimmers are unpatched and assigned to channel zero Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 44 Labeling dimmers The console allows you to assign alphanumeric labels to your dimmers Dimmer labels may be up to five characters long and may consist of any combination of characters including letters numbers and symbols You can also hide or view labels you have assigned to dimmers Press S8 Show Hide Labels to toggle between these conditions Hiding labels provides space to show additional dimmers This example demonstrates how to assign a label to a dimmer Keystrokes Action 1 Press Patch Selects Patch display 2 Press 5 Label Selects dimmer 5 to label Prompt reads Type dimmer label F6 clear to end F7 last dimmer label F8 next dimmer label 3 Use the alphanumeric Corner reads Label House keyboard to type House 4 Press Enter on the Dimmer 5 is labeled House console s keypad a If you wish to label another dimmer press F7 or F
364. susct cu pug vt M Pay m ETUR en 271 Monitoring dimmers sssss eee 272 Load Management display 0 02020005 272 Record Loads procedures isad uus vn eii epe REOS bs 273 Load Gheck procedure eod eae a EE x 274 Clear Loads procedure lille 275 Setting and unsetting dimmers naasa aana 00002 else 276 S ttiDg a dirmmel tia nce sd obits oa ated 276 Unsetting a dimmer sieme sepa ae E E 00 cee eee eee 276 Working with Sensor backup looks 0 0 0 000 cee eee 277 Recording a backup look 000 000220 e eee 277 Playing a backup look 0 0 0c ee 278 Chapter 24 Control interfaces eee 279 MIDIS tia iros Eb Ne bis us d a 280 ETCMIDMLE ara c da Pd A ae ieee ae POOR S 280 MIDI Show Control MSC sai eis de nead e E eee 283 Real time programs o o otram ees 288 Go to the Real Time Programs display 288 Enabling disabling real time programs 289 Creating real time programs 0 0 eee eee 290 Editing real time programs 000000 20 eee 292 Deleting real time programs 0000220005 292 Inserting real time programs 0002220005 292 Copying real time programs 0 0 0 0 cee eee 293 Moving real time programs 00002020 00 293 Sorting recording real time programs 05 293 DD E 294 Enabling DMX In ooo 294 Working with DMX In and focus pointO 295 Using DMX In
365. t for Normal mode 6 Press Enter twice to confirm your choice 7 Display identifies mode as either Normal or Double Setting DMX512 speed If your console is controlling a dimming system that requires a slower DMX512 signal specify this in the Output Configuration screen The console is designed to run at the highest rate provided for in DMX512 specifications Some dimming systems including some Colortran ENR M dimmers may require a signal slower than the full DMX512 specification If this proves necessary you may reset the console s signal speed Speed choices are Slow Medium Fast and Max When installed the console defaults to Max If you have problems with outputs flashing fades not running smoothly or unselected dimmers rising spontaneously experiment with slower speeds until the symptoms disappear If the symptoms persist please call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 To reset the DMX512 signal speed follow these steps 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Select 2 Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S4 DMX512 Speed 4 Press 0 for Max 1 for Fast 2 for Medium or 3 for Slow The speed you choose appears in the upper right corner of the display 5 Press Enter to confirm your choice The display shows the speed setting 334 Appendix A Installation Mouse or other pointing device Expression 3 consoles have a dedicated port to which a pointing device such as a mouse
366. t board in the lid of the console With the lid in an upright position the jumper should be near the lower right corner of the circuit board 2 The jumper at location J5 should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1A for MIDI Out to be active To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 On older consoles with keyswitch power switches the jumper locations are slightly different With older consoles proceed as follows 1 Locate the jumper at location J20 on the face panel circuit board in the lid of the console With the lid in an upright position the jumper should be near the lower right corner of the circuit board just below the level wheel 2 The jumper at location J20 should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1 for MIDI Out to be active To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 3 Close the console and test for proper operation Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 343 344 Installing remote macros The console provides eight remote macro inputs through the 25 pin connector on the back panel labeled Remote Go A user supplied remote device connects to the console via a 24 AWG aluminum shielded multi conductor cable with one twisted pair designated for each switch Belden 9507 S R PCV Insulated or Alpha 5477 80 Deg C 300 V PVC The cable connector at the remote device will vary depending on the device itself C
367. t reads To confirm press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Deletes focus points 5 and 6 As a convenient editing technique you may specify a particular level to change for a channel or number of channels After entering the focus point spreadsheet as explained on the previous page replace channel level as follows Keystrokes 1 Press S1 Select Focus M Press 5 Enter 3 Press 5 Thru 1110 S3 Replace Level 5 0 4 Press Enter 5 Press Full Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Actions Prompt reads Select focus point s Selects focus point 5 Prompt reads Select channel s Selects channels 5 through 10 at level 50 to change Prompt reads Select level to replace and press ENTER Prompt reads Select new level and press ENTER Changes all channels in the range 5 though 10 with level 50 to level full 195 196 Chapter 14 Command display lists and spreadsheets Chapter 15 Park Park allows you to set channels dimmers and fixtures at levels that are maintained on stage These levels are not recorded into cues and are independent of most other instructions except as follows e Blackout will turn off parked dimmers channels and fixtures unless they are independent channels e Channels parked at a focus point will update the parked levels if the levels change in the focus point If a dimmer is parked and the channel that controls it also is parked the dimmer s p
368. t software version 3 0 and above installed in your Expression 2x system the ML Module provides all the functionality of an Expression 3 You can even attach a pointing device such as a mouse trackball or trackpad to the ML Module for added convenience in making selections and setting levels Installation 1 Switch off the console power 2 Connect the ML Module to the console port labeled Digitizer Serial You cannot use the Digitizer Serial port for any other purpose when using it for the ML Module 3 Plug the power cord of the Moving Lights Module into a wall receptacle or a power strip Enable the ML Module with the following procedure 1 Switch on the console power 2 Press Setup 6 Option Settings Enter to go to the Options Settings menu 3 Press 1 2 External Port Enter 4 Press 2 Enter to enable the ML Module Attaching a pointing device You may attach a pointing device such as a mouse trackball or trackpad to the ML Module Switch off the power to the console and to the ML Module Connect the mouse or trackball to the RS232 port labeled Mouse located at the left side of the ML Module s rear panel The pointing device must be Microsoft compatible Device check The pointing device should be ready for use when the console and module are switched on Verify normal operation by patching fixtures as explained under Working with Moving Lights page 16 Movement of the pointing device should
369. talling Designer s Worksheet page 338 20 See Setting Designer s Worksheet options page 29 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 315 Programming regions Before you begin programming design your worksheet regions by drawing them on the worksheet tablet provided Be certain that the tablet has been calibrated See Installing Designer s Worksheet page 338 for details on calibrating the tablet Place your drawing under the clear plastic cover sheet and you re ready to start To create new or edit existing regions and macros follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Turn Designer s Worksheet on 2 With the worksheet pen touch Setup 3 Select 7 Designer s Worksheet Editing and touch Enter 4 Enter the new region number or select an existing region either by touching the region or by entering its number from the keypad 5 Touch Enter 316 Actions Selects Setup display Prompt reads Select region number or touch a previously defined region then touch ENTER The following console screen appears Region 1 Prompt reads Outline region or touch ENTER to continue Chapter 25 Accessories To create a new region or to add to an existing region trace the area you want to define for that region number then press Enter To keep an existing region touch Enter Touch desired keystrokes to create a new macro assigned to the new region Use the arrow keys to edit macros if necessary
370. talling MIDI Connect the console to any MIDI equipment using a standard MIDI cable There are three round 5 pin DIN type connectors labeled MIDI In MIDI Out and Keyboard on the back of the console Turn console power off then connect the cable from the MIDI Out of the electronic instrument or sequencer to the MIDI In on the console Connect the cable from the MIDI In on the instrument or sequencer to the connector labeled MIDI Out WARNING Do not plug the MIDI cable into the connector labeled Keyboard This connector is for use with an optional alohanumeric keyboard and may damage MIDI equipment If you like you can set the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru port See next page for more information on this option Follow these steps to connect MIDI equipment to the console 1 Turn console power off 2 Insert standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the console labeled MIDI In Do not insert MIDI cable into the connector labeled Keyboard 3 If you are sending MIDI commands from the console insert another standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the console labeled MIDI Out MIDI console connectors DIN 5 pin female MIDI pinout 1 not connected 2 Ground 3 not connected 4 MIDI 5 MIDI Appendix A Installation MIDI Out Thru jumper setting You may set the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru port Follow these steps to do so 1 Locate the jumper at location J5 on the face panel circui
371. tem is unable to determine whether the dimmer has a load error The load on dimmer has changed Because the dimmer output is not at a high enough level the Dimmer Monitoring system is unable to determine the size of the load To correct the problem use Check Loads to determine the size of the load change The load on dimmer has changed from ZW to W A decreased load indicates lamp failure An increased load indicates that a lamp has been added since the last Record Load Correct the problem or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load DC output has been detected on dimmer If this condition persists it may harm the connected load Please check the connected load An SCR has failed On Off in dimmer The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed on The dimmer should be replaced Dimmer output has failed off Either the circuit breaker has tripped or the dimmer needs to be replaced Dimmer s load has failed The most likely cause is a lamp failure Either replace the lamp or to prevent further error messages use Clear Load or Record Load Data error on Rack DMX port A B Please check DMX cabling and connections between the console and the rack Rack ambient temperature is high at 4 degrees F The temperature does not yet exceed acceptable operational limits but the rack should be checked Please check the cooling ventilation in the dimmer room Rack ambient te
372. ter the step number where you want to insert the new step Then press Enter The console inserts a blank step before the selected step 24 If you select a range of steps only cue steps will be selected Style steps may only be edited individually and will be left out of selected ranges 232 Chapter 17 Subroutines Chapter 18 Macros A macro allows you to record a series of keystrokes and later replay it with one or two keystrokes This can simplify complex tasks that you perform often You can record up to 2 000 macros depending on how large they are This chapter includes the following sections e Creating macros e Playing macros e Modifying macros e Clearing macros e Copying macros e Sample macros Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 233 234 Creating macros There are two ways to create a macro You can create it in Macro Editing mode entering and editing keystrokes without actually executing the instructions or you can use the console s macro Learn mode to record a sequence of keystrokes as you perform the operation You can include any key or button on the console except Enter Macro in a macro You cannot enter slider settings or wheel movements Each macro can contain up to 50 keystrokes You can also link macros Caution The console does not check the sequence of keystrokes to confirm that it will work It is possible to create macros that don t work When you run the macro you will receive whatever
373. the right Cue channel number window Displays the currently selected cue group or submaster Keypad prompt window Displays the same prompt that appears in the upper right corner of the Stage or Blind display Power switch Power is ON in the up position and OFF in the down position To operate your installed RFU move power switch to ON WARNING Do not connect or disconnect the RFU when it is turned on For RFU installation instructions see Installing Remote Focus Unit page 341 For instruction on installing a remote monitor see Installing remote video monitors page 354 Chapter 25 Accessories Designer s Worksheet Designer s Worksheet gives you control of the console from remote locations such as in the house on the set or backstage The Designer s Worksheet is a digitizer tablet that emulates the console face panel and provides user definable regions All functions may be selected using the stylus supplied with the Designer s Worksheet Three digitizer templates are available The correct template for your worksheet depends on your digitizer s size Each digitizer allows you to program up to 2 000 regions each of which may be associated with a macro 12 x 12 inch digitizer If you own a 12 x 12 inch digitizer you can select one of two digitizer layouts One layout provides control of submasters and faders while the other deletes the submasters for increased workspace area 12 x 17 inch digitizer tablet The 1
374. the same period in the other fader You may also play a cue in one fader leave it there and then play another cue in the second fader Each fader slider has a strip of LEDs next to it When running a timed crossfade cue the lit LEDs indicate the progress of the cue This is displayed as a percentage For example when the LEDs are at 5 50 percent of the cue has run The faders function in level override mode This means that the fader sliders control the percentage of completion of the fade Chapter 10 Playing back cues Fader keys Clear Each fader is equipped with a Clear key To remove a cue from the fader press the appropriate Clear key Clear an effect cue by pressing either once or twice If the effect cue is in an upfade or dwell time pressing Clear once starts a downfade and pressing Clear again ends the downfade in the fader clear time Pressing Clear while an effect is in a downfade ends the downfade in the fader clear time Go Each fader has its own Go key If you press Go before a cue finishes playing the previous cue stops and the new cue begins from the levels at which the previous cue was interrupted Press Go to play back the cue selected on the Cue List Press Go to resume a fade that has been interrupted by pressing Hold Hold Each fader has its own Hold key If a cue is running press Hold to pause playback of the cue Press Hold a second time to cancel playback of the cue in the
375. the Master slider to one of three control options e Disabled e Grandmaster e Sub Grandmaster Master slider does nothing Master slider controls all levels on stage except parked channels and independent channels Master slider controls all levels on stage set by submasters To configure your Grandmaster follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 System Settings Enter 3 Press 1 0 Master Type Enter 4 Press 1 Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays System Settings menu Prompt reads Select master type and press ENTER 0 Disabled 1 Grandmaster 2 Sub Grandmaster Master is set as Grandmaster Set channels submasters 1 to 1 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 sets your console s channels to a one to one match with your submasters Thus channel 1 is patched to submaster 1 channel 2 to submaster 2 and so on Channel levels are set to Full and up dwell down times are set to 0 Manual 0 To reset your channels and submasters follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Setup 2 Press 1 System Settings Enter 3 Press 1 1 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 Enter 4 Press Enter Action Displays Setup menu Displays System Settings menu Prompt reads Select page to default then press ENTER 0 All pages Channels are assigned to submasters The display returns to Setup menu Chapter 3 System settings Record lockout
376. through 12 Corner reads Cue 5 5 Press Enter Submaster Contents of cues 1 3 4 and 5 are copy is complete copied to submasters 9 10 11 and 12 respectively Chapter 13 Submasters Copying cues or groups to submasters To copy a look from a cue or a group to a submaster follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Cuel or Group 3 Press 1 4 Press Record Sub 5 Press 9 6 Press Enter Submaster copy is complete Clearing submasters Actions Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Selects cue to copy Corner reads Cue 1 Prompt reads To record submaster select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR Selects submaster 9 Corner reads Sub 9 Contents of cue 1 are copied to submaster 9 You must be in Blind or Stage display mode to clear the contents of individual submasters This process erases all level setting instructions and attributes from the submaster To clear all submasters use the Clear Submasters option from the Clear Functions menu as described in Clear and reset options page 263 To clear submasters follow these steps Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Sub 3 Press S6 Delete Sub Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Enter the number of the submaster you want to Clear Press Enter Press Enter to delete the submaster or Clear to cancel the action Actions Select
377. tional level The dimmer profile s number and name if assigned The dimmer output level the console is sending to the dimmer Whether or not the dimmer is parked Port number address on the port The rack and slot in which this dimmer is located The actual output level at which the dimmer is set The source of the control signal which set the dimmer s level Possible sources include DMX A DMX B Rack The following information is available on Sensor Advanced Features dimming systems e Recorded lamp load e Load at full e Actual load e Scale Boost e Dimmer errors The load at which the selected dimmer was recorded The estimated load on the dimmer when the level is at Full The actual load currently on the dimmer The dimmer s scale or boost level Scale is reported in volts V and Boost is reported in percentage 96 Describes errors if any Chapter 4 Patching channels Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling ETC s Dimmer Doubling technology can increase the controllable circuits of a 115 volt 60 Hz dimming system 9 Dimmer Doubling converts the output of a single ETC Sensor or L86 dimmer into two separate signals Both signals then provide discrete levels for two ETC Source Four lights You must configure the console by setting the mode of the dimmer and the dimmer s port before the dimmer will function in Dimmer Doubling mode Each dimmer and port is set individually Before patching
378. to add a pointing device such as a mouse to your system See the section in this manual entitled Moving Lights Module page 323 for additional information about this option including installation instructions Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 77 Go to the Encoder Setup display 1 Press Setup 1 5 Enter to display the Moving Light Functions menu 2 Press 4 Enter to go to the Encoder Setup display Navigation and Feedhack Encoder Setup ooo A gt lt Select an encoder Select a page Assign attribute Purple coloration Attributes used in the show Gray coloration Attributes not used in the show Yellow coloration Encoder page selections White coloration Attribute field selected Changing assignments Encoders and other level setting devices are assigned to 44 of the 64 available attributes by default You may change the default settings to suit your individual needs such as to concentrate attributes that you most commonly select an one page or move attributes to particular devices to suit your individual setup or preferences You may not however assign an attribute to more than one location on a page There are three ways to change assignments in the Encoder Setup display individually automatically and back to defaults Chapter 6 Adding moving lights to the show Change individually 1 Select an encoder wheel or pointing device axis with the up down a
379. to the variety of options available in your dimmer monitoring system 02 40 PH ETCLink Status Disabled 3 ta 4 Load Management 5 6 Display Advisories Enab led 1 S S2 Ex S4 S5 S6 S7 s8 c2 INP a IS NEN pem ETCL ink Dimmer Dimmer Return Enabling ETCLink Before using ETCLink functions you must enable your console to work with the ETCLink network After enabling the connection you should decide how to handle error advisory messages See Error messages page 267 Following is one of two ways to enable ETCLink You may also enable ETCLink using softkey S1 in the ETCLink Functions menu shown above Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Select 6 Options Selects Options Settings menu Settings and press Enter 3 Press 8 ETCLink Prompt reads Enter Enable disable ETCLink 1 Enable 0 Disable 4 Press 1 Enter Dimmer Monitoring is enabled Note that option 9 in the Options Settings menu provides for an ETCLink address setting which is related to operating more than one console on ETCLink The default value is 1 and generally should be left as is If you have questions about this setting please call ETC Technical Services at 800 775 4382 Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring Error messages ETCLink provides messages for a wide variety of conditions including information regarding your dimmers racks system data ports and loads These messages fall into two categories
380. to zero This overrides all faders and submasters Then the macro sets work lights at full You can easily return to previous settings by pressing Rel to release captured channels Channel 1 Thru At 0 Enter Full Macro line reads Chan 1 Thru At 00 Enter Chan Full Z work lights channel Clear faders and turn work lights on This macro clears both faders and selects work lights Clear AB Clear CD Channel s Full Macro line reads Clear AB Clear CD Chan Full work lights channel Clear unused channels in Flexichannel mode This macro clears channels that are visible but no longer in use Because this macro uses a softkey you must create it using Learn Setup 1 Enter S1 Stage Macro line reads Setup 1 Enter PurgeFlexi Stage Record show on disk This macro records the current show on disk Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter Macro line reads Setup 3 Enter 1 Enter Enter Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 243 244 Chapter 18 Macros Chapter 19 Link lists Console channels can control devices that have more than one controllable feature such as a color scroller By linking channels using the console s Link List you can link channels together for simultaneous control on the two wheels Any channel not used in ML Fixture Patch may be linked This chapter contains the following sections e Link List overview e Setting up a link e Using a link e Modifying links Expr
381. tocol to ETCNet by pressing S5 Discover Nodes and wait ten seconds If all efforts fail see Help from ETC Technical Services page 10 for information about getting technical assistance Incorrect version or CRC number If one or more devices on your Remote Units list does not show the correct version or CRC number perform a software upgrade for that device You have three options e Upgrade one unit Use the console s arrow keys to move the cursor to the unit Press S3 Update This Unit e Upgrade some units Use the console s arrow keys to move the cursor to a unit you want upgraded Press S8 Mark This Unit to select that unit If you want to upgrade others at the same time repeat this marking procedure for each unit An M will appear in the lines of marked units When finished marking press S2 Update Marked to upgrade the marked units e Upgrade all units Press 1 Update All Units to download to all remote units at once While code is loading to a remote unit the percent completion for that unit is shown in the display s Status column When the word Pass appears the upgrade for that unit is complete NOTE It is normal for software to load faster to an ETCNet2 device than to a Remote Interface Unit or to a Remote Video Interface device Finish 1 Remove the Remote Unit Upgrade disk from the console disk drive 2 Turn the console off Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 347 348 Appendix A Installation Append
382. tomize the console for the number of dimmers and channels in your system set system modes and screen formats and choose default settings for a variety of console functions The following illustration shows default settings Chapter three includes the following sections e Setting number of dimmers e Setting number of channels e Setting default fade times e Setting default Level e Setting default fader clear times e Setting default Sneak time e Selecting Designer s Worksheet option e Blackout key e Selecting Flexichannel mode e Master Type e Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 e Record Lockout e Bump keys e Setting the clock e Naming the show e About Show Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 24 Setting the number of dimmers Your console is set by default to provide 1 536 DMX512 outputs from its 3 DMX512 ports where each port provides up to 512 DMX512 outputs All DMX512 outputs are represented in the Patch display as dimmers You may reduce the dimmer count to save clutter in the Patch display but many prefer to leave the dimmer count at the default setting If you decide to reduce the dimmer count you need to take into consideration a number of factors including how many dimmers are actually in your system whether you are doubling dimmers and whether you are patching moving lights The following three rules can help you determine a comfortable dimmer count on a port by port basis to arrive at an optimal setting for y
383. tor provides information about cues submasters and time code events in your show as well as the current status of the console s two fader pairs The Command display monitor provides the usual programming displays including Stage and Blind according to your programming and monitoring needs These displays allow you to create and run shows and to configure your console and your lighting system You can also use the Playback monitor to provide Command displays thus doubling the number of channels you can view at one time Press Expand to toggle the Playback display between these two functions If your system includes an ETCNet network additional monitors may be installed at other locations such as backstage or in the sound booth These remote monitors show the same displays as the console s monitors See Installing remote video monitors page 354 for information about installing remote monitors The console also provides a set of seven LED displays across the top of your console face panel These displays provide information regarding your faders cues submasters groups and levels This information supplements that supplied by the monitors Chapter two includes descriptions of the following displays e Stage e Blind e Fader e Flexichannel e Tracksheet e Patch e Park e Playback e LED displays Press Swap to exchange the Command and Playback displays between the monitors Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1
384. trols Size and weight e 40x 16 5 x 6 5 inches e 50 pounds Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 375 376 Appendix G Specifications Appendix H Declaration of Conformity DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Electronic Theatre Controls Europe Limited Unit 5 Victoria Industrial Estate London W3 6UU United Kingdom declare under sole responsibility that the product Product name Expression Lighting Control Consoles Product type model Expression3 400 Expression 3 800 Expression 3 1200 amp Insight 3 Lot n a Batch Serial number n a Item numbers One of each model to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards EN60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment following the provisions of EU LV Directive s 73 23 EEC EN55022 Emissions standard for IT equipment class B environment EN50082 1 Generic immunity standard following the provisions of EU EMC Directive s 89 336 EEC and 92 31 EEC London United Kingdom Mr Adam Bennette Place of issue Name of authorised person 9 Nov 1397 h QA Date of Issue si f authorised perso Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 377 378 Appendix H Declaration of Conformity Appendix Limited Warranty Electronic Theatre Controls Inc ETC warrants to the original owner or retail customer Customer that during the warranty period ETC will repair or replace its products that are defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and s
385. ts link 1 to insert All links higher than 1 up to the first gap in the Link List if any are renumbered to make room Prompt reads Select X wheel channel number Precede with AND to add to existing link or EXCEPT to delete from link 5 Proceed with normal link entry a See Setting up a link page 247 Chapter 19 Link lists Moving a link Use S7 Move Link to renumber a link or a group of links All links in a group will be renumbered sequentially To move a link to an empty space on the Link List follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 3 Press S7 Move Link Prompt reads Select link number s to move then press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 4 Press 6 Enter Prompt reads To move selected link s select target link and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 5 Press 9 Enter Link 6 is renumbered as link 9 Merging two links If you move a link to a space on the Link List which already contains a link the channels in the moved link are added to the existing link To move a link to an occupied space on the Link List follow these steps Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter Selects Channel Attributes display 2 Press S7 Link List Selects Link List display Prompt reads Select link number 3 Press S7 Move Link Prompt rea
386. tup to display the Setup Menu Press 2 Output Configuration and press Enter Press J to select the port to configure port 1 2 or 3 Press S3 Starting Dimmer Enter the desired starting number for the port Press Enter twice to confirm your choice OX OL sou Nc You cannot change starting dimmer numbers when using Dimmer Doubling See Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling page 334 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 333 Setting the port to Dimmer Doubling If your console is controlling an ETC Sensor dimming system that can operate in Dimmer Doubling mode each dimmer and the port to which the dimmer is connected must be individually set to support that feature Moving light fixtures cannot be patched to a doubled port WARNING Set the port mode using the procedure below BEFORE you create your patch Changing a port to or from Dimmer Doubler mode unpatches all conventional lights and moving light fixtures controlled by that port Use the following procedure to set a port s mode to double Use the procedure given under Setting dimmers to Dimmer Doubling page 53 to set the mode of individual dimmers to double 1 Press Setup to display the Setup Menu 2 Press 2 Output Configuration and press Enter 3 Press S1 DMX512 Port enter the port to configure port 1 2 or 3 You may also use J to select a port 4 Press Enter 5 Press 1 to set the port for Dimmer Double mode or 0 to set the por
387. ual v 3 1 An Advisory appears if you choose a Start Channel or DMX512 Start address that overlaps patchings for other fixtures A Warning appears if the start address is too high Press Clear to remove the Advisory or the Warning and make other selections After a fixture s start channel is selected levels can be set for the fixture s attributes and recorded into cues The console will not control the moving light however until DMX512 addresses have been set The port and starting address must be set so that there are enough DMX512 outputs for all the attributes of all the fixtures 73 74 Editing the fixture list You may edit or delete fixtures individually or in groups in the Fixture Patch display Editing a fixture 1 From the Fixture Patch display enter the fixture number s 2 Use the left right arrow keys to move to the field where you want to make a change Enter a numeric value or scroll with the or keys to make the change Press Enter Deleting a fixture or a range of fixtures 1 From the Fixture Patch display press S6 Delete Fixture If Delete Fixture is not displayed as a softkey press S7 More Softkeys first then press S6 Delete Fixture 2 Enter the fixture number s 3 Press Enter to delete or press Clear to re select amp When an edit field and fixture are selected you can move quickly to other edit fields or fixtures with the arrow keys Use the left right arrows to
388. ub tb pth odds 122 Modifying fade and wait times llle 123 Chapter 10 Playing back cues co 125 Timed faders and LED displays oooooooocooccocco 126 AA ST ers d 127 A nih ate weber ame wane AASB Pa lee 127 Com rM MM 127 Hold tl Ohad LOSS Be 127 Baco oda nh hu oes Rae ae e db ipd AMO 127 Playback Gue LISt ee tato HE EA Y E NES 128 Fader Stat s diSplay teneur het temere ae hes oe dod 129 Selecting eues usse a EE eaae uei E oda 129 Playingia Uer s xe cs eb eh eet Lene sd a tt sesta os 130 GO toa ditferent Cue use sd wie aes dp er e teda 130 Controlling fades manually llle 131 Manual override 222 duse d REIS bein ad regens 131 Rate overnde urudhvenhuinc obiae do 132 QUICKSIOD ue rot e Rege ee I eti qr xe EA qa 133 Chapter 11 A NR T SR 135 Recording a group in Stage o oo oooooooooo 136 Recording a group from a look on stage o o o oo 136 Recording a group using Solo o ooooooooooooooo 137 Working with groups in Blind 022200008 137 Group mode usce a Ro oar RES 137 Group Editing mode in Blind 2 00 00 00 138 Working with groups in Stage o eiers nie seen 139 Displaying a group e bee et ont e es redes 139 Modifying a group 2 te Ret RERO dn 139 Updating groups occured Se aa id 140 I abelirigz groups ssa Li sd sim cien ol estu tm oe 142 Deleting groups et utet eR E POE e ss 143 Copying groups ooo 14
389. ud ing link lists from the show Real Time Programs Frases all Real Time Programs from the show Time Code Events Frases all Time Code information from the show Moving Lights Unpatches all fixtures and restores the defaults for personalities encoders and attributes 263 264 Chapter 22 Clear functions Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring ETC consoles may be connected to ETC Sensor dimming systems via the ETCLink communication protocol In this configuration the console operates a dimmer monitoring system that provides you with a wide range of dimmer status information including overall dimming system status and specific information about individual dimmer modules and dimmer racks Your window on ETCLink is through the ETCLink Functions menu Most of the dimmer rack and dimming system information provided by console displays is also provided by the the Control Electronics Module CEM of your Sensor dimming system Consult this chapter for information on the following topics e Enabling ETCLink e Enabling disabling ETCLink error messages e Recording checking and clearing dimmer loads e Examining overall dimming system status e Examining rack status e Examining dimmer status e Setting unsetting dimmers with ETCLink e Using Sensor backup looks Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 265 266 ETCLink functions Go to the ETCLink Functions menu by pressing Setup 9 Enter Make selections from this menu to branch
390. uency displays the input frequency in hertz Hz e Ambient temperature displays the temperature of the air drawn into the rack by the rack s fan Ambient temperature is not displayed unless the fan is running Rack error messages if any are announced beneath the ambient temperature line 270 Chapter 23 Dimmer monitoring Dimmer status The Dimmer Status display provides information about dimmers including size and type recorded load firing mode output curve rack slot panic mode and boost Press Setup 9 Enter 3 Enter to access the Dimmer Status display 03 09 PH No errors Type Recorded Firing Curve Slot Panic Scale Load Mode Mode Boost Not Installed Not I I led Not Installed D15RF 1250W m 116U 116U 116U 116U 116U 116U 116U 116U 116V 116V 116V D15RF Ow D15RF Ow D15RF Ow D15RF ow D1SAF ow D15RF ow D15RF ow D15RF ow D1SAF ow D15RF ow Not Installed On aAAWWNN 0 CN lt no 1 2 3 S4 S5 S6 s7 s8 ae E SEN pe NEN ENS Status Dimmer Status Up to 16 dimmers are shown in the display at once If a dimmer has an error condition the entire dimmer row is highlighted in yellow ordinarily the line is in gray Dimmer errors are also identified in the About Dimmer display See About Dimmer with ETCLink page 52 Press S5 Select Dimmer Enter to select a specific dimmer or use and keys to move through the list of dimmers a page at a time Following is an explanation
391. ult settings from the System Settings menu See Chapter 3 System settings for information about setting and changing defaults Follow these steps to record cue 1 11 Keystrokes Action 1 Press Stage Selects Stage display mode Prompt reads Select channel numbers Press 1 Thru 1 0 Selects channels 1 through 10 Press At Prompt reads Enter intensity Press 5 0 Sets a level of 50 percent for channels 1 through 10 5 Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR 6 Press 1 Selects cue 1 7 Press Enter Records cue 1 containing channels 1 through 10 at 50 percent 8 Press Rel Releases captured channels Note that the keypad defaults to cue mode when you press Record Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 89 90 Working with cues in Blind Blind mode allows you to create preview or modify cues without affecting the current look on stage If you prefer to work with live looks you should work in Stage mode Recording a cue in Blind Keystrokes Action 1 Press Blind Selects Blind display mode Prompt reads Select cue number To select cue type press TYPE Press 2 Selects cue 2 3 Press Channel 1 3 And Selects channels 13 and 15 1115 Prompt reads Select channel numbers 4 Press Full Sets channels at full intensity level Press Record Prompt reads To record cue select number and press ENTER To cancel press CLEAR
392. ults aa aaaea 360 Appendix E LT CA EA E E a ae 361 Appendix F Time and location cc 369 United States cities e Gee Rp UP eT s 369 Cities outside the United States oo o o oooooommo o 370 Appendix G Specifications sese 371 Appendix H Declaration of Conformity o 377 Appendix Limited Warranty 379 MBA 1s ra etre eet Ter rt 383 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 xiii xiv Contents Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation and operation of lighting systems containing ETC s Expression 3 control consoles operating with version 3 1 system software It is also intended for use with Expression 2x Concept 2x Impression 2 and Arri Imagine 3 and Finesse control consoles operating with version 3 1 system software with or without a Moving Light Module attachment Chapter one includes information to orient you to the console and the manual It includes the following sections e Using this manual e Using Help e Text conventions e Navigation and visual feedback e Output level conventions e Moving light concepts and terms e The Only command e Electronic backup maintenance e Troubleshooting Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Using this manual This manual provides instructions for using the console s features and optional accessories Setting up the console If you are setting up the system for the first time see Appendix A Installation page 325 and Chapter 3 System
393. us points Editing a focus point in Blind You may modify a focus point in Blind For example add or delete fixtures or set levels of fixture attributes Follow the procedure below to set fixture attribute levels in a focus point The selected fixtures need not already be represented in the focus point Keystrokes 1 Press Blind 2 Press Focus Point 1 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Press Enter Press S8 Fixture 8 Thru 1 2 Only Color At 5 O Press Record Enter Action Selects Blind display mode Selects focus point 1 s channels Prompt reads Group mode To recall a focus point select the number and set it to a level To create or modify a focus point select the number and press ENTER Displays non zero levels of all focus point channels Prompt reads Select channel numbers Sets the color attribute s of fixtures 8 through 12 to 50 Re records focus point 1 as modified a Specify a number here to record to a different focus point such as Record b O Enter If that focus point exists it is overwritten If it does not exist it is created 153 Labeling focus points The console allows you to label a focus point with an alphanumeric keyboard Focus point labels can consist of any combination of letters numbers and symbols and may be up to 16 characters long Follow these steps to label a focus point Keystrokes Action 1 Press Bling Selects Blind
394. uses beyond our control When such circumstances or conditions have been remedied ETC will make and Customer will accept delivery performance Equipment is shipped at the Customer s risk and our obligation to deliver equipment is discharged upon their delivery in good condition to the carrier Shipments are FOB ETC factory or warehouse ETC will prepay and bill freight on UPS shipments Freight and air are sent collect unless specifically quoted otherwise Unless specifically prohibited partial shipments will be made Federal state and or local taxes duties and other charges are the responsibility of the purchaser Any changes in engineering drawings specifications or in other terms of manufacture assembly or shipment requested by customer must be in writing and approved by ETC If any such change by Customer causes an increase in the cost of or in the time required for performance of any part of the contract then ETC shall make a reasonable adjustment to the price of the goods If purchaser cancels any portion of a Purchase Order prior to shipment Purchaser shall be liable to ETC for a cancellation charge equal to ETC s actual costs incurred in connection with that portion of the Purchase Order that is cancelled including without limitation labor and materials Customer represents that it is solvent ETC retains a security interest in the goods to secure payment of the purchase price and all other indebtedness now or
395. well time to 6 seconds and advances to the next field Prompt reads Select step out time 19 Press gt or Enter without a number to skip any selection Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 221 222 7 Press 2 Enter Sets step out time to 2 seconds and advances to the next field Prompt reads Select low level 8 Press 1 0 2 Sets low level to 10 and advances to the next field Prompt reads Select high level 9 Press 9 I0 P Sets high level to 90 and advances to the next field Prompt reads Select step number s To clear step s select step number s then press CLEAR 10 Press T or 4 and repeat Make changes to another step steps 3 9 above 11 Press Record Enter Records your changes to the cue 2 A one digit entry must be followed by Enter and is interpreted as the digit times 10 b A one digit entry must be followed by Enter and is interpreted as the digit times 10 Effect fade times Each effect has an overall upfade dwell and downfade time When you create an effect cue the times default to the cue fade times in your System settings If you have not changed the default settings this means an upfade of zero seconds a dwell of hold and a downfade of zero seconds Press Time to set the effect s upfade dwell and downfade times Fade times may be programmed from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes The number may be entered in normal time format or in decimal format When entered with a
396. what you see is what you get in the cue group or submaster you specify When you use Record to record a cue levels are recorded in only one cue Track is a record function that works only with cues It allows you to build anew cue from the previous cue s channel settings Tracked channels are channels whose levels do not change from one cue to the next A track often runs through several cues for the length of a scene or an act Track also allows you to add tracked channels through existing cues For example if you have created all cues for a scene and then decide to add a few new channels to all cues or adjust the level of a channel throughout the cues Track lets you do so with one short record command To do the same thing with Record would require you to add the new channels to each cue individually Note When a channel level that tracks through a series of cues reaches an Allfade cue the track ends We use the standard Record function for all cues in this chapter Instructions for using the Track function are included in Chapter 8 Track Viewing cues You can view stored cues in two ways live in Stage or Fader displays or on the monitor in Blind mode To view cues live you must select the cue and play it back in a fader See Chapter 10 Playing back cues page 125 for instructions To view a cue only on the screen select Blind mode and enter the desired cue number To view a different cue press Cue and the new cue numb
397. ws dimmer 48 Chapter 2 Monitor displays Playback The Playback display is a composite of three separate windows and provides information related to cues time code events submasters and faders The cue and time code information is provided in the same window in alternation by toggling between the two lists see Time Code List display page 20 The display which is normally seen on the playback monitor is illustrated below You may swap the Playback display with the Command display at any time by pressing Swap on your console keyboard Global settings Show name Submaster List Grandmaster 100 Escape se Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate Label Cue List E Fader status Global settings Current Grandmaster setting and Blackout alert Show name Name of the show currently loaded in the console Submaster List Shows the submaster page and a list of submasters The list identifies labels and slider settings Submaster numbers are colored to identify the type of submaster with gray meaning the submaster is unprogrammed green meaning it is pile on red meaning it is inhibitive and white meaning it is an effect If a submaster s rate is controlled dynamically by the rate wheel feedback is generated in the Playback display This feedback consists of a Blue R shown above the cue list followed by a numerical value for the rate The submaster is identified by a temporary change in its coloration to blue Cue List Lists a
398. xture focus 0 0 eee eee 83 Recording a cue 98 137 Recording a focus point 149 Specifications v ceni eR 371 375 Split fade times o o o 92 Spreadsheet CUBE vae od eee com de fa Pee 187 Focus pointi es pies od ed exa 194 A arent ee pa 192 Submaster 004 190 Step Delete ita s 220 A ive m Roi 218 Subro tirie xm rb ee 228 Strandi DB coated ette 54 Style Stepu coc reed ex DE mes 229 Sub Grandmaster 00 32 Submaster Changing shows 160 Changing type 0 159 Gleason Ain 177 263 Command display list 181 CODY tis CRIA S e eie Lee aat 176 Copy cue orgroup 177 Default match to channels 32 Dwell hold 166 ETO Ge ute dr lira paie E n 158 225 EXGODLU edi rs avete tede d 168 Fade and dwell times 164 Fade times 165 174 Home position 158 In macrose cu od beh Ree UA 239 Inhibitive 158 169 Label or ipee 175 320 391 392 BEIM PED 174 List Playback 161 Load cue or group 176 Loader iden cedes 225 Manual fade 174 Modifying 171 Override fade time 174 PAGS aieo edes 160 168 A E a A 202 Pl Mis iia bee petes 158 Es citra e ore ar ad 259 Range edit in Submaster List 182 late eh ex eT 167 174 Rec rd i exse 164 Recording aa a 168 SIA STS
399. y a flipped channel is identified with a y in the Flip field while unflipped channels have no entry in the Flip field 16 bit Designates whether a channel is used for 8 bit or 16 bit data For 8 bit data there is no entry in the 16b field For 16 bit data the 16b field can have a Hi ora Lo label signifying whether the channel sends the higher or lower bits of a 16 bit control signal LTP Designates whether a channel obeys the Highest Takes Precedence HTP or the Latest Takes Precedence LTP convention HTP chan nels have no entry in the LTP field of the display while LTP channels are identified by a y in the LTP field Label Allows you to assign labels to channels Chan 3 AM Chan Ind Flip 16b LTP Label 9 y y y y y y y y T T y y u u y 1 y 57 58 Editing in the Channel Attributes display Channels not patched to fixtures may be fully edited in the Channel Attributes display Use Thru And and Except if you wish to select multiple channels If a channel is patched to a fixture only the channel label may be edited in the Channel Attributes display Independent channels A channelis normally controlled by the Grandmaster Flash Release Solo and Blackout functions but can be made independent of them 9 Use the procedure below to make one channel or a range of channels independent Keystrokes 1 Press Setupl 2 Press 1 1 Enter 3 Enter channel number s
400. y and use focus point 0 to set levels after assigning a starting channel for DMX In The assignment of a starting channel is known as enabling DMX In and is accomplished in the Options Settings display shown below 9 Menu Disabled Powerup Real Tim External Port Even though focus point 0 functions like any other focus point you cannot create it or record to it using the procedures given in Chapter 12 Focus points page 147 9 DMX In is disabled by default 294 Chapter 24 Control interfaces Keystrokes Action 1 Press Setup Selects Setup menu 2 Press 6 Enter Selects Options Settings menu 3 Press 3 Enter Prompt reads Select DMX512 In starting channel Enter 0 to disable 4 Press 11 0 0 Enter Enables DMX In and specifies channel 100 as the first channel to receive DMX In signals a Make sure you have enough channels to accommodate all DMX In channels If your console has 400 channels and you set the DMX In starting address to 100 only the first 301 DMX In channels will be available in focus point 0 Working with DMX In and focus point 0 After enabling DMX In you can record DMX In levels in the Stage or Fader displays or you can record all active channels except DMX In You can record using focus point 0 or except focus point O without first enabling DMX In The following procedure illustrates the use of the DMX In softkey in the Stage display Keystrokes Action 1 Press Sta
401. y to begin the downfade Press Clear once to fade out an effect cue in the recorded downfade time Press the fader s Clear key twice to cancel an effect from the fader immediately You may use the playback sliders to manually control the cue allowing you to fade the effect up and down with the playback slider Using an effect submaster An effect recorded to a submaster interacts with cues and other submasters on a pile on basis Bring up the effect by pressing the submaster s bump button or raising the slider An effect submaster fades proportionally between zero and the effect s high level The slider acts as a master If the effect s low level is normally 10 percent moving the slider to 50 percent will reduce the effect s low level to 5 percent 22 Adjusting the rate does not affect the overall Up Dwell Down times for the cue or submaster It does however speed up or slow down the individual steps For information about controlling cue or submaster rates see pages Rate override page 132 and Live control of a submaster s rate page 174 23 See Adding a rate to a submaster page 167 for information on changing the rate of a submaster Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 225 226 Chapter 16 Effects Chapter 17 Subroutines A subroutine is a cue that controls the playback of a series of recorded cues Subroutines are similar to linked cues except that they have more playback options You can use subroutines and e
402. you load in show End while playing a cue from show Beginning in the faders you will not be able to view that Beginning cue in the Blind display Instead the Blind display will show the first cue in show End Chapter 7 Cues Working with cues in Stage When recording in Stage such as to record a cue group or submaster you will commonly want to start without any live channels For instance you may want to create a new cue without using any of the lights placed on stage from a previous fade or channel selection To clear lighting from the stage use one or all of the following procedures e fthe lights are from a cue in a fader press the fader s Clear key one or more times e fthe lights are captured press Rel two or more times e f from a submaster lower the slider to zero e ffrom channels running in the background press S3 Background Overrides Enter Enter Recording a cue in Stage There are several ways you can create a cue from a look on stage If you have several cues already stored you may want to base a new cue on the look already recorded for another cue You would do that by playing the cue in the faders and then modifying the resulting look on stage In other circumstances you may want to enter all channel levels manually That is the procedure used below When creating this cue you will only set channel levels Default settings will determine all other attributes of the cue You can change most defa
403. ype e Dimmer manufacturer See Keyboard Help page 2 Expression 3 User Manual v 3 1 Help from ETC Technical Services If you are having difficulties your most convenient resources are the references given in the index of this manual and the console Help system which is explained under Keyboard Help page 2 To search more widely try the ETC website at www etcconnect com If none of these resources are sufficient contact ETC Techncial Services directly at one of the offices identified below In some cases calls outside normal business hours are answered electronically and forwarded to a service representative When calling for help please have the following information handy e Console model and serial number e System software version shown in Setup menu e Dimmer manufacturer and installation type Americas ETC Americas Technical Services Department 3030 Laura Lane Middleton WI 53562 800 775 4382 608 831 4116 service etcconnect com Europe ETC Europe Ltd Technical Services Department 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU England 44 0 20 8896 1000 service etceurope com Asia ETC Asia Ltd Technical Services Department Room 605 606 Tower Ill Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong 852 2799 1220 mail etcasia com Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Monitor displays Expression 3 works with two color video monitors The Playback display moni

Expression 3 - Premier Lighting and Production Company

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents